JMA 9900 Instruction

MARINE RADAR
EQUIPMENT
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
9900
LCD
1087/1089
NKE-1079/1075A
NKE-1079/1075A
NKE-1079/1075A
Then, wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.
Transmitter-receiver Unit Type NTG-3037/3037A
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1075/1075A (12 Feet)
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1089-7(7 Feet）
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1089-9(9 Feet）
Transmitter-receiver Unit Type NTG-3028
―xi―
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1087-6（6 Feet）
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1087-9（9 Feet）
―xii―
Display Unit Type NCD-4263(Self-standing Type)
−xiii−
NWZ-158T 形モニタ部ユニット（卓上形）
Monitor Unit （オプション）
Type NWZ-158T (Desktop Type) (Option)
NDC-1297T 形制御ユニット（卓上形）（オプション）
Control Unit Type NDC-1279T (Desktop Type) (Optyon)
Keyboard形キーボードユニット（卓上形）
NCE-7721T Unit Type NCE-7721T (Desktop Type) (Option)
（オプション）
NDC-4263-T
Display 形指示機（卓上形）
Unit Type （オプション）
NCD-4263T (Desktop Type) (Option)
―xiv―
CONTENTS
PREFACE ....................................................................................... i
Before Operation .......................................................................... ii
Cautions to be Used during Operation ................................... iii
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION

■ Cautions for high voltage .................................................................v
■ What to do in case of electric shock ..............................................v
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
☆ First-aid treatments ..........................................................................vi
☆ When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped ....................vii
☆ When both pulse and breathing have stopped .........................viii
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE ..................................................... ix
GLOSSARY ................................................................................ xxi
1. GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

1.1 FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 FEATURES ......................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................. 1-5
1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWING ...................................................................... 1-7
1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM ....................................................1-20
1.6 COLLISION AVOIDANCE ...............................................................1-27
2. NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL

SWITCHES AND FUNCTION OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
2.1 NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES ....... 2-1
2.2 FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ......................................... 2-7
- xv -
3. BASIC OPERATION
3.1 FLOW OF OPERATION .................................................................... 3-1
■ Power ON and Start the System .................................................. 3-2
■ Observe and Adjust Video ........................................................... 3-4
■ Tuning Operations ......................................................................... 3-6
■ Acquire and Measurement Data .................................................. 3-7
■ End the Operation and Stop the System ................................... 3-7
3.2 MENU COPOSITION ......................................................................... 3-8
3.3 PREPARATION ................................................................................ 3-11
■ Tuning[TUNE] ............................................................................... 3-11
■ Sensitivity Control [GAIN] .......................................................... 3-11
■ Display Brilliance Control ...........................................................3-12
■ Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO] ...............................................3-12
■ Sea Clutter Suppression [RAIN] ................................................3-13
■ Brilliance Control .........................................................................3-13
■ Day/Night Mode Selection [DAY/NIGHT] ..................................3-21
■ Color Setting [COLOR] ...............................................................3-22
3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS .....................................................................3-34
■ Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball ...............................3-34
■ Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackball ..............3-35
■ Use EBLs(Electronic Bearing Lines) ........................................3-41
■ Set Floating EBL ..........................................................................3-43
■ Set Floating EBL ..........................................................................3-45
■ Select Range [RANGE] ...............................................................3-47
■ Set Maximum Range ...................................................................3-47
■ Select Pulse Length ....................................................................3-48
■ Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ..............................3-49
■ Cancel Ship's Heading Line [HL OFF] ......................................3-49
■ Cancel All Display Items Except HL and Cross Cursor
Mark [+] [DATA OFF] ....................................................................3-49
■ Display PI (Parallel Index Lines) [PI] .........................................3-50
■ Move Own Ship's Display Position [OFF CENTER] ...............3-53
■ Display Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS] ........................................3-54
■ Display Own Ship's Tracks and Own Symbols[OWN SHIP] ..3-55
■ Marking [MARK] ...........................................................................3-58
■ Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS] ....................................3-59
■ Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2] .....................3-59
■ Set Guard Zone [GUARD ZONE] ...............................................3-61
■ Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] ..........................................3-63
■ Set Alarm Sound Level ...............................................................3-63
- xvi -
■ Check Operation Status [TEST] ................................................3-64
■ FUNCTION ....................................................................................3-73
■ Expand Targets ............................................................................3-74
■ Display Processed Videos .........................................................3-75
■ Reduce Radar Interference ........................................................3-76
■ Personal Information ..................................................................3-77
■ Display of Navigational Information .........................................3-80
■ Function of USER Switch / OPTION Switch ............................3-96
■ Operation of Performance Monitor ...........................................3-97
■ EBL Maneuvering ......................................................................3-103
4. MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING

■ Measurement by Trackball ........................................................... 4-1
■ Measurement by Range Rings .................................................... 4-2
■ Measurement by EBLs and VRMs .............................................. 4-2
■ Measurement by between Two Optional Points ....................... 4-4
5. OPERATION OF ARPA AND AIS

Using ARPA .............................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 INITIAL SETTING ............................................................................... 5-2
■ Setting Collision Decision Criteria : SAFE LIMIT ..................... 5-2
■ Automatic Setting Mode (System Start) .................................... 5-4
■ Setting Range Scale : RANGE SCALE ....................................... 5-4
■ Setting Own Ship's Speed ............................................................ 5-5
5.2 DISPLAY MODE SETTING ............................................................... 5-7
■ Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM] ...................................... 5-7
■ Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ............................... 5-7
5.3 TARGET ID No. DISPLAY ................................................................. 5-8
5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION .................................................................... 5-9
■ Automatic Acquisition [AUTO] .................................................. 5-11
■ Manual Acquisition [MANUAL] .................................................5-12
■ Use of Automatic and Manual
Acquisition Modes [ACQ AUTO] [ACQ MANUAL] ............... 5-13
5.5 ARPA DATA DISPLAY .....................................................................5-13
■ Display of Vectors ........................................................................5-13
■ Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN] ..................................5-16
5.6 DATA DISPLAY ................................................................................5-18
■ Types of Data Display .................................................................5-18
■ Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA] ......................5-19
- xvii -
■ Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA] .............5-19
5.7 ALARM DISPLAY .............................................................................5-20
■ Dangerous Target Alarm: CPA/TCPA .......................................5-20
■ Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONE] ..........................................5-21
■ Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET] ..........................................5-22
■ System Function Alarm [ARPA(DATA)] ...................................5-23
■ Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYRO] .....................................................5-23
5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING ..................................................................5-24
■ Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode .............................5-24
■ Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ......................5-25
■ Using the TRIAL Function ..........................................................5-26
5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS ..............................................5-27
■ Deleting Targets ...........................................................................5-27
5.10 ARPA SETTING .............................................................................5-29
■ Simulation .....................................................................................5-30
■ Gate Size .......................................................................................5-32
■ Test Video ......................................................................................5-34
6. TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY

■ Radar Wave with the Horizon ...................................................... 6-1
■ Strength of Reflection from the Target ....................................... 6-3
■ Sea Clutters .................................................................................... 6-3
■ False Echoes .................................................................................. 6-3
■ Display of Radar Transponder (SART) ...................................... 6-6
7. MAINTENANCE
7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ............................................................... 7-1
7.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT .................................................... 7-2
■ Scanner NKE-1079/10750/1089/1087 .......................................... 7-2
■ Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037/3037A/3028 ..................... 7-4
■ Display Unit NCD-4263 ................................................................. 7-5
■ Coaxial Cable JMA-9933-SA ........................................................ 7-5
■ Wave Guide JMA-9923-7XA/9XA ................................................ 7-6
8. COUNTERMEASURES FOR
TORUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT
8.1 FUNCTION CHECK ........................................................................... 8-1
■ Function Check on Test Menu ..................................................... 8-2
■ List of Alarms and other Indications ........................................8-10
- xviii -
8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................8-13
8.3 COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE ........................................8-14
8.4 REPLACEMNT OF MAJOR PARTS ..............................................8-20
■ Replacement of Magnetron (V1/V201) .....................................8-21
■ Replacement to TRHPL
(A202/A203)(JMA-9933-SA/9932-SA) .......................................8-21
■ Replacement of Diode Limiter(A203)
(JMA-9923-7XA/9XA, JMA-9922-6XA/9XA)................................8-20
■ Replacement of PIN Attenuator(A302)
(JMA-9923-7XA/9XA, JMA-9922-6XA/9XA)...............................8-21
■ Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor ............................8-22
8.5 ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................8-23

■ Tuning Adjustment ......................................................................8-24
■ Bearing Adjustment ....................................................................8-25
■ Range Adjustment .......................................................................8-26
■ Antenna Height Adjustment ......................................................8-27
■ Vector Constant ...........................................................................8-28
■ Quantization Level .......................................................................8-29
■ Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log .............8-30
■ Main Bang Suppression Adjustment .......................................8-32
8.6 SETTING ...........................................................................................8-34

■ True Bearing Setting ...................................................................8-34
■ Ship Speed Setting ......................................................................8-35
■ Navigation Equipment Setting ..................................................8-37
■ Current Correction(SET/DRIFT) Setting ...................................8-38
■ Time/Day Display Setting ...........................................................8-40
■ Adjustment of Performance Monitor(NJU-63/64) ...................8-42
■ Adjustment of Inter switch...........................................................8-44
9. AFTER-SALES SERVICE
■ When you Request for Repair ..................................................... 9-1
■ Recommended Maintenance ....................................................... 9-1
■ Radar Failure Check List .............................................................. 9-2
- xix -
10. DISPOSAL
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT .............................................................10-1
10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES .............................................10-1
10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON .........................................10-1
11. SPECIFICATION
11.1 JMA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR ....................................................... 11-1
11.2 JMA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR ....................................................... 11-2
11.3 JMA-9923-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................................. 11-3
11.4 JMA-9922-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................................. 11-4
11.5 SCANNER(NKE-1079) .................................................................. 11-5
11.6 SCANNER(NKE-1075) .................................................................. 11-6
11.7 SCANNER(NKE-1089-7/9............................................................... 11-7
11.8 SCANNER(NKE-1087-6/9) ............................................................ 11-8
11.9 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT(NTG-3037) ........................... 11-9
11.10 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT(NTH-3028) ....................... 11-10
11.11 DISPLAY UNIT(NCD-4263) ....................................................... 11-11
11.12 ARPA ........................................................................................... 11-12
11.13 PERFORMANCE MONITOR(NJU-63) .................................... 11-13
11.10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR(NJU-64) .................................... 11-13
APPENDIX
JMA-9900 ARPA Series Radar System Composition ...................... A-1
JMA-9900 ARPA Series Radar System Circuit Block ....................... A-2
Fig.101 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA and JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

Fig.102 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA and JMA-9922-6XA/9XA
Fig.103 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA
(SELF STANDING TYPE)
(DESK TOP TYPE)
(SELF STANDING TYPE )
(DESK TOP TYPE )
Fig.107 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
(SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 3φ)
(SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)
(DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 3φ)
(DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)
- xx -
(SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 3φ)
(SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)
(DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 3φ)
(DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)
Fig.115 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA
Fig.116 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA
Fig.117 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
Fig.118 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA
Fig.119 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1079
Fig.120 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1079-D
Fig.121 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
Type NKE-1075/1075A (100V AC,1-phase)
Fig.124 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1089-7/9 (1-phase)
Fig.128 Internal Connection Diagram of Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3037/3037A
Fig.129 Internal Connection Diagram of Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3028
Fig.130 Internal Connection Diagram of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
Fig.131 Internal Connection Diagram of CRT Monitor of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
Fig.132 Internal Connection Diagram of Power Supply of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
Fig.133 List of NSK and LOG Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
Fig.134 Setting Table of Speed LOG Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
Fig.135 Setting Table of Gyro Compass and Gyro Select Switches of
Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
Fig.136 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 2-unit Interswitchesystem, Type NQE-3141N
Fig.137 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 3-unit Interswitches
System, Type NQE-3141N
Fig.138 Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141N
- xxi -
Rejection
Use as a temporary marker

23.1 inch color raster-scan LCD display unit
9900
In addition, a radar switching function ( interswitch ) can be added to switch between two, four or eight
eight radar units. However, in order to this function for four or eight units, an external switching box is
necessary.
9900
LCD
the soft button on a screen and screen menu.
9900
9933
9932
9923
9923
9922
9922
NTG-3037
9933 1079
NTG-3037A
NKE-1075 (*)
9932
NKE-1075A (*)
9923 1089-7
230
3028 4263
100/230V
9923 1089-9
9922 1087-6
9922 1087-9
9933 230
230
230
1079
1075/1075A
1089-7
1089-9
1087-6
1087-9
3037/3037A
3028
4263
158T
1279T
7721T
Fig.1.1 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF
SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1079
1―8
SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1075
1―9
SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1089-7
1―10
1―11
1―12
1―13

1―13
TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT,TYPE NTG-3037/3037A
1―14
TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT,TYPE NTG-3028
1―15
Fig.1.9 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF DISPLAY UNIT,
TYPE NCD-4263(SELF-STANDING TYPE)
1―16
Fig.1.10 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF MONITOR UNIT,
TYPE NWZ-158 (DESKTOP TYPE)(OPTION)
1―17
Fig.1.11 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF CONTROL UNIT,
TYPE NDC-1279 (DESKTOP TYPE)(OPTION)
1―18
Fig.1.12 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF KEYBOARD UNIT,
TYPE NCE-7721 (DESKTOP TYPE)(OPTION)
1―19
Fig.1.13 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9933-SA
Fig.1.14 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9932-SA
Fig.1.15 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923-7XA

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
NKE-1079 SCANNER UNT
１ 250V-DPYCYS-1.25
SHIP'S MAIN COAXIAL CABLE

CIRCUIT BREAKER
AC100/110V HF-20D (JRC SUPPLY)
50/60Hz, 1φ, 200W
SK-32C
(5A)
OPTION)
14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE
H-2695110056 NTG-3037 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT
MAX 30MT φ23 (JRC SUPPLY)
3038

H-2695110056
MAX 35MT φ23 (JRC SUPPLY)
NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT
4263
GYRO 250V-MPYCYS-5
250V-DPYCYS-1.25 660V-TPYCYS-5.5 SHIP'S MAIN
LOG
AC110/220V
250V-TTYCS-1 60Hz, 1φ
ＧＰＳ
AC220V
60Hz, 3φ
800VA
AC100/230V
50/60Hz, 1 Φ
AC230V
50/60Hz, 3 Φ
1kVA
Note: Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and
navigation due to operation of the radar.
All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.
(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)
Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar
should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.
Fig.1.13 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

RADAR, TYPE JMA-9933-SA
1−21 9933
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
NKE-1075 SCANNER UNIT

１
250V-DPYCYS-1.25
SHIP'S MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

AC100/110V
50/60Hz,1φ,100W SK-32C
(5A)
（OPTION）

H-2695110056
MAX 65MT φ23（JRC SAPPLY）
NCD-4263 DISPLAY
4263 UNIT
GIRO 250V-MPYCYS-5
LOG AC100/110/220/230V
AC100/230V
GPS
AC220/230V
50/60Hz, 1 Φ
60Hz, 3φ
AC230V
800VA
50/60Hz, 3 Φ
1kVA
RADAR, TYPE JMA-9932-SA
9932
1−22
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
１
-1089-7
NKE-1089-7 SCANNER UNIT
250V-DPYCYS-1.25

SHIP'S MAIN CIRCUT BREAKER
AC100/110V H-2695110056
50/60Hz, 1φ, 100W SK-32C MAX 30MT φ23 (JRC SAPPLY)
(5A) (OPTION)
FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE
FR-9 (JRC SAPPLY)
3028
NTG-3028 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT

H-2695110056
MAX 35MT φ23 (JRC SAPPLY)
NCD-4263 DISPAY UNIT

4263
GYRO 250V-MPYCYS-5
LOG
AC100/110/220/230V
GPS
AC220/230V
AC100/230V
60Hz, 3φ
50/60Hz, 1 Φ
600VAAC230V
50/60Hz, 3 Φ
800VA

RADAR, TYPE JMA-9923-7XA
1−23 9923
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
-1089-9
NKE-1089-9 SCANNER UNIT １

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

AC100/110V H-2695110056
50/60Hz, 1φ, 100W SK-32C MAX 30MT φ23 (JRC SAPPLY)
(5A) (OPTION)
FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE
FR-9 (JRC SAPPLY)
3028
NTG-3028 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT

H-2695110056
MAX 35MT φ23 (JRC SAPPLY)

4263
GYRO 250V-MPYCYS-5
LOG
AC100/110/220/230V
GPS
AC220/230V
AC100/230V
60Hz, 50/60Hz,
3φ 1Φ
600VAAC230V
50/60Hz, 3 Φ
800VA
9923
1−24
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
-1087-6
１ NKE-1087-6 SCANNER UNIT
250V-DPYCYS-1.25

AC100/110V
50/60Hz,1φ,100W SK-32C
(5A)
（OPTION）

H-2695110056
4263
GYRO 250V-MPYCYS-5
250V-DPYCYS-1.25 660V-TPYCYS-5.5
LOG SHIP'S MAIN
AC100/230V
AC100/110/220/230V
GPS 250V-TTYCS-1 50/60Hz, 1 Φ
60Hz, 1φ
AC230V
AC220/230V
50/60Hz, 3 Φ
60Hz, 3φ
600VA 800VA

1−25 9922
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
-1087-9
NKE-1087-9 SCANNER UNIT

１
250V-DPYCYS-1.25

AC100/110V
50/60Hz,1φ,100W SK-32C
(5A)
（OPTION）

H-2695110056
4263
GYRO 250V-MPYCYS-5
250V-DPYCYS-1.25 660V-TPYCYS-5.5 SHIP'SAC100/230V
MAIN
LOG
50/60Hz, 1 Φ
AC100/110/220/230V
GPS 250V-TTYCS-1 AC220V
60Hz, 1φ
AC220/230V
50/60Hz, 3 Φ
60Hz, 3φ
800VA
600VA

1−26 9922
SECTION 2
NAME AND FUNCTION OF
CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES
AND FUNCTION OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES.......................2-1

FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS .......................................................2-6
2
Tuning Auto tuning Function operated
Target Own Speed sensor
indicator (MANUAL indicated in Target ship symbol Off center by trackball True bearing of cursor mark
ship's trail ship's track (MANUAL/LOG（1-axis）
Manual tuning) in data indication Cursor mark Relative bearing
Target CPA ring /2AXW（2-axis log water）
Bearing indicator ship ID position (with GPS) of cursor mark （ON/OFF) /2AXG（2-axis ground））
Pulse width Target ship vector VRM1 EBL1 VRM2
Range scale 350 000 010

- 6 + AUTO CURSOR （ ACUIRE ） OS STAB GND
340 020
Range marker interval TRUE 137.1 °
1 SP HDG 245.0 °
True Motion (TM)/ 330 030 4.514 nm
Relative Motion (RM) SPEED 15.0 kts
indicator
RM N UP REL 252.1 ° MAN WATER
TRANSMIT 320 040 N 35゜31.675' COG 279.1 °
Transmit/
Standby indicator X-BAND E139゜43.773' SOG 9.2 kts
SET 30.0 ° Current set
310 1 050
OFF Current drift
X/S band indicator DRIFT 9.0 kts
(in use of 2-frequecy
CENTER
U 2003 / 03 / 18 14：36 Date indication
Screen Display Example
scanner only) HL OFF OWN N 35°35.0000'

300 060
Interswitch CPA MAN E139°40.0000'
connection pattern RING ARPA STAB GND
VECTOR T 6 min Vector time
290 070 CPA setup
LIMIT
1.5 nm 10 min TCPA setup
Own ship's position PAST POSN T 1 min
280 080 GUARD ZONE 1 2 Guard zone
TARGET ID No 2 Target ship ID
True bearing (deg)
2-1
BRG 264 °
RANGE 3.5 nm Tange (nm)
270 090
2 COURSE 281 ° True course (deg)
6 SPEED 9.3 kts True speed (knot)
3 CPA 0.4 nm CPA (nm)
Safety ship symbol TCPA -2581.4 min TCPA (min)
260 100 BCR nm BCR (nm)
BCT min BCT (min)
HL
TARGET ID No 1
Ship's heading marker 5
(displayed to indicate the 250 110 BRG 344 °
true bearing of own ship's RANGE 3.8 nm
heading marker with gyro F MAP COURSE 279 °
compass connected) 4 SHIFT SPEED 9.2 kts Target ship data 2
ACT
120 CPA 1.0 nm
Radar interference DACT 240
reflector DEPTH TCPA 5988.6 min
100m BCR nm
IR 230 130 BCT min
Sea clutter suppression DAY1
(SEA) AUTO GAIN PANEL DISPLAY INFO Display information
Rain/snow clutter SEA 220 140 FUNC3 NAV TOKYO NAV line name
suppression (RAIN) RAIN EBL1 T 037.0 °C PIN Personal code name
MANUAL TRACK 3min 210 150 EBL2 T 135.0 °O MENU PI GZ TEST
Own ship's track TRAILS 0.5min T VRM1 1.70 nm
200 160
memory interval PROC PROC1 ENH OFF VRM2 2.20 nm No Alarm ACK
190 180 170
Radar video track EBL2 Guard zone Cursor mark VRM2 range
indication interval EBL2 bearing Alarm indication
Radar video enhance mode
EBL1 bearing
NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES
Radar video processing mode VRM1 range T: True bearing indication R: Relative bearing indication
(Operable VRM1 selected)
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1 2
PWR
POWER
ACK
5 6 7 8 9
PWR FAIL
28
3 4
TX ALARM
RANGE
STBY ACK
2-2
TUNE RAIN SEA GAIN
10 11 16 17 18 19 13 14
T/R TGT ACQ ACQ
EBL1 EBL2 VRM1 VRM2
VECT DATA MANUAL CANCEL
DAY AIS/ HL DATA

NIGHT ARPA OFF OFF
29 30
Name and Function of Control Panel Switches
OPTION OPTION
PANEL USER
1 2
12 24 25 26 27 15
20 21 22 23
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
① [POWER] (Power Supply) Switch

This switch is used to turn the power on and off. The lamp lights when this switch is on.
When the power is on and it cannot be turned off for some reason, depressing this switch for five
seconds will force the power off.
② [PWR ACK] (Power Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch
2
When this switch is set to ON, the lamp lights to start the system.
In order for this key to work, an external battery is required (normally a power supply separate
from the AC unit).
③ [TX/STBY] (Operation) Switch

The「STANDBY｣ will appear at the upper left of the radar display about 3 minutes after
the [PWR] switch is set to ON. Then, press this switch, and transmission will be started.
Pressing the switch during transmission sets the equipment to the standby state.
④ [ALARM ACK] (Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch

Press this switch to acknowledge a failure, approach of a target, or collision alarm.
⑤ [TUNE] (Turning) Control

Tunes the target signals to display the targets most clearly on the radar display.
Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.
⑥ [RAIN] (Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression) Control

Reduces the clutter echo caused by rain and snow.
Be careful not to set this adjustment too high. Setting this adjustment too high may cause the
target to be erased. Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.
⑦ [SEA] (Sea Clutter Suppression) Control

Reduces the clutter echo caused by the surface of the sea.
Be careful not to set this adjustment too high. Setting this adjustment too high may cause the
target to be erased. Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.
⑧ [GAIN] (Receiving Sensitivity) Control

Controls the radar receiving sensitivity.
Adjust the GAIN to a point where the background static does not interfere with operation.
⑨ [RANGE +/-] (Range Scale Select) Switch

Selects a range scale from 0.125 to 96 (or 120) nautical miles.
⑩ [EBL1] (Electric Bearing Line 1) Switch

Selects and displays EBL1. Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this
switch if valid. When depressed for two seconds or longer, this switch selects ON/OFF for the
floating setting.
⑪ [EBL2] (Electric Bearing Line 2) Switch

Selects and displays EBL2. Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this
switch if valid. When depressed for two seconds or longer, this switch selects ON/OFF for the
floating setting.
⑫ [EBL] (Electric Bearing Line) Control

Rotates the bearing of the EBL that is selected by EBL1 and 2.
⑬ [VRM1] (Variable Range Marker 1) Switch

2-3
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Selects and displays VRM1.

Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this switch if valid.
⑭ [VRM2] (Variable Range Marker 2) Switch

Selects and displays VRM2.
2
Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this switch if valid.
⑮ [VRM] (Variable Range Marker) Control

Changes the range of the VRM that is selected by VRM1 and 2.
⑯ [T/R VECT] (TM/RM Mode Select) Switch

Selects the ARPA vector display in the TM or RM mode.
⑰ [TGT DATA] (Target Data Setup) Switch

This switch is used to display numeric data of ARPA being tracked and AIS being displayed.
When this switch is depressed for two seconds, the numeric display next to symbols will be
turned on and off.
⑱ [ACQ MANUAL] (Manual Acquisition) Switch

This switch turns on and off manual acquisition of ARPA targets.
When this key is pressed, the cursor mode is changed to the manual acquisition setting mode.
⑲ [ACQ CANCEL] (Acquisition Cancel) Switch

This switch cancels the symbol and vector of an ARPA target being tracked, and stops tracking
the target.
If depressed for two seconds or longer, that tracking of all targets will be cancelled. (ARPA
display)
When using with AIS, pressing this for two seconds, all targets will be paused and displayed.
⑳ [DAY/NIGHT] (Day/Night Mode Select) Switch

Switches the screen color and brilliance according to the DAY, DAY2, NIGHT1 and NIGHT2
setting.
21 [AIS/ARPA]
Selects whether to use the ACQ MANUAL and ACQ CANCEL keys with ARPA or AIS.
22 [HL OFF] (Heading Line Off) Switch

The ship’s heading line (HL) can be cancelled as long as this switch is depressed.
23 [DATA OFF]
While this switch is depressed, graphics other HL, the range ring, EBL and VRM will be deleted
temporarily.
24 [PANEL] (Operation Panel Brightness) Switch

Controls the brightness of the controls and switches on the operation panel.
25 [USER]
The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to operate that
option.
At the time of factory shipments, it is set as ON of the function which switches the vector length
of "ARPA" in 60 minutes, and OFF.
2-4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
26 [OPTION1]
The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to operate that
option.
The call of a MENU is assigned at the time of factory shipments.
27 [OPTION2]
2 The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to operate that
option.
The call of a TEST is assigned at the time of factory shipments.
28 [Trackball]
The trackball is used to move the cursor to arbitrary locations on the screen. It is used to make
settings in the various modes.
It is used to specify the center position of floating EBLs and specify the off center position.
29 [Left Trackball Button]

This button Is used to select various modes and confirm numeric input.
In the MARK mode, it is used to confirm the screen mark. During manual acquisition of ARPA,
it is used to confirm acquisition.
30 [Right Trackball Button]

In the MARK mode, this button is used to delete screen marks.
During manual acquisition of ARPA, it is used to release acquisition.
31 [BRILL] Control
Controls the brilliance of the entire display panel.
Brilliance knob is located right-hard if a screen.
2-5
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS

This radar provides software buttons on the screen which can be used to set important functions
directly and swiftly without opening a menu.
2
-
1
6
1
+
3
SP
4
AUTO
5
340
350 000
27
010
26
020
25
CURSOR （
TRUE
ACUIRE
24
137.1 °
） OS STAB
HDG
40 41
GND
42
245.0 °
2
330 030 4.514 nm SPEED 15.0 kts
6 RM N UP REL 252.1 ° MAN WATER
7 TRANSMIT 320 040 N 35゜31.675' COG 279.1 °
X-BAND E139゜43.773' SOG 9.2 kts
SET 30.0 °
OFF DRIFT
8 310 050 9.0 kts
CENTER
U 2003 / 03 / 18 14：36
HL OFF OWN N 35°35.0000'
300 060
CPA MAN E139°40.0000'
RING ARPA STAB GND
VECTOR T 6 min
290 070
LIMIT 43
1.5 nm 10 min
T 1 min
44
PAST POSN
280 080 GUARD ZONE 1 2 45
TARGET ID No 2
BRG 264 °
RANGE 3.5 nm
270 090
COURSE 281 °
SPEED 9.3 kts
CPA 0.4 nm
TCPA -2581.4 min
260 100 BCR nm
BCT min
TARGET ID No 1
250 110 BRG 344 °
RANGE 3.8 nm
12 MAP COURSE 279 °
SHIFT SPEED 9.2 kts
９ ACT 240 120 CPA 1.0 nm
10 DACT DEPTH TCPA 5988.6 min
11 nm
100m BCR min
13 IR 230 130 DAY1 BCT
GAIN PANEL DISPLAY INFO
15 SEA 220 140 FUNC3 NAV TOKYO 50
17 RAIN EBL1 T 037.0 °C PIN 51
TRACK 3min 210 150 EBL2 T 135.0 °O MENU PI GZ TEST
TRAILS 0.5min T 200 160
VRM1 1.70 nm
PROC PROC1 ENH OFF VRM2 2.20 nm No Alarm ACK
190 180 170
19 20 21 22 23 18 16 14 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 46 47 48 49
By positioning the arrow cursor on the buttons indicated by 51 to in the figure above and then
pressing the left trackball button, the settings can be changed in the ways described below.
2-6
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
① Range selection
Changes the radar range.
“+”: Increases the range by one step. (The maximum range is 96 or 120 nautical miles.)
“-”: Decreases the range by one step. (The minimum range is 0.125 nautical mile.)
② RINGS indicator selection

Turns on and off the fixed distance scale display. When this is turned on, the intervals of the
2 ③
range rings will be displayed. When this is turned off, then “OFF” will be displayed.
Pulse width selection

Select the pulse width. There are three pulse widths: Short pulse (SP), middle pulse (MP)
and long pulse (LP). The pulse widths that can be used depend on the range being used. If a
change cannot be made, then nothing will be displayed. This setting is stored for each range.
④ Tuning indicator mode

Sets the tuning mode to MANUAL or AUTO.
MANUAL → AUTO
（Manual tuning）→（Automatic tuning）
⑤ Bearing mode selection

This has the same function as the [AZI MODE] switch. It switches between North-up (true
bearing), Head-up (relative bearing) and Course-up. Each time this button is clicked it will step
through the settings in the following order: “N UP” ⇒ “C UP” ⇒ “H UP”
⑥ Motion mode selection

The screen display is changed between the True Motion (TM) and Relative Motion (RM)
displays. Clicking this button will switch between “TM” and “RM.” (R) indicates a relative trail.
(T) indicates a true trail.
⑦ Transmission/Standby selection
About three minutes after the [PWR] switch is turned on, the “PREHEAT” indication on the upper
left of the screen will change to “STANDBY.”
STANDBY: Indicates that the unit is in the standby state. Clicking the switch at this time will
change the unit to the transmission state.
TRANSMIT: Indicates that the unit is in the transmission state. Clicking the switch at this time
will change the unit to the standby state.
⑧ Change Interswitch connection

This is displayed if Interswitch is connected. The indicator shows the connected scanner and
the connection status of the indicator. When this switch is pressed, a menu to change the
connection states of the scanner and indicator will be displayed. The scanner and indicator
connection states cannot be changed, unless the master indicator is in the standby state.
⑨ AIS target refreshed (ACT)

When this switch is pressed, the AIS target will be activated.
⑩ AIS target deactivated (DACT)

When this switch is pressed, the activated AIS target is paused.
⑪ ARPA symbol indicator selection

Turns the ARPA symbol indicator on or off. The setting is changed each time this button is
clicked.
⑫ AIS symbol indicator selection

Turns the AIS symbol indicator on or off. The setting is changed each time this button is
clicked.
2-7
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
⑬ Radar interference reflector function selection

Turns on and off the radar interference reflector (IR). The IR is turned on or off each time this
switch is clicked.
⑭ Radar reception scale (GAIN)

This indicates the degree the knob has been turned.
⑮ Sea clutter suppression function (SEA) selection

Selects either manual or automatic sea clutter suppression.
position in the manual mode.
The bar on the right indicates the 2
⑯ Sea scale
This indicates the amount the knob has been turned in manual mode. When in auto
mode,“AUTO”will be displayed.
⑰ Rain/snow clutter suppression function (RAIN) selection

Selects either manual or automatic rain/snow clutter suppression. The bar on the right
indicates the position in the manual mode.
⑱ Rain scale
This indicates the amount the knob has been turned in manual mode. When in auto mode,
“AUTO”will be displayed.
⑲ Own ship’s trail indication interval function (TRACK) selection

Turns on and off the own ship’s trail indication interval.
⑳ Radar trail indicator function (TRAILS) selection

Sets the time intervals for radar trails. OFF, 0.5MIN, 1MIN, 3MIN, or 6MIN can be selected.
21 Image processing function (PROC) selection

Sets the image processing mode. OFF, PROC1, PROC2 or PROC3 can be selected.
22 Radar trail mode selection

Sets true trail or relative trail when operating the radar trail function.
“T” is displayed when true trails are used and “R” is displayed for relative trails.
This setting is also limited by the radar bearing mode.
When the North-up (N UP) mode is used, switching between “T” and “R” is possible.
When the Course-up (C UP) mode is used, only “T” is set.
When the Head-up (H UP) mode is used, only “R” is set.
23 Radar image enhance (ENH) function selection

Turns on and off the radar image enhance function. It is turned on or off each time this switch is
clicked.
24 Cursor mode selection

Sets the cursor mode. Clicking this button will display a pull-down menu. After setting the
mode, the cursor can be moved and the left trackball button used to make various settings.
Because all the modes are to be used during radar transmission, a mode may not operate
properly if it is selected in the standby state.
25 Off center mode selection

This has the same function as the [OFF CENT] switch. Shifts the own ship position within the
screen (within 60% of the scope’s radius) to display a wider range in an arbitrary direction.
When this button is pressed when the system is already in the off center mode, then the off
center function will be turned off.
2-8
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
26 Heading line off setting

Has the same function as the [HL OFF] key. While this switch is clicked, the heading lines (HL)
display will be turned off.
27 CPA RING indicator selection

Turn on and off the CPA RING display.
When the vector mode is TRUE, the CPA RING cannot be turned on.
2 28 MAP SHIFT
This is used to mode maps made by users.
29 DEPTH
This displays the depth received from external devices.
The □ button can be used to turn on and off the depth graph display.
30 DAY/NIGHT setting
This button selects the day or night mode. The mode changes each time this button is clicked.
There are four settings: DAY1→ DAY2 → NIGHT1 → NIGHT2.
31 PANEL/BRILL VIDEO/BRILL ARPA setting

The modes PANEL, VIDEO, and ARPA which adjust luminosity are switched.
The mode changes each time this button is clicked.
There are three settings: PANEL→VIDEO→ARPA.
32 Brilliance adjustment
Each time this switch is clicked, it will go to the next of four (BRILL VIDEO) or five (PANEL,
BRILL ARPA) brilliance settings.
33 Process setting function (FUNC) selection

Sets the process setting mode. OFF, FUNC1, FUNC2, FUNC3, FUNC4, or FUNC5 can be
selected.
34 , 35 , 36 , 37 : EBL and VRM settings

The EBL1, EBL2, VRM1, and VRM2 switches are used to acquire operation rights.
They function in the same way as the EBL1 and 2 and VRM1 and 2 switches on the control
panel.
The numeric indicator switches are used to turn on and off the various EBLs and VRMs.
When a numeric indicator displays “OFF,” that means the corresponding indicator in the PPI is
off.
The switches on the control panel are used to move the EBLs and VRMs.
EBL1 T051.0 °
EBL2 T135.0 °
● VRM1 0.30 nm
○ VRM2 0.60 nm
When ON: The numeric display is off.
When OFF: The numeric display is on.
This is used to turn ON and OFF either EBL or VRM operation, and turn ON and OFF the display.
The function that is valid is indicated by the inverted display.
EBL and VRM intersection identification marks
38 EBL1 starting point mode

Sets whether the EBL1 starting point is placed at the center of the own ship or at an arbitrary
position on the radar screen. This has the same function as depressing the EBL1 switch on the
control panel for a long period.
2-9
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
C: CENTER Indicates that the EBL1 starting point is at the own ship position.
O: OFFSET Indicates that the EBL1 starting point is not at the own ship position.
In this state, the starting point may be at the cursor position or it may be fixed at an arbitrary
position on the screen. When the button is clicked, the starting point will move with the
cursor position, then when the left button is clicked the starting point will be fixed at the
cursor location.
L: After moving the L/L FIX EBL1 starting point, the starting point is fixed by the latitude and
2
longitude values.
If the starting point moves out of the screen, then it will be reset automatically so that the
starting point is at the own ship position.
Note: When the EBL1 starting point moves, the mode O or L is indicated by the position
selected among the EBL OFFSET ORIGIN menu.
39 EBL2 starting point mode

Sets whether the EBL2 starting point is placed at the center of the own ship or at an arbitrary
position on the radar screen.
Everything else is the same as that for the EBL2 starting point mode.
40 Speed unit setting

Sets the speed unit.
Clicking this button will open a pull-down menu. A unit can be selected from one of the
following. An alarm is activated if the selected speed unit is not connected to the radar.
Options: MANUAL, LOG (1-axis log), 2AXW (2-axis over water), 2AXG (2-axis over ground),
GPS
If the speed unit setting is “MANUAL,” then placing the cursor over the numeric section and left
clicking will allow numeric input.
41 SET/DRIFT
Turns on and off SET/DRIFT correction.
If CORRECTION is on for this setting, then “CORR” will be displayed next to the button. The
number displayed next to “CORR” at this time will be valid. Also, correction can only be set
when the speed unit is in the MANUAL or LOG (1-axis log) modes.
SET setting
Placing the cursor over the numeric section and left clicking will allow numeric input. This
setting is only valid if CORRECTION is ON.
DRIFT setting
Placing the cursor over the numeric section and left clicking will allow numeric input. This
setting is only valid if CORRECTION is ON.
42 Date display mode

Sets the date mode to be displayed on the screen.
: Turns off the time display.
U : Global time display (UCT).
L : Local time display (LOCAL).
43 ARPA, PAST POSN vector mode setting

These set the vector display mode.
T: True vector
R: Relative vector
These settings work concurrently.
2-10
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
44 Guard zone 1 ON/OFF function setting

Turns the guard zone 1 function on or off.
45 Guard zone 2 ON/OFF function setting

Turns the guard zone 2 function on or off.
2
46 MAIN MENU setting
This button has the same functions as the MENU switch on the control panel.
Clicking this button will display the “MAIN MENU.”
47 PI menu setting
Clicking this button will open the “PI” menu.
This menu is used to set and display parallel index lines (PI).
48 GZ menu setting
Clicking this button will open the “GZ” menu.
This menu will turn on and off the range settings for guard zone 1 and 2.
49 TEST menu setting

Clicking this button will open the “TEST” menu.
Checks the operational status of the radar equipment.
50 Navigation information readout (NAV)

Opens a list of navigation information files stored in the NAV/MAP INFO Menu.
51 Personal code name (PIN)

Opens a list of personal code files in the PIN Menu.
2-11
SECTION 3
BASIC OPERATION
3.1 FLOW OF OPERATION................................................3-1 Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] .......................3-48
Cancel Ship’s Heading Line [HL OFF] ..............................3-49
Power ON and Start the System .........................................3-2 Cancel All Display Items Except HL and Cross Cursor Mark
Observe and Adjust Video...................................................3-4 [+] [DATA OFF]..................................................................3-49
Tuning Operations...............................................................3-7 Display PI（Parallel Index Lines ）[PI] ............................3-50
Acquire and Measurement Data .........................................3-8 Move Own Ship’s Display Position [OFF CENTER] .........3-53
End the Operation and Stop the System.............................3-8 Display Other Ship’s Trails [TRAILS] ................................3-54
3.2 MENU COMPOSITION.................................................3-9 Display Own Ship’s Tracks and Own Symbols [OWN
TRACK].............................................................................3-55
3.3 PREPARATION...........................................................3-12
Marking [MARK]................................................................3-58
Tuning [TUNE] ..................................................................3-12 Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS] ............................3-59
Sensitivity Control [GAIN] .................................................3-12 Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2] ..............3-59
Display Brilliance Control ................................................3-12 Set Guard Zones [GUARD ZONE]....................................3-61
Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO].......................................3-13 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] ..................................3-63
Sea Clutter Suppression [SEA].........................................3-13 Set Alarm Sound Level .....................................................3-63
Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression [RAIN] ............................3-14 FUNCTION .......................................................................3-65
Brilliance Control ...............................................................3-14 Expand Targets.................................................................3-66
Day/Night Mode Selection [DAY/NIGHT] ..........................3-22 Display Processed Videos ................................................3-67
Color Setting [COLOR] .....................................................3-22 Reduce Radar Interference...............................................3-68
3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS.................................................3-34 Personal Information.........................................................3-69
Display of Navigational Information ..................................3-72
Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball.........................3-34
Function of USER Switch / OPTION Switch..................... 3-88
Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackbal ...........3-34
Operation of Performance monitor....................................3-89
Use EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines)................................3-41
EBL Maneuvering .............................................................3-95
Set Floating EBL ...............................................................3-43
Set Floating EBL ...............................................................3-45
Select Range [RANGE].....................................................3-47
Set Maximum Range.........................................................3-47
Select Pulse Length ..........................................................3-48
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3.1 FLOW OF OPERATION

Attention
Do not put anything on the operation panel. If you put anything hot on it, it
may be deformed.
Do not apply sudden force to the operation panel, trackball and controls.
３
Otherwise, some failure or damage may result.
POWER ON AND START

THE SYSTEM
OBSERVE AND ADJUST

VIDEO
TUNING OPERATIONS
ACQUIRE AND
MEASUREMENT DATA
END THE OPERATION AND

STOP THE SYSTEM
Each operation will be described in detail below.
3-1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Power ON and Start the System･･･････････････････････････
Attention
Wait approximately 10 seconds before turning on the power again.

A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is suddenly interrupted during
operation of the radar. In this case, the power should be turned on again.
Immediately after the radar is installed, if the system is not used for a long time,
３
or after the magnetron is replaced, warm-up the equipment in the standby mode
for 20 to 30 minutes before setting it to the transmit mode.
If the warm-up time is short, the magnetron may cause sparks, resulting in an
unstable oscillation.
Start transmission on a short-pulse range and then send long pulses
sequentially. If the transmission is unstable in the meantime, reset the system
to the standby mode immediately and maintain it in the standby mode for 5 to 10
minutes before restarting the operation. Repeat these steps until the operation
is stabilized.
3-2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Procedures 1 Check that the ship’s mains are turned on.
2 Press POWER
.
Orange lamp on POWER

→
The warm-up time will appear.
3 Wait for completion of warm-up
３ When the warm-up time expires, the warm-up time screen disappears and
the PREHEAT display on the upper-left corner of the radar display is
changed to STANDBY .
TX
4 Press STBY .
The radar transmission and the scanner start rotating.

The STANDBY on the upper-left corner on the radar display is changed
to TRANSMIT .
TX
Attention: Even if STBY is pressed before STANDBY is displayed, radar
transmission is not performed.
The method of transmission in case of emergency.
Procedures 1 Check that the ship’s mains are turned on.
2 Press . POWER
Orange lamp on → POWER
The warm-up time will appear.
TX
3 A push of the STBY 5 seconds or more vanishes the display of
warm-up time.
The radar transmission and the scanner start rotating.
The STANDBY on the upper-left corner on the radar display is changed
to TRANSMI
Note:
In the moment sag of a power supply, and the case of an unusual
operation outbreak, it can transmit, immediately after rebooting the power
supply.
Please do not use emergent transmitting operation except the above.
The life of a magnetron will be shortened if the warm-up is not completed.
3-3
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Observe and Adjust Video････････････････････････････････
Procedures 1 Press RANGE to set the range to the scale required for
target
observation.
2 Turn the or monitor brilliance knob. ３

GAIN
Adjust to obtain the clearest targets.
Attention
In the AUTO SEA mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
because the sea clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
Use the normal [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.
In the AUTO RAIN mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
because the rain/snow clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
Use the manual [SEA control during sailing under normal conditions.
The AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN mode cannot be used concurrently. If one is
set to AUTO mode, the other will be set to MANUAL mode.
3-4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
In case of Using AUTO SEA/SEMI AUTO:
GAIN
AUTO 1 Press . Or, when the SEA button on SEA
RAIN
SEA
the screen is pressed, AUTO is set. TRACK 3min

The AUTO Menu will appear.
TRAILS 0.5min T
SEA AUTO is displayed at the lower left of the radar PROC PROC1
３ screen.
GAIN
SEA AUTO
SEMI AUTO 1 Press . Or, when the SEA button on RAIN
SEA
TRACK 3min
the screen is pressed,SEMI AUTO is set. TRAILS 0.5min T
The SEMI AUTO Menu will appear. PROC PROC1
SEA A is displayed at the lower left of the radar
screen.
GAIN
SEA A
RAIN
TRACK 3min
Cancellation 1 Press . Or, press the SEA button TRAILS 0.5min T
SEA
PROC PROC1
on the screen .
AUTO is released.
Note: When setting AUTO SEA / SEMI AUTO, the AUTO RAIN is set to the MANUAL
mode. Both AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN cannot be set at the same time.
3-5
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
In case of Using AUTO RAIN:

GAIN
SEA
Procedures
1 Press . Or, press the SEA RAIN
TRACK 3min
SEA
TRAILS 0.5min T
button on the screen . PROC PROC1
RAIN AUTO is displayed on the radar
screen.
GAIN
３
SEA
Cancellation 1 AUTO is released using the same RAIN AUTO
procedure that was used to set it.
TRACK 3min
TRAILS 0.5min T
PROC PROC1
3-6
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Tuning Operations･･･････････････････････････････････････
Attention
When the receiver is detuned, the best video may not be obtained even if the
maximum bar graph is displayed on the AUTO TUNE tuning indicator. In this
case, adjust the [TUNE] control manually so that the best video is presented.
３ Procedures 1 Press
RANGE
and select any range scale from 0.125 to 96
(or 120) NM. (The current range scale is
displayed at the upper left of the radar
display.)
The range scale becomes shorter by pressing and longer by

pressing .
2 ROTATE .
TUNE
Adjust the video to present the clearest targets.

If there is no adequate target, adjust [TUNE] control to indicate the maximum
bar graph on the turning indicator at the upper left of the radar display.
In case of Using AUTO TUNE: AUTO

1.SEA/RAIN
1.MANUAL
Procedures 1 Press . Or, press MANUAL 2.TUNE
button. MANUAL AUTO
TUNE
“AUTO” in “2.TUNE” will be set and “AUTO” will

appear at the upper left of the radar display.
Cancellation 1 Repeat the procedures up to step 2

in case of using AUTO TUNE.
“MANUAL”in“2.TUNE”will be set and“AUTO”at
the upper left of the radar display will change
to“MANUAL”and AUTO TUNE mode will be
cancelled.
０． EXIT
3-7
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Acquire and Measurement Data･･･････････････････････････
For detailed operations for data acquisition and measurement, refer to Section 3.4 “BASIC
OPERATIONS” and Section 4 “MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING”.
End the Operation and Stop the System････････････････････

TX
Exit 1 Press STBY .
The radar transmission will end and the scanner will stop rotating.
３
The indication TRANSMIT will be changed to STANDBY .
Maintain the “STANDBY” mode if radar observation is restarted in a

relatively short time. Observation can be restarted simply by pressing
the [TX/STBY] switch..
POWER
2 Press .
The power will be turned off. Orange lamp Off → POWER
Note: When "PWR" is lit, data is being written to internal memory, so do not
open the shipboard breaker.
Also, when turning on the power supply again, be sure that the green
PWR switch lamp is off before pressing "PWR".
3-8
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3.2 MENU COMPOSITION

The Menu system of this radar equipment consists of the Main menu, Sub1 menu, Sub2 menu and
Test menu.
Click MENU button on the screen.
MAIN MENU SUB1 MENU

1.IR SETTING1
1.
OFF ON
2.TGT ENH 2. LEVEL
３
2.TUNE
OFF ON 3. NAV/MAP INFO
3.PROCESS
4. TRACK
2.PROC1
4.FUNCTION 5. ARPA
1.FUNC OFF 6. PIN
5.EBL1
7. ISW
CENTER OFFSET
6.EBL2 8. EBL MANEUVER
CENTER OFFSET
9. SUB2 MENU
7. DATA OFF
8. SUB1 MENU
9. CODE INPUT
０． EXIT ０． EXIT
TEST MENU SUB2 MENU
1. SELF CHECK 1. COLOR
2. PANEL TEST
3. ARPATEST
4.MAG　CURRENT
OFF ON
5.PM
OFF ON
6. ERROR LOGGING
7. SYSTEM INFO
EXIT ０． EXIT
０．
The Main menu consists of the items of signal processing functions and EBL control, and
other functions are included in the Sub1 menu. The video color setting is included in the Sub2
menu.The Test menu consists of the items of input monitoring and Self-diagnostic functions.
Note: When the unit is shipped from the factory, this is set in "OPTION2" or the "MENU" key.
3-9
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
A. Main menu
MAIN MENU
1.IR
OFF ON
1 Displaying the Main menu.
2.TGT
2.TUNEENH
OFF ON
3.PROCESS
Click the MENU button on the
2.PROC1
screen.
4.FUNCTION
The main menu will appear. 1.FUNC OFF
5.EBL1
CENTER OFFSET
6.EBL2
7.
CENTER
DATA OFF
OFFSET ３
2. Ending the Main menu.
8. SUB1 MENU
9. CODE INPUT
Click the EXIT button on the
screen. EXIT
０．
The MAIN Menu will be closed.
B. Sub1 menu SUB1 MENU
1 Displaying the Sub1 menu. 1. SETTING1

2. LEVEL
Click the SUB1 MENU button on 3. NAV/MAP INFO
the screen. 4. TRACK
The SUB1 Menu will appear. 5. ARPA

6. PIN
7. ISW
8. EBL MANEUVER
9. SUB2 MENU
2 Ending the Sub1 menu.
Click the EXIT button on the

screen.
The SUB1 Menu will be closed. ０． EXIT
Note: When the unit is shipped from the factory, this is set in "OPTION2" or the
"MENU" key.
3-10
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
C. Sub2 Menu
SUB2 MENU
1 Displaying the Sub2 menu. 1. COLOR
Press MENU, then SUB1 MENU and
SUB2 MENU or press MENU, then
３ MENU and MENU.

The TEST Menu will appear.
2. Ending the Sub2 menu.
０． EXIT
Press EXIT or MENU.
The Sub2 Menu will be closed.
D. Test menu
1 Displaying the Test menu. TEST MENU
1. SELF CHECK
2. PANEL TEST
Click TEST .
3. ARPATEST
The TEST Menu will appear. 4.MAG　CURRENT
OFF ON
5.PM
OFF ON
6. ERROR LOGGING
2 Ending the Sub1 menu. 7. SYSTEM INFO
Click EXIT or MENU.

０． EXIT
3-11
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3.3 PREPARATION
Tuning [TUNE]････････････････････････････････････････････
This control is used to tune the receiver.

TUNE
３
If the receiver is detuned from the best level, the receiving sensitivity falls, and the targets on a long
range or the small targets on a short range may be overlooked.
In manual tuning, rotate the [TUNE] control clockwise or anticlockwise and adjust so that the target
echoes are the clearest. If no suitable target is present, adjust the control so that the tuning
indicator bar graph at the upper left of the radar display is maximized.
After setting the radar to the TRANSMIT mode, it take about 10 minutes until the oscillation
frequency of the magnetron is stabilized. Therefore, tune the receiver once again after about 10
minutes.
For automatic tuning, set “TUNE” to “ON” in the AUTO Menu. (Refer to page 3-8).
Sensitivity Control [GAIN]･････････････････････････････････
GAIN
This control is used to control the radar receiving sensitivity.

Clockwise rotation of the [GAIN] control increases receiving sensitivity and extends the radar
observation range. If the sensitivity is too high, the receiver noise will increase to reduce the
contrast of the targets with the background video and make the targets obscure on the display. To
observe densely crowded targets or the targets on a short range, rotate the [GAIN] control
anticlockwise to reduce the sensitivity so that the targets are easy to observe. Be careful not to
overlook small and important targets.
Display Brilliance Control ･････････････････････････････････
This control is used to adjust the brilliance of the entire display.

Clockwise rotation of the [BRILL] control increases the brilliance of the entire display. Adjust the
[BRILL] control to obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance.
3-12
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO]･･･････････････････････････
The contrast of the radar video display can be adjusted in four levels. Press the PANEL button on
the screen, then select [BRILL VIDEO]. Each time the brilliance button is clicked, the screen
will switch to VIDEO . The current mode is displayed on the lower right of
the radar screen. (The VIDEO indication will change to the PANEL indicated in several second.)
Adjust the [BRILL VIDEO] switch to obtain the best-to-see video with optimum contrast.
３ Attention
In the AUTO SEA mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
because the sea clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
Use the manual [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.
In the AUTO RAIN mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
because the rain/snow clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
Use the manual [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.
Sea Clutter Suppression [SEA]････････････････････････････
SEA
This control is used to reduce the receiving sensitivity on a short range to suppress the sea clutter
returns.
Clockwise rotation of the [SEA] control can suppress sea clutter returns more effectively. Be
careful not to suppress sea clutter excessively. Otherwise, small buoys and boats may disappear
from the radar display.
When setting “SEA” to “SEA AUTO” , sea clutter returns can be suppressed depending on their
intensity levels. This setting is used for the case in which the sea clutter returns are different in
their directions.
Switching between manual and auto is done by clicking the“SEA AUTO” / “SEMI AUTO”button on
the lower left of the screen, or pressing the“SEA”knob.
Note: It is not allowed to use both the AUTO / SEMI AUTO SEA mode and the AUTO
RAIN mode at the same time.
3-13
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression [RAIN]･････････････････････
RAIN
This control is used to suppress rain or snow clutter returns. Clockwise rotation of the [RAIN]
control makes clearer those targets that may be hidden among rain/snow clutter returns. Be
careful not to overlook small targets in the clutter. This control also has the effect of reducing sea
clutter, so that it is more effective to use this control together with the [SEA] control.
Rotate the control anticlockwise to the maximum in the normal condition. ３
When setting SEA/RAIN to AUTO RAIN in the AUTO Menu, rain/snow clutter can be suppressed
depending upon the intensity level. When setting SEA/RAIN to MANUAL in the AUTO Menu, the
mode is changed into the MANUAL mode.
Switching between manual and auto is done by clicking the "RAIN AUTO" button on the lower left of
the screen, or pressing the "RAIN" knob.
Note: It is not allowed to use both the AUTO RAIN mode and AUTO SEA mode at the
same time.
Brilliance Control････････････････････････････････････････
Press PANEL . Or press the right side of "PANEL" on the screen.
The BRILLIANCE switches [PANEL], [BRILL VIDEO], and [BRILL ARPA] are used to adjust the
brilliance of the panel, video and ARPA markers. Each time a switch is pressed, the brilliance is
increased by one level up to 4 or 5 levels. When the maximum level is reached, the brilliance is
reset to the original panel.
[PANEL] Adjusts the lighting for the characters on the controls and switches on the
operational panel.
When PANEL on the screen is pressed, the adjustment status of "BRILL
VIDEO" and "BRILL ARPA" are changed.
Then, each of the levels can be set if the brilliance level button on the right is
pressed.
[BRILL VIDEO] Adjusts the brilliance of radar display.

[BRILL ARPA] Adjusts the brilliance of ARPA information
Brilliance Control by Menu Operation

[RANGE RINGA] Adjusts the brilliance of the fixed range scale.
[VRM] Adjusts the brilliance of the variable range scale (VRM1 and VRM2).
[EBL] Adjusts the brilliance of electronic bearing cursor (EBL1 and EBL2).
[CHARACTER] Adjusts the brilliance of characters.
3-14
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Procedures 1 Click the MENU on the screen. Or press the OPTION2 button .
The Main Menu will appear.
2 Click SUB1 MENU .
The Sub1 Menu will appear.
3 Click LEVEL.
３ The LEVEL Menu will appear.
4 Click the level setting section of RANGE RINGS .

1.RANGE RINGS will be selected and the following pull-down menu will
appear.
SUB1 MENU
LEVEL
1.RANGE RINGS
4.LEVEL4
1.LEVEL1
2.VRM
2.LEVEL2
3.LEVEL3
3.EBL
4.LEVEL4
4.CHARACTER
4.LEVEL4
5.VIDEO(ECHO)
4.LEVEL4
6.ARPA
5.LEVEL5
7.BUZZER
7.LEVEL7
０． EXIT
3-15
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 Select any level from 1 to 4 for RANGE RINGS brilliance in

the pull-down menu and press it.
The default value is set to 4.LEVEL4.
6 Click the level setting section of VRM .
2.VRM will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
SUB1 MENU
３
LEVEL
1.RANGE RINGS
4.LEVEL4
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
3.EBL 1.LEVEL1
2.LEVEL2
3.LEVEL3
4.CHARACTER
4.LEVEL4
5.VIDEO(ECHO)
4.LEVEL4
6.ARPA
5.LEVEL5
7.BUZZER
7.LEVEL7
０． EXIT
7 Select any level from 1 to 4 for VRM (VRM1 and VRM2)

brilliance in the pull-down menu and press it.
3-16
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8 Click the level setting section of EBL .
3.EBL will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
SUB1 MENU
LEVEL
３ 1.RANGE RINGS
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
4.LEVEL4
3.EBL
4.LEVEL4
4.CHARACTER
1.LEVEL1
2.LEVEL2
5.VIDEO(ECHO)
3.LEVEL3
4.LEVEL4
6.ARPA
5.LEVEL5
7.BUZZER
7.LEVEL7
０． EXIT
9 Select the brightness of the electronic cursor (EBL1, EBL2)

from the pull-down menu, select 1 through 4 with the
trackball, then click.
3-17
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
10 Click the level setting section of CHARACTER .
4.CHARACTER will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
SUB1 MENU
LEVEL
1.RANGE RINGS
4.LEVEL4
３
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
3.EBL
4.LEVEL4
4.CHARACTER
4.LEVEL4
5.VIDEO(ECHO)
1.LEVEL1
2.LEVEL2
6.ARPA 3.LEVEL3
4.LEVEL4
7.BUZZER
7.LEVEL7
０． EXIT
11 Select the character brightness from the pull-down menu,

and set 1 through 4.
The default value is set to 4.LEVEL4 .
3-18
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
12 Click the level setting section of VIDEO .
5.VIDEO (ECHO) will be selected and the following pull-down menu will
appear.
SUB1 MENU
LEVEL
1.RANGE RINGS
３
4.LEVEL4
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
3.EBL
4.LEVEL4
4.CHARACTER
4.LEVEL4
5.VIDEO(ECHO)
4.LEVEL4
6.ARPA 1.LEVEL1
2.LEVEL2
7.BUZZER3.LEVEL3
4.LEVEL4
０． EXIT
3-19
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
13 Select the echo brightness from the pull-down menu, and set
1 through 4.
14 Click the level setting section of ARPA .
6.ARPA will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
SUB1 MENU
LEVEL
３
1.RANGE RINGS
4.LEVEL4
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
3.EBL
4.LEVEL4
4.CHARACTER
4.LEVEL4
5.VIDEO(ECHO)
4.LEVEL4
6.ARPA
5.LEVEL4
7.BUZZER
1.LEVEL0
2.LEVEL1
3.LEVEL2
4.LEVEL3
5.LEVEL4
０ EXIT
．
15 Select the ARPA brightness from the pull-down menu, and

set 1 through 5.
3-20
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
After the brilliance levels are adjusted, the following menu will appear.
SUB1 MENU
LEVEL
1.RANGE RINGS
4.LEVEL4
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
3.EBL
4.LEVEL4
３ 4.CHARACTER
5.VIDEO
4.LEVEL4
4.LEVEL4
6.ARPA
5.LEVEL4
7.BUZZER
7.LEVEL7
０． EXIT
The menu display after adjustment shows the level values set for the indiviual
brilliance items.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
These set brilliance levels are saved depending upon the Day/Night mode.
3-21
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Day/Night Mode Selection [DAY/NIGHT]････････････････････
Whenever the [DAY/NIGHT] switch is pressed, the mode is changed over from DAY1 → DAY2
→ NIGHT1 → NIGHT2 and the current mode is indicated at the lower right of the radar
display. The brilliance levels selected for each mode are saved. For brilliance adjustment, refer to
page 3 -12. For selection of DAY/NIGHT mode by menu operation, refer to “Color Setting” on the
next page.
３
Color Setting [COLOR]･･･････････････････････････････････
The colors of the Day/Night mode [Day1, 2/NIGHT1, 2], system, background color outside the
bearing scale, background color inside the bearing scale, echoes, characters, dials, own ship’s track,
and radar trails are set up.
Color Adjustment by Menu Operation

[DAY/NIGHT] Register of DAY/NIGHT mode
[SYSTEM] System color adjustment
[OUTER PPI] Adjustment of the background color outside the bearing scale
[INNER PPI] Adjustment of the background color inside the bearing scale
[CHARACTER] Adjustment of character colors
[DIAL] Adjustment of dial color
[ECHO] Adjustment of echo colors
[TRAILS] Adjustment of the color of radar trails
[OWN TRACK] Adjustment of the color of own ship’s track
Procedures 1 Click the MENU on the screen.
2 Click SUB1 MENU .
3 Click SUB2 MENU .
4 Click COLOR .
The COLOR Menu will appear.
3-22
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of DAY/NIGT.

1.DAY/NIGHT will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
SUB2 MENU
COLOR
３ 1.DAY/NIGHT
2.SYSTEM
1.DAY1
1.DAY1
2.DAY2
3.OUTER3.NIGHT1
PPI
4.NIGHT2
4.INNER PPI
1.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
1.WHITE
6.DIAL 1.WHITE
7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
8.TRAILS
1.SKY
9.OWN TRACK
1.SKY
０． EXIT
6 Select the Day/Night mode from the pull-down menu, select 1

through 4 with the trackball, then left-click.
3-23
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
7 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of SYSTEM.
2.SYSTEM will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
SUB2 MENU
COLOR
３
1.DAY/NIGHT
1.DAY
2.SYSTEM
1.BLUE1
3.OUTER1.BLUE1
PPI
2.BLUE2
3.GRAY
4.INNER PPI
4.BLACK
1.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
1.WHITE
6.DIAL 1.WHITE
7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
8.TRAILS
1.SKY
9.OWN TRACK
1.SKY
０． EXIT
8 Select the System color from the pull-down menu, select 1

3-24
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
9 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of OUTER PPI.
3.OUTER PPI will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
３ SUB2 MENU
COLOR
1.DAY/NIGHT
1.DAY
2.SYSTEM
1.BLUE1
3.OUTER PPI
1.BLACK
4.INNER PPI
1.BLACK
1.BLACK
2.BLUE
5.CHARACTER
3.D-BLUE
1.WHITE
6.DIAL 1.WHITE
7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
8.TRAILS
1.SKY
9.OWN TRACK
1.SKY
０． EXIT
10 Select the background color outside the bearing scale from

the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the trackball,
then left-click.
3-25
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
11 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of INNER PPI.

4.INNER PPI will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
SUB2 MENU
COLOR
1.DAY/NIGHT
1.DAY
３
2.SYSTEM
1.BLUE1
3.OUTER PPI
1.BLACK
4.INNER PPI
1.BLACK
1.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
2.BLUE
1.WHITE
3.D-BLUE
6.DIAL 1.WHITE
7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
8.TRAILS
1.SKY
9.OWN TRACK
1.SKY
０． EXIT
12 Select the background color inside the bearing scale from

the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the trackball,
then left-click.
3-26
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
13 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of CHARACTER.
5.CHARACTER will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
３ SUB2 MENU
COLOR
1.DAY/NIGHT
1.DAY
2.SYSTEM
1.BLUE1
3.OUTER PPI
1.BLACK
4.INNER PPI
1.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
1.WHITE
1.WHITE
6.DIAL
2.AMBER
7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
3.GREEN
8.TRAILS
1.SKY
9.OWN TRACK
1.SKY
０． EXIT
14 Select the character color from the pull-down menu, select 1

3-27
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
15 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of DIAL.
6.DIAL will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
３
SUB2 MENU
COLOR
1.DAY/NIGHT
1.DAY
2.SYSTEM
1.BLUE1
3.OUTER PPI
1.BLACK
4.INNER PPI
1.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
1.WHITE
6.DIAL 1.WHITE
1.WHITE
7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
2.AMBER
8.TRAILS3.GREEN
1.SKY
9.OWN TRACK
1.SKY
０． EXIT
16 Select the dial color from the pull-down menu, select 1

3-28
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
17 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of ECHO.
7.ECHO will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
３
SUB2 MENU
COLOR
1.DAY/NIGHT
1.DAY
2.SYSTEM
1.BLUE1
3.OUTER PPI
1.BLACK
4.INNER PPI
1.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
1.WHITE
6.DIAL 1.WHITE
7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
8.TRAILS1.YELLOW
1.SKY
2.GREEN
3.AMBER
9.OWN TRACK
1.SKY
０． EXIT
18 Select the echo color from the pull-down menu, select 1

3-29
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
19 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of TRAILS.
8.TRAILS will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
３
SUB2 MENU
COLOR
1.DAY/NIGHT
1.DAY
2.SYSTEM
1.BLUE1
3.OUTER PPI
1.BLACK
4.INNER PPI
1.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
1.WHITE
6.DIAL 1.WHITE
7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
8.TRAILS
1.SKY
9.OWN TRACK
1.SKY
2.WHITE
1.SKY
3.GREEN
０． EXIT
20 Select the radar trails colors from the pull-down menu, select
1 through 3 with the trackball, then left-click.
3-30
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
21 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of

OWN TRACK.
9.OWN TRACK will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
３ SUB2 MENU
COLOR
1.DAY/NIGHT
1.DAY
2.SYSTEM
1.BLUE1
3.OUTER PPI
1.BLACK
4.INNER PPI
1.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
1.WHITE
6.DIAL 1.WHITE
7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
8.TRAILS
1.SKY
9.OWN TRACK
1.SKY
1.SKY
EXIT
０．
2.GREEN
3.WHITE
4.YELLOW
5.PINK
6.BLUE
22 Select the own track colors from the pull-down menu, select
1 through 6 with the trackball, then left-click.
3-31
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
After the colors are adjusted, the following menu will appear.
SUB2 MENU
COLOR
1.DAY/NIGHT
1.DAY
2.SYSTEM
1.BLUE1
3.OUTER PPI
1.BLACK
３
4.INNER PPI
1.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
1.WHITE
6.DIAL 1.WHITE
7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
8.TRAILS
1.SKY
9.OWN TRACK
1.SKY
０． EXIT
The menu display after adjustment shows the colors set for
indiviual items.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

2 Click EXIT .
3-32
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
.......Radar Interference Rejection【IR】････････････････････
Procedures Left-click the IR . This switch selects ON/OFF.
○ When setting from the menu

1 Click MENU .
３ 2 Click "ON" radio button of

“ON”in“1.IR”will be set.
IR .
Then, the mark IR at the lower left of the radar display will be shown and
the radar interference in turned on.
MAIN MENU
1.IR
OFF ON
2.TGT ENH
OFF ON
3.PROCESS
2.PROC1
4.FUNCTION
1.FUNC OFF
5.EBL1
CENTER OFFSET
6.EBL2
CENTER OFFSET
7. DATA OFF
8. SUB1 MENU
9. CODE INPUT
０． EXIT
Cancellation 1 Click "OFF" radio button of IR .

“OFF”in“1.IR”is set and the radar interference rejector turned off.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

The Main Menu will be closed.
Attention
When watching a radar beacon or a SART signal, set the following parameter to
suppress the video.
IR OFF (Interference Rejecter OFF).
3-33
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS

Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball･･･････････････････
Trackball
３
Trackball section Trackball section
left button right button
Sclool button
No used
The cross cursor mark [+] is used for position designation and other purposes in various operating
procedures. The cross cursor mark [+] moves in conjunction with the trackball. If the trackball is
rotated up and down or left and right, the cross cursor mark follows the movements of the trackball.
The distance and bearing between own ship and the cross cursor mark [+] are indicated on the
upper right of the radar display. Before operating other controls and switches, the operator must be
familiar with manipulation of the trackball and the movements of the cross cursor mark. When
rotating the trackball, the cross cursor mark [+] will not move if the palm is apart from the hand
sensor section. Approach the palm to the hand sensor section and operate the trackball.
When making a menu or button selection, the "+" cursor will change to .
Click: In this manual, "clicking" refers to pressing the trackball button.

Left-button = This is called "left-clicking".
Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackball･･････････
In addition to the method for setting menu items with the switches, the trackball can also be used to
set menu items in almost the same manner as with the control panel.
There are several methods for setting an item in a menu with the trackball.
3-34
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[Ⅰ] Change the Setting of Radio Button Type

When an item has alternative selections, for example, ON and OFF, radio buttons are
provided to set the item in many menu items.
① ON OFF
When the current item is set in the OFF position as shown in Figure ①,
３ ② ON OFF
Move the arrow cursor to the ON position with the trackball.
③ ON OFF
With the arrow cursor on the ON position, press the left button of the trackball.
④ ON OFF
The Setting will change from OFF to ON.
When changing from ON to OFF, operate in the same manner.
3-35
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[Ⅱ] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu

This method is used when there are three or more selections:
① When PROC1 is set as shown below:
2. PROC1 ▼
② Move the arrow cursor to the position that is shown below (downward triangle).
2. PROC1 ▼
３
③ Set the arrow cursor on the position in Figure as shown below and press the left button
on the trackball.
2. PROC1 ▼
④ The pull-down menu will appear and selection items are displayed in the menu.
2. PROC1 ▼
1. OFF
2. PROC1
3. PROC2
4. PROC3
⑤ Move the cursor with the trackball.
2. PROC1 ▼
1. OFF
2. PROC1
3. PROC2
4. PROC3
⑥ Set the cursor on the item to be selected and press the left-button on the trackball.
3. PROC2 ▼
1. OFF
2. PROC1
3. PROC2
4. PROC3
⑦ The pull-down menu will be closed and the setting is established.
3. PROC2 ▼
3-36
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[Ⅲ] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu

This method can be used in most of boxes where a numeric value is to be entered.
① 0.0-100.0kts 10.0
When the value is set as shown in the figure ①:
The minimum and maximum (min-max) are displayed on the left side and the unit is also
displayed if present.
10.0
３ ② 0.0-100.0kts
To increase the value, move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ② (upward
triangle) with the trackball.
③ 0.0-100.0kts 10.0
With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ②, click the trackball section left button
once.
④ 0.0-100.0kts 10.1
The value will be increase in the minimum step.
⑤ To increase the value continuously:

Hold down th trackball section left button in the figure ③.
⑥ To decrease the value:

Move the arrow cursor to the downward triangle in the figure ②.
The following procedures are the same as for increasing.
3-37
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[Ⅳ] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu

This method is used when a number of items have alternative selections of ON and OF in
one menu. (In this case, only one item is presented.)
① NAV LINE
The status in the figure ① means that the item is OFF.
② NAV LINE
３
Move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ② withe the trackball.
③ NAV LINE
With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ②, press the trackball section left
button.
④ NAV LINE
A check mark will appear in the checkbox and the funcrion will be turned on.
⑤ To turn off the function:

With the checkbox and arrow cursor position as shown in the fibure ④, press the
trackball section left button.
3-38
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[Ⅴ] Switch Type

This method is used, for example, in switching the current menu to the next.
① SUB1 MENU
A menu has an item as presented in the figure ①.
３ ② SUB1 MENU
Move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ② with the trackball.
③ SUB1 MENU
With the arrow cursor over SUB1 MENU , press the trackball section left
button.
④ The Sub1 Menu will appear.
＊ In some selections of this type, the key color will change in the step ② entering a
certain mode.
To reset the setting, select the same item again.
Example: Select NAV/MAP INFO Menu "SHIFT".
NAV SHIFT mode
3-39
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[Ⅵ] Vertical Scroll Type

The display is scrolled vertically.
This method is mainly used for functions such as display of a stored file.
①
＊＊＊＊ ▲
＊＊＊
＊＊
・
・ ▼
The vertical scrollbar is provided in a menu as shown in the figure ①.

３
②
＊＊＊＊ ▲
＊＊＊
＊＊
・
・ ▼
When scrolling the display, move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure (upward
triangle) with the trackball.
③
＊＊＊＊ ▲
＊＊＊
＊＊
・
・ ▼
With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ②, click the trackball section left
button.
④
＊＊＊ ▲
＊＊
＊＊＊＊＊＊ Scroll to the
・ Upper item.
・ ▼
⑤ To scroll continuously the display upward:

Hold down the trackball section left button on the trackball in the figure ③.
⑥ To scroll the display downward:

Move teh arrow cursor to the downward triangle in the figure ②.
The following procedures are the same as for the upward scroll.
3-40
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Use EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines)･･･････････････････････
The EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines) are indispensable to measure distances and bearings of
targets.
Before operation, the operator must become familiar with the operation of EBLs.
EBL1 Operation
If EBL2 is selected, press to select EBL1 before operation. (The currently selected EBL is
indicated by selected characters in the lower right of the radar display.)
Procedures 1 Press
EBL1 will be displayed
in reverse video.
Press
EBL1 will disappear.
3-41
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
EBL2 Operation
If EBL1 is selected, press to select EBL2 before operation. (The currently selected EBL
is
indicated by characters in the lower right of the radar display.)
Procedures 1 Press
３
EBL2 will be displayed
in reverse video.
Press
EBL2 will disappear.
EBL Bearing Display

The bearing values of EBL1 and EBLL2 currently displayed within the PPI video
are indicated at the lower right of the radar display. For the currently operable
EBL, the characters EBL1 or EBL2 are displayed in reverse video.
Starting Point of EBL

The starting point of the currently operating EBL can be changed over to the
center of the radar display (CENTER) or to any offset position (OFFSET).
Note: For OFFSET of the EBL’s starting point, it is possible to determine whether the
starting point is fixed at the specific latitude and longitude.
3-42
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Set Floating EBL･････････････････････････････････････････

To offset the starting point of EBL1 during its operation:
EBL1 T0370°C
Click the right figure C.
・Use the trackball to move the starting point of "EBL1".
・The starting point can be fixed by clicking the left trackball button.
When adjusting from the menu,

MAIN MENU
３ [Ⅰ] Click MENU .

1.IR
OFF
2.TUNE
OFF
ON
ON
3.PROCESS
2.PROC1
Click “5.EBL1”.
4.FUNCTION
“OFFSET”in“5.EBL1”will be set. 1.FUNC OFF
5.EBL1
CENTER OFFSET
6.EBL2
Move the starting point of EBL1 with the trackball. CENTER OFFSET
7. DATA OFF
Click the trackball section left button to fix the starting point
8. SUB1 MENU
of EBL1.
9. CODE INPUT
To reset the starting point of EBL1 to the center of the radar ０． EXIT
display.
Click “5.EBL1”.
“CENTER”in“5.EBL1”will be set.
Click 0.EBL .
[Ⅱ] Continue to press also allow you to set the starting point of EBL1.
Continue to press . “OFFSET”in“5.EBL1”will be set.
Continue to press . “CENTER”in“5.EBL1”will be set.
Note:For OFFSET of the EBL's starting point, it is possible to determine whether the
starting point is fixed at specific latitude and longitude.
3-43
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To offset the starting point of EBL2 during its operation:
[Ⅰ] Click MENU . MAIN MENU

1.IR
The Main Menu will appear. OFF ON
2.TGT ENH
OFF ON
3.PROCESS
Click “6.EBL2”.
2.PROC1
“OFFSET”in“6.EBL2”will be set. 4.FUNCTION
1.FUNC OFF
３
5.EBL1
CENTER OFFSET
Move the starting point of EBL2 with the trackball. 6.EBL2
CENTER OFFSET
Click the trackball section left button to fix the starting point
7. DATA OFF
of EBL2.
8. SUB1 MENU
9. CODE INPUT
To reset the starting point of EBL2 to the center of the radar
display. ０． EXIT
Click “6.EBL2”.
“CENTER”in“6.EBL2”will be set.
Click 0.EBL .
[Ⅱ] Continue to press also allow you to set the starting point of EBL2.
Continue to press . “OFFSET”in“6.EBL2”will be set.
Continue to press . “CENTER”in“6.EBL2”will be set.
3-44
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Set Floating EBL････････････････････････････････････････
When this function is turned on and the starting point of EBL is moved to a position, the starting
point can be fixed at the latitude and longitude of that position. This function is effective when the
bearing from a certain point is repeatedly measured.
With this function OFF, the starting point of EBL is pasted on the radar display. When own ship is
moved, the starting point will remain at the same point on the display.
３ Procedures 1 Select in the following order:

"MENU","MENU","SETTING1","SETTING2".
The SETTING2 Menu will appear.
2 Click EBL OFFSET ORIGIN.

The EBL OFFSET ORIGIN menu will appear.
[I] Setting the Mode when the EBL1 Starting Point is Moved
1 Perform the operating procedure 1 .

The EBL OFFSET ORIGIN Menu will appear.
SETTING2
“EBL1 L/L FIX” is set to the initial mode “OFF”.
When the EBL1 starting point is moved, the EBL OFFSET ORIGIN
1.EBL1 L/L FIX
starting point of EBL1 will remain at the set
OFF ON
position on the radar display. 2.EBL2 L/L FIX
OFF ON
2 Select the "ON" radio button.
“EBL1 L/L FIX” will switch from “OFF” to “ON”.
When the EBL1 starting point is moved to
another position, the starting point of EBL1 will
be fixed at the latitude and longitude on that
position.
3 Select "OFF".
Place the cursor over the "OFF" radio button,
and left-click.
０． EXIT
3-45
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[II] Setting the Mode when the EBL2 Starting Point is Moved
1 Perform the operating procedure 1

and 2. SETTING2
The EBL OFFSET ORIGIN Menu will appear. EBL OFFSET ORIGIN
“EBL2 L/L FIX” is set to the initial mode “OFF”. 1.EBL1 L/L FIX
OFF ON
When the EBL2 starting point is moved, the 2.EBL2 L/L FIX
starting point of EBL2 will remain at the set OFF ON
position on the radar display.
2 Select the "ON" radio button.

“EBL2 L/L FIX” will switch from “OFF” to “ON”.
３
When the EBL2 starting point is moved to another
position, the starting point of EBL2 will be fixed at
the latitude and longitude on that position.
3 Left-click the "OFF" radio button.

The setting will switch from “ON” to “OFF”.
０． EXIT
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

The SETTING2 Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
The SETTING2 Menu will be closed.
Notes • The course data and the own ship’s latitude and longitude data are required
to activate this function.
• With this function ON, the starting point will be returned to the center if the
starting point of EBL is moved to outside the radar display.
3-46
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Select Range [RANGE]･･･････････････････････････････････
Range scale (NM)
－ 12 ＋
2
３
Range marker (NM)
Any range scale is selectable from 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, and 96 (or 120)
nautical
miles. Pressing decreases the range and pressing increases the range in each
step. The selected range scale is indicated at the upper left of the display together with the range
ring interval with it.
Set Maximum Range･･････････････････････････････････････
The maximum range available may be set to 96nm or 120nm.
Procedures 1 Select in the following order:

"MENU","MENU","1.SETTING1". SUB1 MENU
SETTING1
1.SET GYRO
The SETTING1 menu will appear.
0.0-359.9゜ 0.0
2.SELECT SPEED
2 Select radio button of "8.RANGE 2.1AXIS
SELECT". 3. SET MANUAL SPEED
Each time this switch is pressed, the 4. SELECT NAV
maximum range is changed between 96 nm or 5. SET/DRIFT
120 nm. 6. TIME/DAY
7.PRF
Note: When the maximum range is set to 120nm, the next 2.HIGH
range of 48nm is 120nm and so the range of 96nm 8.RANGE SELECT
cannot be selected. 96nm 120nm
9. SETTING2
Exit 1 Click EXIT . ０． EXIT

2 Click EXIT .
3-47
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Select Pulse Length･･････････････････････････････････････
Place the cursor over the SP , and left-click.
The transmission pulse length can be changed over in three levels (『 SP』, 『 MP』, and
『 LP』) every time the [PL] switch is pressed. The selected pulse length is indicated at the
upper left of the radar display. The pulse length can be changed only when the range is set to one
of 0.75, 1.5, 3, and 6 and 12NM. If 『
small targets clearer. If 『
SP』 is selected, the range resolution increases, making
LP』 is selected, the range resolution decreases, but the sensitivity
increases, making small targets larger with higher definition.
３
Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]･･････････････････
The bearing presentation mode is changed over in the order of [NORTH UP] (true bearing), [HEAD
UP] (relative bearing), and [COURSE UP] (course-up bearing) mode every time the [AZI MODE]
switch is pressed. When the currently selected mode is North-up or Course-up, it will be changed
over to Head-up by pressing this switch, and to another mode by pressing this switch once again.
(Example) RM H UP→PM N UP→RM C UP→RM H UP
H UP
N UP
C UP
The Bearing Mode [NORTH UP]

The video is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI (0° on range rings) points to the
due north. Fixed targets do not flicker and are easily identified on a chart, and the
true bearing of a target can readily be read out.
Relative Bearing Mode [HEAD UP]

The video is displayed so that the ship’s heading line points to the zenith of the PPI
(0° on range rings). Since targets are displayed in their directions relative to the
ship’s heading line, the operator can watch the video in the same field of view as in
operating the ship at sea.
This mode is suitable for ocean sailing and for watching over other ships.
3-48
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Course-Up Mode [COURSE UP]

By pressing this switch, the ship’s heading line is fixed pointing to the zenith of the
PPI (0° on range rings). In the same way as in the North-up mode, fixed targets do
not flicker, but are stabilized even if the ship is yawing. The bearing of the heading
line varies by the same shift of own ship’s course. If the course is changed, the
heading line can be reset to the Course-up mode by pressing the switch several
times.
North
North
North-up Mode Head-up Mode Course-up Mode
Cancel Ship’s Heading Line [HL OFF]･･････････････････････
HL
HL OFF
OFF
The ship’s heading line (HL) that presents the course of own ship is always displayed on the radar
display. The heading line is canceled while this switch is being pressed, so that the targets on the
heading lines can be seen easily.
Cancel All Display Items Except HL and Cross Cursor Mark

[+] [DATA OFF]･･･････････････････････････････････････････
All display information such ARPA vectors, symbols and navigation data may be cancelled
temporarily by the following operations, except VRMs, EBLs, HL, cross cursor mark [＋] and range
rings.
Procedures 1 Click MENU on the screen.
The MAIN Menu will appear.
3-49
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Click DATA OFF . MAIN MENU
All the display items except radar display, 1.IR

OFF ON
VRMs, EBLs, HL, cross cursor mark [＋] and 2.TUNE
range rings will disappear from the radar OFF ON
display. 3.PROCESS
2.PROC1
4.FUNCTION
1.FUNC OFF
Cancellation 1 Click DATA OFF .
5.EBL1
7.DATA OFF will be reset and, the CENTER OFFSET
information temporarily cancelled will
reappear.
6.EBL2
7.
CENTER
DATA OFF
OFFSET ３
Exit 1 Click EXIT . 8. SUB1 MENU
The Main Menu will be closed. 9. CODE INPUT
０． EXIT
Display PI（Parallel Index Lines ）[PI]･･････････････････････
Parallel index lines can be displayed in a semicircular area.
Procedures 1 Click the PI on the screen.

PI
The PI Menu will appear. 1.MODE
OFF ON
2 Select "ON" radio button of "1.IR". 0. EXIT
“ON” in “1.MODE” will be set and parallel

index lines will appear on the radar display.
The direction of PI will be changed by rotating
PI
the [EBL] control, and the line intervals will be
**.* °
changed by rotating the [VRM] control.
INTERVAL
* * . * nm
Cancellation 1 Select “OFF” of “1.MODE”.

“OFF” in “1.MODE” will be set and the PI will
disappear on the radar display.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

The PI Menu will be closed.
3-50
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Note: The bearing of the parallel index lines that are displayed in the PI menu
represents the true value when the bearing display of the radar reads N UP or C
UP and the relative value when it reads H UP.
Operation of Parallel Index Lines

◎ Rotate the PL (Parallel Index Lines) in the same direction of rotating the [EBL] control
(① and ②).
◎ The interval of the PI can be decreased as The [VRM] control is rotated anticlockwise
３ (③ and increased as the [VRM] control is rotated anticlockwise (④).

◎ The rotation and interval of the PI are controlled effectively only from the PI Menu.
When the PI Menu is closed, the parallel index lines are fixed.
◎ Repeat the above procedures from the first step to move the PI again.
Display of Parallel Index Lines
◎ Click PI , and the PI Menu will be closed and the PI will be fixed.
Press any of , , , and .
The PI will be fixed and the I Menu will be closed.
3-51
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Change Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode
Procedures 1 Click the RM button on the upper left of the screen.
The Relative Motion mode is changed to the True Motion mode. In the True
Motion mode, the position of own ship on the display moves depending upon
its course and speed and the influence of the current. Land and other fixed
ranges are fixed on the display and only actually moving targets move on the
３
radar display. When the True Motion mode is selected, own ship’s position
will be set to about 66% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its
course allowing for the influence of the current. Own ship will start moving
depending upon its course and speed and the influence of the tide.
Subsequently, when own ship arrives at the position of about 66% of the
display radius, the ship will be automatically reset to its initial position at about
65% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the
influence of the current.
Fixed on the radar display
Moving depending on own ship’s speed
True Motion Display
Change True Motion (TM) Mode to Relative Motion (RM) Mode.
Procedures 1 Click the TM button on the upper left of the screen.
The True Motion mode is dhange to the Relative Motion mode.

One ship nrill be reset to center position.
3-52
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Move Own Ship’s Display Position [OFF CENTER]･･････････
Own ship’s position at the display center can be moved to an off-centered position within 66% of the
display radius. This function is convenient to observe a wide coverage in any direction.
When the range is 96 (or 120)NM, this function cannot be used.
OFF
３ Procedures 1 Click the CENTER

on the upper right of the screen.
The bold cross cursor mark [+] will appear at the position of own ship on the
radar display.
2 Move the cross cursor mark [+] (own ship’s position) to

another position with the trackball.
3 Press the left button of the trackball.

The own ship’s position will move to the position of the cross cursor mark [+],
where it will be fixed.
Press the left button of the

trackball .
Return Own Ship’s Position to the Center

OFF
Procedures 1 Click the CENTER on the upper right of the screen.
3-53
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Display Other Ship’s Trails [TRAILS]･･･････････････････････
Other ship’s movement and speed can be monitored from the length and direction of its trail, serving
for collision avoidance. The trail length can be changed over 4 levels of 0.5 min, 1 min, 3 min, and
6 min.
Procedures
OFF
３
Click The level 0.5min will be selected and “TRAIL 0.5min”
will appear at the lower left of the radar display.
The trails (of 0.5 min long) will appear after other ship’s symbols.
Click 0.5min The level 1min will be selected and “TRAIL 1min” will appear at
the lower left of the radar display.
The trails (of 1 min long) will appear after other ship’s symbols.
Click 1min The level 3min will be selected and “TRAIL 3min” will appear at
Click 3min The level 6min will be selected and “TRAIL 6min” will appear at
Click 6min “TRAIL OFF” will appear at the lower left of the radar display and
the trails of other ships will disappear.
Trail
Other ship
3-54
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Display Own Ship’s Tracks and Own Symbols [OWN TRACK]
In the case that Any Navigation Equipment is Connected to This System

When navigation equipment is connected, the own ship’s track data of up to 1024 points that is
sent from the equipment can be stored and displayed. The data storage interval can be set
over 4 levels, 3 minutes (distance that the own ship moves within 3 minutes), 10 minutes, 15
minutes, and 30 minutes.
３ Procedures The setting can be changed by

left-clicking the button on the lower left
GAIN
SEA AUTO
①
of the screen (right figure①). RAIN
TRACK 3min
TRAILS 0.5min T
PROC PROC1
○ When setting from the mune:
1 Click the MENU button on the screen.

The Main Menu will appear. SUB1 MENU
TRACK
2 Click SUB1 MENU . 1.TRACK
OFF ON
2.INTERVAL TIME
1. 3min
3 Click TRACK .
3. CLR ALL
The TRACK Menu will appear.
4 Select "ON" radio button of "1.IR".

“ON”in“1.TRACK”will be set and own ship's
past track originated its current position will
appear. The current storage time interval will
appear at lower left on the radar display.
0． EXIT
Cancellation 1 Select "OFF" radio button of "1.IR".
“OFF”in“1.TRACK”will be set and own ship's track and the storage time interval
will disappear.
3-55
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
In Case of Changing Storage Time Interval
Procedures 1 Repeat the above procedure up to SUB1 MENU

Step 3. TRACK
1.TRACK
OFF ON
2 Click INTERVAL .
2.INTERVAL TIME
2.INTERVAL TIME will be selected and the
1. 3min
3
pull-down menu will appear.
Select the interval time in the

3.
1. 3min
CLR ALL
2. 10min
3. 15min
３
4. 30min
pull-down menu, select 1 through
4 with the trackball, then left-click.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear. 0． EXIT
2 Click EXIT .
3-56
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Clear Own Ship’s Track Storage
Procedures 1 Repeat the procedures of changing storage time interval of

own ship up to step 1.
SUB1 MENU
TRACK
2 Click CLR ALL . 1.TRACK
OFF ON
３ CLR ALL will be selected. When clearing all

the past track, click 1.YES to the question
“CLR ALL OK?”. If 2.NO is clicked, all the
2.INTERVAL TIME
1. 3min
3. CLR ALL
track will be cleared.
CLR ALL OK?
1. YES 2. NO
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

2 Click EXIT .
0． EXIT
3-57
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Marking [MARK]･････････････････････････････････････････
A maximum of 20 marks can be displayed at arbitrary positions on the radar video.

A mark created on the display holds the latitude and longitude.
①
[I] Plotting Marks. CURSOR( )
Procedures 1 Place the cursor over the upper right section of the screen
(right figure), then right-click. Next, select "MARK".
３
MARK will appear in the CURSOR（） at the upper left of the radar display.
2 Put the cross cursor mark [ + ] on the position where the [□]
mark is inserted.
3 Press trackball section left button.

The cross cursor mark [ + ] will be changed into the [□] mark and fixed on the
radar display. When entering more [□] marks, repeat the procedures from step
2. Up to 20 marks can be entered.
Note: If more than 20 marks are created, the oldest mark is cleared and the newly
created mark is displayed.
①
[II] Clearing Marks CURSOR( )
Procedures 1 Place the cursor over the upper right section of the screen
(right figure), then right-click. Next, select "MARK".
MARK is displayed on CURSOR（） at the upper right of the radar display.
2 Put the cross cursor mark [ + ] on the position where the [□]
mark is inserted.
3 Press trackball section right button.

The [□] mark will disappear. When clearing another [□] mark, repeat the
procedure from step 2.
3-58
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS]････････････････････
The range rings will appear.
－ 6 ＋
Procedures 1 Press the switch section (section １
indicated by the arrow in the right
figure) of the fixed distance scale on RM HUP the
upper left of the screen.
３ The range rings will appear and the interval of

the range rings will be digitally indicated at the
upper left of the radar display.
Cancellation 1 When the fixed distance scale is displayed, press the switch
on the right figure.
The range rings will disappear.
Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2]･････････････
This function is to display and set up variable range marks (VRMs). Two VRMs are available.
VRM1 is represented as a broken line and VRM2 as a dotted line. When EBL1 is displayed, VRM1
marker appears on the EBL1. When EBL2 is displayed, VRM2 marker appears on the EBL2. If
the starting point of an EBL is offset, the center of a VRM marker is positioned at the starting point of
the EBL.
VRM1
VRM markers presented on EBL
●Mark: VRM1
○Mark: VRM2
EBL1
VRM2
EBL1,VRM1:
EBL2
EBL2,VRM2:
3-59
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
VRM1 Operation
If VRM2 is selected, press to select VRM1 before operation.
(The currently selected VRM is displayed in reverse video at the lower right of the radar
display.)
Procedures 1 Press
VRM1 will be selected.
Press
３
VRM1 will disappear.
VRM2 Operation
If VRM1 is selected, press to select VRM2 before operation.
(The currently selected VRM is displayed in reverse video at the lower right of the radar
display.)
Procedures 1 Press
VRM2 will be selected.
Press
VRM2 will disappear.
VRM Range Display

The values of the VRM1 and VRM2 that are currently displayed on the PPI will be
indicated on the lower left of the radar display.
The VRM1 or VRM2 that is currently operable will be selected close to its range value.
VRM Operation
The variable range markers are displayed centering on the own ship. When rotating the
[VRM] control clockwise, the VRM will be larger. When rotating the [VRM] control
counterclockwise, the VRM will be smaller.
3-60
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Set Guard Zones [GUARD ZONE]･･････････････････････････
A fan-shape guard zone can be set up to keep a watch over the intrusion of other ships or targets, or
to automatically acquire other ships that have intruded into the zone.
By left-clicking the "GZ1, 2" section on the screen, it is possible to set on or off.
In this case, the zone that was set the previous time will be turned on.
[I] Creation of Fan-shaped Guard zone
３ Procedures 1 Click GZ .
GUARD ZONE
The GUARD ZONE Menu will appear. 1.GUARD ZONE1(GZ1)
OFF ON
2.GUARD ZONE2(GZ2)
2 Select “ON” of “GUARD ZONE1” to OFF ON
create a guard zone 1 and “GUARD MAKE GZ1
3.
ZONE2” to create a guard zone 2. (0.5NM-32NM)
When Guard Zone 1 and 2 are set, “ON” will 4. MAKE GZ2
(0.5NM-32NM)
set.
5.SET ACQ AUTO KEY
1.GZ1
3 Click MAKE GZ1 to create GUARD
ZONE1.
4 Click MAKE GZ2 to create GUARD

ZONE2.
The cursor will move to the echo display
０． EXIT
section.
Note: Guard Zones 1 or 2 can be set in any area within a range of 0.5 to 32
NM.
5 Use the [VRM] and [EBL] knobs to place VRM and EBL over
the starting point of the guard zone, then left click the cursor.
The starting point of the guard zone will be set.
6 Move the EBL to make fan-shaped zone enclosed by the

current cross cursor position.
Left-click when a desired guard zone is made.

The shape of the guard zone will be set up.
(The width of a guard zone is fixed to 0.5NM).
3-61
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Exit 1 Click EXIT or GZ .
The Guard Zone Menu will be closed.
HL
Check with the first [ENT] key.
３
Check with the second [ENT] key.
Operation of Guard Zones
When a target appears within a fan-shaped guard zone, an alarm will sound and a mark
▽ will appear on the target. The track mode becomes effective after about 1 min.
In creating a guard zone, a circular guard ring may be created if the start and end points
of the guard zone are set to the same point by omitting step 5 above.
The guard zone is displayed only during radar transmission, but also not appear during
the standby operation.
[II] Clearing Guard Zones from Radar Display
Procedures Left-click the switch "GZ1, 2" on the screen and the guard zone.
○To turn this off from the menu,

GUARD ZONE
1 Execute the procedures for [Ⅰ] 1.GUARD ZONE1(GZ1)
Creation of Fan-shaped Guard OFF ON
2.GUARD ZONE2(GZ2)
Zone up to step 2. OFF ON
3. MAKE GZ1
The GUARD ZONE Menu will appear. (0.5NM-32NM)
4. MAKE GZ2
(0.5NM-32NM)
2 Press 1 to clear Guard Zone 1
from radar display, and press 2 to
clear Guard Zone 2.
“OFF”will be set for Guard Zone 1 or 2,
which will be cleared from radar display.
Exit 1 Execute the Exit step in the same

procedures for [Ⅰ] Creation of ０． EXIT
Fan-shaped Guard Zone.
3-62
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]････････････････････････
ALARM ACK is the function of acknowledging the alarm item when an alarm sounds and stopping
an alarm sound as well as canceling flickering display. (If there are two or more alarms, it is
necessary to operate the switch for each alarm indication.) The alarm sound can be stopped, but
the alarm indication is not cancelled.
Stopping Alarm Sound
３
ALARM
Procedures 1 Press ACK .
Or left-click the alarm display area on the screen.
The alarm sound will be stopped.
Set Alarm Sound Level･･･････････････････････････････････
This function sets the sound and volume level of the alarm (alarm sound) to be delivered from the
keyboard.
Setting Alarm Sound level

LEVEL
2 Click SUB1 MENU . 1.RANGE RINGS
The Sub1 Menu will appear. 4.LEVEL4
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
3 Click LEVEL . 3.EBL
4.LEVEL4
The LEVEL Menu will be selected. 4.CHARACTER
4.LEVEL4
4 Click BUZZER . 5.VIDEO(ECHO)
4.LEVEL4
5.BUZZER will be selected and the pull-down 6.ARPA
menu will appear. 5.LEVEL4
7.BUZZER
7.LEVEL7
5 Select any level from 1 to 7 for 1.LEVEL1
BUZZER volume level in the 2.LEVEL2
3.LEVEL3
pull-down and click it. EXIT
4.LEVEL4
０．
5.LEVEL5
6.LEVEL6
7.LEVEL7
3-63
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

2 Click EXIT .
Note: Changing the “LEVEL”of the buzzer will cause the levels of all the
alarms to be changed as well as the key touch sound.
The level of any alarm cannot be set to 0 as well as the key touch
sound.
3-64
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
FUNCTION･･･････････････････････････････････････････････
FUNCTION is a function of setting the process suited for each condition during navigation to
enhance the target detection performance.
Setting items: The following nodes can be switched over.

FUNC1: Effective in observing the echoes on short ranges.
FUNC2: Effective in observing the echoes on long ranges.
FUNC3: Effective in observing the echoes in rough weather.
３ FUNC4: Set by service personnel. The initial setting is the same as FUNC1.
FUNC5: Set by service personnel. The initial setting is the same as FUNC1.

MAIN MENU
1.IR
OFF ON
2 Click FUNCTION. 2.TGT ENH
4.FUNCTION will be selected and the OFF ON
pull-down menu will appear. 3.PROCESS
2.PROC1
4.FUNCTION
3 Select a desired process setting 1.FUNC OFF
item from the click. 5.EBL11.FUNC OFF
2.FUNC1 OFFSET
CENTER
The process setting item will be changed and
6.EBL23.FUNC2
the current setting state will appear at the 4.FUNC3 OFFSET
CENTER
lower right of the radar display. 5.FUNC4
7. DATA OFF
6.FUNC5
8. SUB1 MENU
4 For changing the setting item, open 9. DEGAUSS
the pull-down menu in step 2 above
again and select a desired process
０． EXIT
setting item.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

Cancellation 1 Execute the procedures to function up to step 2.

4.FUNCTION will be selected and the pull-down menu will appear.
2 Click EXIT .
1.FUNC OFF will be set and “FUNC OFF” will appear the lower right of the
radar display.
3-65
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The process setting items of FUNC4 and FUNC5 can be changed by service personnel.
• Setting gain of input target signal (sensitivity preset)
• Setting standard value of input target signal (noise level)
• Setting radar interference rejection (IR):IR1 to IR4 (Effective when IR is ON)
• Setting target enhancement (TGT ENH):EXP1 to EXP4 (Effective when TGT ENH is
ON)
• Setting target processing (PROCESS):MODE1 to MODE8 (Effective when PROCESS
is ON)
• Setting sensitivity range (Maximum and minimum values)
• Setting sea clutter suppression range (Maximum and minimum values)
• Setting rain/snow clutter suppression range (Maximum and minimum values)
Note: Do not use FUNC2 and FUNC3 on short ranges. Otherwise, detection of ship targets
３
moving high speeds may become poor.
For FUNC1 to FUNC3, the recommended parameters have been preset by the
manufacturer, but the preset parameters could no be changed after delivery. In using
FUNC1 to FUNC3, IR, TGT ENH and PROCESS shall be set to ON (PROC1 to PROC3).
Expand Targets･･････････････････････････････････････････
Targets displayed on the radar display can be expanded, regardless of the pulse length selected.
Procedures The "ENH" section at the button left MAIN MENU

of the screen can be clicked to
1.IR
change the ON/OFF setting. OFF ON
2.TGT ENH
OFF ON
1 Click MENU. 3.PROCESS
The Main Menu will appear. 2.PROC1
4.FUNCTION
2 Select "ON" radio button of 1.FUNC OFF
5.EBL1
TGT ENH . CENTER OFFSET
“ON”in“2TGT ENH”will be set and“ENH 6.EBL2
CENTER OFFSET
ON ”will appear at the lower left of the radar
7. DATA OFF
display.
Then, the targets on the radar display will be 8. SUB1 MENU
expanded for higher definition. 9. CODE INPUT
Cancellation 1 Click MENU. ０． EXIT
2 Select "ON" radio button of TGT ENH.

“OFF” in “2.TGT ENH” will be set and “ENH OFF” will appear at the lower left
of the radar display.
The expanded targets on the radar display will be reset to their original sizes.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

3-66
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Display Processed Videos････････････････････････････････

Unnecessary noise will be reduced to highlight targets.
Attention
In watching a radar beacon mark, SART signal or a fast moving target on the
radar display, set the system to : PROCESS OFF (Processed Video OFF).
It is most suitable to use this function in the TM mode.
３
In using this function in the RM mode, use it in the NORTH UP or COURSE UP
mode. In using the function in the HEAD UP mode, the video may be blurred.
Procedures Clicking "PROC" on the screen will change the setting.
○ When setting from the menu:
1 Click MENU .
MAIN MENU
1.IR
OFF ON
2 Click the setting section of 2.TGT ENH
“3.PROCESS”. OFF ON
3.PROCESS will be selected and the 3.PROCESS
2.PROC1
pull-down menu will appear. 1.OFF
4.FUNCTION
2.PROC1
1.FUNC OFF
3.PROC2
3 Click a setting from 1 to 4. 5.EBL1 4.PROC3
CENTER OFFSET
6.EBL2
3-1 When “2.PROC1” is selected. CENTER OFFSET
2.PROC1 will be set and the targets moving 7. DATA OFF
at high speeds will be selected. 8. SUB1 MENU
The targets moving at low speeds will be 9. DEGAUSS
darkened.
This function is recommendable on the radar ０． EXIT
ranges of 1.5 NM or less.
3-2 When “3.PROC2” is selected.

3.PROC2 will be set.
This processing speed is in a range between PROC1 and PROC3.
3-3 When“4.PROC3” is selected.

4.PROC3 will be set and the targets moving at low speeds will be selected.
The targets moving at high speeds will be darkened.
This function is recommendable on the radar ranges of 3 NM
or more.
3-67
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cancellation 1 Execute the procedures to display processed videos up to

step 2.
2 Click OFF .
1.OFF will be set.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .
３
Reduce Radar Interference････････････････････････････････
Attention
In watching a radar mark or SART signal on the radar display, set the system to:
IR OFF (Radar Interference Rejection OFF)
This function is used when the interference from other ship's radar is strong.
By left-clicking the button on the lower right of the screen,

it is possible to set on or off.
Procedures 1 Click MENU.

2 Click "ON" radio button of IR .

“ON” in “1.IR” will be set and the radar interference rejection will be set to ON to
reduce radar interference.
Cancellation 1 Click MENU.
2 Click "OFF" radio button of IR .

“OFF” in “1.IR” will be set and the radar interference rejection will be set to
OFF.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

3-68
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Personal Information･････････････････････････････････････
The operating status of the radar equipment is recorded. If there are two or more operators to
operate the radar, each operator can register and recall the operating status that is suitable for the
operator. The operating status for up to 5 operators and each status can be named (using a
maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters).
* Personal Data to be Stored:

• Bearing mode
３ • DAY/NIGHT mode setting

• Brilliance
• Alarm level
• Vector length/mode
• Various video processing methods (IR, ENH, PROC, and FUNC)
Recalling Operating Status
Procedures Click the "PIN " on the lower right of the screen.
Open the LOAD menu. Execute the procedure from step 5.
1 Click MENU . SUB1 MENU

The Main Menu will appear. PIN
1. LOAD
2 Click SUB1 MENU .
2. SAVE
3. ERASE
3 Click PIN .
The PIN Menu will appear.
4 Click LOAD .
The PIN Menu will appear.
5 Select any number on the LOAD

Menu and click any of 1 to 5.
The registered operating status will be
recalled. ０． EXIT
6 Click 1.YES to the question “FILE ERASE OK?” to recall the

registered operating status.
Click 2.NO to stop the recall.
3-69
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
SUB1 MENU
Exit 1 Click EXIT . PIN
The PIN Menu will reappear. LOAD
1. TOKYO
2 Click EXIT . 2. **********
The Sub1 Menu will reappear. 3.
4.
2 Click EXIT .
5.
３
Registering Operating Status ０． EXIT
Procedures 1 Execute the procedures to recalling operating status up to

step 3.
2 Click SAVE . SUB1 MENU
The SAVE Menu will appear. PIN

SAVE
3 Click any of 1 to 5 to save the 1. TOKYO
operating status item assigned by 2.
any number 1 to 5. 3. INPUT NAME
The INPUT NME Menu will appear and the 4.
**********
selected number to save will be set up. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5. A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z < >
4 Use the trackball to select an DE L B S ENTER
alphabet character from A to Z that USE TB&NUM
is displayed in the menu, press the
left trackball button, and input one EXIT :
PRESS EXIT OR [CLR]
character or one number of the
name used for saving.
A maximum of 10 characters can be entered. ０． EXIT
5 Repeat step 4 until the name to save is made up, and select
“ENTER” in INPUT NAME Menu by using the trackball and
click the trackball section left button.
The operating status will be saved.
3-70
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

The PIN will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
2 Click EXIT .
３ Canceling Registered Operating Status
Procedures 1 Execute the procedures to recalling operating status up to

step 3.
SUB1 MENU
2 Click ERASE . PIN
The ERASE Menu will appear. ERASE
1. TOKYO
3 Click any of 1 to 5. 2. **********
The register number of the operating status to 3.
erased will be selected.
4.
5.
4 Click YES to the question “FILE
ERASE OK?” to erase the
FILE ERASE OK?
registered number.
1. Y E S 2. N O
Click NO to stop the erasing.
The PIN Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
3 Click EXIT .
3-71
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Display of Navigational Information････････････････････････
Navigational information such as waypoint marks, and a maximum of 256 point of NAV lines,
coastlines, depth contours and NAV marks can be created, displayed, read out, saved, edited
and cancelled. (This function is effective only when navigation equipment is connected to this
system.)
[I] Displaying Waypoint Marks

If waypoint information is sent from navigation equipment, a waypoint mark will appear on the
radar display. If the waypoint appears within the radar display, it is displayed as “○WP”.
３
NAV/MAP INFO
2 Click SUB1 MENU . 1.WPT
OFF ON
The Sub1 Menu will appear. 2. NAV DISP
3. NAV/MAP
3 Click NAV/MAP INFO .
4.GEODETIC
The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear. 0
WGS-84
4 Click "ON" radio button of WPT .
“ON” in 1.WPT will be set and the selected
waypoint mark will appear.

Geodetic system name display
2 Click EXIT . area: The display changes
The Sub1 Menu will be closed. according to the geodetic

system No. in the right input
area.
3-72
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[II] Setting NAV INFO to ON/OFF

The following navigational information can be displayed or cancelled by pressing the
corresponding switch.
Own ship mark [OS MARK]
NAV lines [NAV LINE]
Coast lines [COAST]
Depth contour [CONTOUR]
Mark 1 [MARK1]
Mark 2 [MARK2]
３ Mark 3 [MARK3]
Mark 4 [MARK4]
Procedures 1 Click MENU .

NAV/MAP INFO
2 Click SUB1 MENU . NAV DISP
1.OS MARK
2.NAV LINE
3.COAST
The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.
4.CONTOUR
4 Click NAV DISP . 5.MARK1
The NAV DISP Menu will appear. 6.MARK2

7.MARK3
5 Click the check box next to the 8.MARK4
numbers 1 though 8 that are to be
turned ON or OFF.
The menu item set to ON will be marked with
a check mark in the “□”. ０． EXIT
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will reappear.
1 Click EXIT .
1 Click EXIT .
3-73
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[III] Making and Editing Navigation Information

2 Click SUB1 MENU .


３
4 Click NAV/MAP .
The NAV/MAP Menu will appear.
5 Click EDIT .
The EDIT Menu will appear.
Note: Latitude and longitude data from the GPS and bearing data
from the GYRO are required.
SUB1 MENU
NAV/MAP INFO
NAV/MAP
EDIT
Clear all NAV INFO or each NAV item on display
1. CLEAR
2. MAKE Make up navigational information
3. CORRECT
4. DELETE Correct one point in navigational information
5. INSERT
Delete one point navigational information
REMAIN POINT
256 Insert one element of NAV line, Coast line or Depth
Contour
Remain points of navigational information that can be

０． EXIT created
3-74
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
１ CLEAR (Clear all NAV INFO or each NAV item on display)
Procedures 1 Click CLEAR .

The CLEAR Menu will appear.
2 Press any of 1 to 8 to clear any item navigation information.
３ 1 : Clear all navigational information on display.
SUB1 MENU
2 : Clear NAV LINE.
NAV/MAP INFO
NAV/MAP
3 : Clear COAST Line.
EDIT
CLEAR
4 : Clear CONTOUR.
1. ALL
2. NAV LINE
5 : Clear MARK1.
3. COAST
4. CONTOUR
6 : Clear MARK2. 5. MARK1
6. MARK2
7 : Clear MARK3. 7. MARK3
8. MARK4
8 : Clear MARK4.
０． EXIT
The NAV INFO to be cleared will be selected.
3-75
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 MAKE (Make up navigational information)
Procedures 1 Click MAKE .

The MAKE Menu will appear.
2 Press any of 1 to 8 to clear any item navigation information.
1 : Make NAV LINE.

SUB1 MENU ３
2 : Make COAST Line. NAV/MAP INFO
NAV/MAP
EDIT
3 : Make CONTOUR.
MAKE
1. NAV LINE
4 : Make MARK1. COAST
2.
3. CONTOUR
5 : Make MARK2. 4. MARK1
5. MARK2
6. MARK3
6 : Make MARK3. 7. MARK4
8. ENT
7 : Make MARK4. REMAIN POINT
256
０． EXIT
When one of 1 to 7 is selected, NAV MAKE will appear in the CURSOR ( ) at

the upper right of the radar display.
3 Move the cross cursor mark to the starting point of a line or

any element of a mark using the trackball, and click the
trackball section left button.
The starting point of a line or the element of a mark to mark will be set up.
4 Repeat step 3 above. If a line or mark is completed, click the

ENT .
Then, a line or a mark will be made.
5 Repeat the steps 2 to 4 to make another line or mark.
6 Click EXIT when all NAV INFO item is made.

The EDIT Menu will reappear.
3-76
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Note: Navigation information can have a maximum of 256 points

plotted. Note that the value of REMAIN POINTS (the number
of points that can be still plotted) is decreased whenever
lines and marks are plotted.
3 CORRECT (Correct one position of navigational information)
SUB1 MENU
NAV/MAP INFO
３ Procedures 1 Click CORRECT .

CORRECT will be selected. CORRECT will
appear in the CURSOR( ) at the upper right of
NAV/MAP
EDIT
the radar display. 1. CLEAR

2. MAKE
2 Move the cross cursor mark to any 3. CORRECT
line element or mark to correct using 4. DELETE
the trackball, and click the trackball 5. INSERT
section left button.
A dotted-line starting from the line or mark will be
REMAIN POINT
drawn as the cross cursor moves. 256
3 Move the cross cursor to the point to

correct using the trackball, and click
the trackball section left button. ０． EXIT
One element of the line or the mark will be
moved.
4 DELETE (Delete one point in navigational SUB1 MENU

information) NAV/MAP INFO
NAV/MAP
EDIT
Procedures 1 Click DELETE . 1. CLEAR
DELETE will be selected. NAV DEL will appear 2. MAKE
in the CURSOR( ) at the upper right of the radar 3. CORRECT
display.
4. DELETE
5. INSERT
2 Move the cross cursor mark to any
line element or mark to delete using
REMAIN POINT
the trackball, and click the trackball 256
section left button.
One element of the line or the mark will be
deleted.
０． EXIT
3-77
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(Example)
5 INSERT (Insert one element of NAV line, Coast line or Depth Contour)
３
Procedures 1 Click INSERT . SUB1 MENU
INSERT will be selected. NAV INS will appear NAV/MAP INFO
in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right of the
NAV/MAP
radar display.
EDIT
1. CLEAR
2 Move the cross cursor mark to any
line element to which another 2. MAKE
element is to add, using the 3. CORRECT
trackball, and click the trackball 4. DELETE
section left button. 5. INSERT
3 Move the cross cursor to the point REMAIN POINT

256
at which another line element is to
be inserted, using the trackball, and
click the trackball section left
button.
０． EXIT
One line element will be inserted.
(Example)
3-78
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
6 EXIT (End making and editing navigational information)
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

The NAV/MAP Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
３ 3
Click EXIT .
4 Click EXIT .
[Ⅳ] Setting Navigational Information

2 Click SUB1 MENU .


4 Click NAV/MAP .
The NAV/MAP Menu will appear.
3-79
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
SUB1 MENU
NAV/MAP INFO
NAV/MAP
1.OS POSN Enter own ship's position manually
N　00' 00. 000'
３
W　00' 00. 000'
Read out navigational information
2. LOAD
3. SAVE Save navigational information
4. ERASE
5. EDIT Erase saved navigational information
6. SHIFT
Make, cancel, add and move navigational
7. SHIFT CLEAR
information
Shift navigational positions except own ship's mark
０． EXIT
Clear shifted navigational positions
1 OS POSN (Enter own ship's position manually)

Set this function to use the navigational information at any other position than
own ship's position.
Procedures 1 Click the latitude and longitude numeric section under

"OS POSN".
1.OS POSN will be selected.
The numeric input dialogue box will be displayed.
2 Press or .
N (north latitude) or S (south latitude) will be selected.
3 Enter a latitude value (XX゜XXX.XX’) using any of 0 to 9.
4 Press SET .
The latitude value entered manually will be set up.
5 Press or .
E (east longitude) or W (west longitude) will be selected.
3-80
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
6 Enter a longitude value (XX゜XXX.XX’) using any of 0 to 9.
7 Press SET .
The longitude value entered manually will be set up.
Note: The own ship's position entered manually is effective only in the NAV/MAP
INFO Menu.
３
2 Select Equipment to Load the Read-out Navigational Information
In the case that any electronic positioning equipment such as GPS is
connected to the system, or that own ship's position is entered manually, the
data can be read out.
Procedures 1 Click LOAD .

The LOAD Menu will appear. SUB1 MENU
NAV/MAP INFO
2 Click DEVICE . NAV/MAP
1.DEVICE will be selected and the pull-down LOAD

menu will appear. 1.DEVICE
1.INTERNAL
1.INTERNAL
2. LODE
０． EXIT
3-81
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3 Readout Navigational Information Display (Radar Internal Data)

Only when navigational equipment is connected to the system or when own
ship's position is entered manually, the readout files can be selected. The
selecting method is different depending upon the type of device to load the
readout data.
When Setting DEVICE to INTERNAL

３
Procedures 1 Click LOAD . SUB1 MENU
The LOAD Menu will appear. NAV/MAP INFO
NAV/MAP
2 Place the cursor over the LOAD
navigation information file name LOAD DATA
(0 through 9) to be read, then 1.
double click. 2.
3.
4.
3 Click YES to the question “FILE 5.
LOAD OK?” if the file name is right. 6.
7.
8.
The selected number of navigational 9.
0.
information will be read out.
EXIT :
To cancel file loading, click NO . PRESS EXIT
4 The selected file name will appear at the lower right of the
radar display.
3-82
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
4 SAVE (Save navigational information)

In the case that any electronic navigation equipment is connected to the system,
or that own ship's position is entered manually, the data can be saved.
３ Procedures 1 Click SAVE .

The SAVE Menu will appear.
SUB1 MENU
NAV/MAP INFO
2 Place the cursor over one of the
NAV/MAP
numbers 1 through 0 (ten in all),
then click. SAVE
The INPUT NAME Menu will appear and the 1. TOKYO

selected number to save will be set up. 2. *****
3. INPUT NAME
**********
3 Use the trackball to select an 4.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
alphabet character from A to Z that 5. A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
is displayed in the menu, press the 6. U V W X Y Z SPC L R
left trackball button, and input one DE L B S ENTER
7.
character or one number of the USE TB&NUM
8.
name used for saving. EXIT :
9. PRESS EXIT
A maximum of 10 characters can be entered.
0.
EXIT :
4 Repeat step 3 until the name to PRESS EXIT
save is made up, and select “ ENTER” in INPUT NAME
Menu by using the trackball and click the trackball section
left button.
The currently displayed navigational information will be saved.
3-83
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 ERASE (Erase saved navigational information)
SUB1 MENU
NAV/MAP INFO
Procedures 1 Click ERASE .
NAV/MAP
The ERASE Menu will appear.
ERASE
1. TOKYO
2 Place the cursor over one of the
2. *****
numbers 1 through 0 (ten in all),
then click. 3.
3 Click YES to the question “FILE

4.
5.
FILE ERASE OK?
1. Y E S 2. N O ３
ERASE OK?” to erase the 6.
information. 7.
8.
The elected number of navigational 9.
information will be erased. 0.
EXIT :
PRESS EXIT
Click NO to stop erasing the information.
6 SHIFT (Shift navigational positions except own ship's mark)

The position of any navigational information SUB1 MENU
such as NAV lines, coast lines, depth NAV/MAP INFO
contours, and other marks except own ship's
NAV/MAP
mark can be corrected manually.
1.OS POSN
N　00' 00. 000'
Procedures 1 Click SHIFT . W　00' 00. 000'
SHIFT will be selected. NAV SHIFT will 2. LOAD
appear in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right 3. SAVE
of the radar display.
4. ERASE
5. EDIT
2 Move the cross cursor mark to an
6. SHIFT
element of a line such as NAV line,
7. SHIFT CLEAR
coast line, depth contour line, or a
mark using the trackball.
3 Click the trackball section left ０． EXIT

button.
A line or mark to correct will be set up.
4 Move the cross cursor mark to any point to which a line or

mark will be shifted, using the trackball.
3-84
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 Click the trackball section left button.

The point to which a line or mark is to be shifted will be set up, and all lines and
marks will be shifted.
7 SHIFT CLEAR (Clear the corrected positions of navigation information)
Procedures 1 Click SHIFT CLEAR .

SHIFT CLEAR will be selected.
３ The latest correction to navigation information (only one correction) will be

cleared.
Note: Only the latest correction is cleared and the previous

navigation information is restored.
The information cannot be further restored.
8 EXIT (Exit from setting of navigational information)
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

2 Click EXIT .
3 Click EXIT .
3-85
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[Ⅴ] Setup and Display of Geodetic System

In making up any navigational information, it is necessary to set up the geodetic
system used by the connected navigation equipment. When any saved
navigational information is loaded, the geodetic system used when the
navigational information was saved will also be displayed. Then, check that the
geodetic system on display is the same as that for the connected navigation
equipment. If both geodetic systems are different, the positions of the
navigational information on radar display may be deviated. Therefore, it is
important to set the same geodetic system as the navigation equipment.

SUB1 MENU
NAV/MAP INFO
３
The Main Menu will appear. 1.WPT
OFF ON
2. NAV DISP
2 Click SUB1 MENU .
3. NAV/MAP
4.GEODETIC
0
WGS-84
4 Click GEODETIC .
4.GEODETIC will be selected.
5 Select by pressing in the

menu.
This is set by or the numeric ０． EXIT
input dialogue box.
Geodetic system name display

Select the number of geodetic area: The display changes
system. according to the geodetic
(See Table of Geodetic Systems) system No. in the right input
When the number of geodetic system is area.
entered, its name is changed.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

2 Click EXIT .
3-86
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
TABLE OF GEODETIC SYSTEM

NO. NAME REPRESENTATION
0 WGS-84 WGS-84
1 WGS-72 WGS-72
2 Japan Japan
3 North American 1927 (U.S) 1927 North America
4 North American 1927 (Canada & Alaska) 1927 Canada, Araska
5 European 1950 (Europe) European 1950
6 Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia) Austrarian geodetic 1966
7 Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (England) UK
8 NAD-83 NAD-83
9 no use
３ 10
11
12
ADINDAN (Ethiopia & Sudan)
ARC (Botswana)
no use
ADINDAN
ARC 1950
13 AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 (Australia) AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984
14 BERMUDA 1957 (the Bermudas) BERMUDA 1957
15 BOGOTA OBSERVATORY (Columbia) BOGOTA OBSERVATORY
16 CAMPO INCHAUSPE (Argentine) CAMPO INCHAUSPE
17 CHATHAM 1971 (Chatham Island) CHATHAM 1971
18 CHUA ASTRO (paraguay) CHUA ASTRO
19 CORREGO ALEGRE (Brazil) CORREGO ALEGRE
20 DJAKARTA (VATAVIA)(Sumatra) DJAKARTA
21 EUROPEAN 1979 (Europe) EUROPEAN 1979
22 GEODETIC DATUM 1949 (New Zealand) GEODETIC DATUM 1949
23 GUAM 1963 (Guam) GUAM 1963
24 HAYFORD 1910 (Finland) HAYFORD 1910
25 HJORSEY 1955 (Iceland) HJORSEY 1955
26 INDIAN (India & Nepal) INDIAN
27 IRELAND 1965 (Ireland) IRELAND 1965
28 KERTAU 1948 (West Malaysia) KERTAU 1948
29 L.C.5 ASTRO (Cayman Black Island) L.C.5 ASTRO
30 LIBERIA 1964 (Liberia) LIBERIA 1964
31 LUZON (Philippines) LUZON
32 MERCHICH (Morocco) MERCHICH
33 MINNA (Cameroon) MINNA
34 NAHRWAN (Oman) NAHRWAN
35 NAPARIMA, BWI (Trinidad and Tobago) NAPARIMA, BWI
36 OLD EGYPTIAN (Egypt) OLD EGYPTIAN
37 OLD HAWAIIAN (the Hawaii Islands) OLD HAWAIIAN
38 PICO DE LAS NIEVES (the Canary Islands) PICO DE LAS NIEVES
39 PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (South America) PROVISIONAL S-AMERICAN 1956
40 PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 (South Chile) PROVISIONAL S-CHILEAN 1963
41 PUERTO RICO (Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands) PUERTO RICO
42 QORNOQ (South Greenland) QORNOQ
43 RT90 (Sweden) RT90
44 SANTA BRAZ (Sao Maguel, santa Maria Islands) SANTA BRAZ
45 SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 (South America) SOUTH AMERICAN 1969
46 SOUTHWEST BASE (Faial, Graciosa, Pico.Sao Jorge and terceira Islands) SOUTHWEST BASE
47 TIMBALAI 1948 (Brunei and East Malaysia) TIMBALAI 1948
3-87
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Function of USER Switch / OPTION Switch................................
USER Switch
In the initial setting, the vector length maximum ON/OFF is registered.
These funcions can be changed only by service personnel.
Functions Registerable in USER Switch:

①Vector Length Maximum: ON/OFF
ON: Vector length 60 min (max)
OFF: Vector length
②NAV/MAP INFO Menu: ON/OFF

Time set on VECTOR TIME Menu.
３
ON: The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.
OFF: The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will be closed.
③Parallel Index Line Display: ON/OFF

ON: The parallel index lines set on the PI Menu will appear on the radar
display.
OFF: The displayed parallel index lines will be cleared.
OPTON Switch
①OPTON1 Switch
The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to
operate that option.
The call of a MENU is assigned at the time of factory shipments.
②OPTON2 Switch
The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to
operate that option.
The call of a TEST is assigned at the time of factory shipments.
3-88
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Operation of Performance monitor･････････････････････････

This function con be used only when the radar equipment is equipped with the NJU-63/64
Performance Monitor.
1 Method of Operation
In the case that the equipment is provided with radar interswitch, the interswitch
shall be set to the Master Radar mode.
３ Procedures 1 Click TEST. TEST MENU

1. SELF CHECK
2. PANEL TEST
2 Click "ON" radio button of
3. ARPATEST
"5.PM".
4.MAG　CURRENT
“ON” in “5.PM” will be set and the radar will OFF ON
automatically be set to RM, OFF CENTER 5.PM
OFF, IR OFF, PROCESS OFF, TGT ENH OFF ON
OFF, FUNCTION OFF and 24 NM range. 6. ERROR LOGGING
The PM pattern for checking the receiving 7. SYSTEM INFO
system will appear and the [PM] indicator
bar-graph will also be in the TEST Menu to
be used for checking the transmitted power. PM

The TEST Menu will be closed.
Note: All target acquisitions by ARPA functions will be cancelled.

The target acquisition cancelled when PM is ON will not be
recovered.
The radar image is suppressed to make the PM image easy to
see.
So, the test menu should be always closed after the PM has
been checked.
3-89
12●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● to ●
18NM
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
PM Pattern
2 Checking Transmitter System

The value of the TRANSMIT POWER indicator bar graph in the test menu indicates the
value corresponding to the transmission output power. If the indicated value becomes
extremely short against the bar length checked at the initial time, it is necessary to
request for checking of the transmitter system by a service engineer.
3-90
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Checking procedure
① Read a current value A on the bar indicator.
② Referring to the Calibration Curve I, obtain a relative attenuation d(B) for the initial bar
indicator length B that is specified in the INFORMATION LABEL.
③ Then, obtain a relative attenuation d(A) for the value A referring to the Calibration Curve I.
The value given by d(A) - d(B) represents the attenuation of the current transmission
output power compared with the value at the initial time.
３ ④ If the attenuation value given by d(A) - d(B) is 10 dB or more (due to the life of the
magnetron), it is necessary to request for checking of the transmitter system by a service
engineer.
Calibration Curve I
Initial bar
length
Date and time of

Relative Attenuation d
initial setting
Maximum range
pattern
Measurement precision
Length of Bar Indicator l
Figure 1
3-91
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(Example)
Assuming that the initial bar indication is B = 8 and the current bar indication A = 6, the relative
attenuation is d(B) = 3.5 dB, d(A) = 7 dB. Thus, d(A) - d(B) = 3.5dB.
This clearly indicates that the current transmission output power is attenuated by approximately 3.5
dB.
Example of Checking Transmitter System
Current bar indication A=6
３
Initial bar indication B=8
Calibration Curve I
Relative Attenuation d
Measurement precision
Length of Bar Indicator l
Figure 2
3-92
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3 Checking Receiver System

The maximum range of the PM pattern on display indicates a deterioration of the
sensitivity of the receiver system.
Checking Procedure
⑤ Measure the PM pattern displayed on the display using the VRM of the maximum range
‘max’ from the PPI sensor.
⑥ Obtain the degree of sensitivity deterioration R (rmax) corresponding to ‘rmax’ using the
３ calibration curve II and indicate the degree of sensitivity deterioration of the current
receiver system.
Calibration curve II
Sensitivity deterioration R (rmax)
Maximum range of RM pattern (rmax)
Figure 3
3-93
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(Example)
Assuming that the maximum range of the initial PM pattern is rBmax = 18 NM according to the
INFORMATION LABEL, and if that of the current PM pattern is rAmax = 16 NM, the deterioration
value is ∆R (rmax) = 5dB, referring to Calibration Curve II.
This means that the receiver system has sensitivity deterioration of approximately 5dB.
Example of Checking Receiver System
8-18NM 16-18NM
Initial PM Current PM
pattern pattern
３
Sensitivity deterioration value R(rmax)
Calibration curve II
PM pattern maximum range (rmax)
Figure 4
3-94
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
EBL Maneuvering････････････････････････････････････････
Menu Composition
SUB1 MENU
EBL MANEUVER
1.EBL MANEUVER
OFF 　　ON　
2.REACH
0
３ 3.TURN MODE
OFF
4.TURN SET
　　ON　
0.10-2.00nm *. * *
0. EXIT
HEADING
T *. * *
R *. * *
WOL
*. * *
［Ⅰ］Initial Setting
Procedures 1 Click MENU , then SUB1 MENU and SUB1 MENU .

The EBL MANEUBER Menu will appear.
2 Click the numeric section of REACH.

REACH will be selected.
The numeric input dialogue box is opened.
3 Set the numeric value in the dialogue box.
4 Press END .
3-95
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 Click TURN MODE.

TURN MODE will be selected.
Select any turn mode.
RADIUS: Constant turn diameter (NM)
RATE: Constant turn speed (deg/min)
6 Click the numeric setting section of TURN SET .

TURN SET will be selected.
7 Set the numeric value in the dialogue box.

３
8 Press END .
Note: If the initial setting is not correct, the maneuver curve will be
affected.
3-96
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
［Ⅱ］Creating Maneuver Curve
Procedures 1 Click MENU , then SUB1 MENU and SUB1 MENU .

The EBL MANEUBER Menu will appear.
2 Click "ON" radio button of EBL MANEUVER.

“ON” in “1.EBL MANEUBER” will be set and a supplemental line, a maneuver
curve and WOL will appear on the radar display.
３ 3 Set the starting point of the supplemental line using the

trackball and click to fix it.
The position of WOL (steering point) will change depending upon the starting
point of the supplemental line. If the WOL is behind own ship's position, the line
color of the WOL sill change.
4 Set the bearing of the supplemental line using the [EBL]

control.
The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will
finally move. The position of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of
the supplemental line. If WOL is behind own ship's position, the line color of the
WOL will change.
5 Select by left-clicking the trackball.

The setting will be established. However, if the WOL is behind own ship's
position, the entry of Click will be rejected and the setting will not be
established.
Note: If the [EBL] is pressed during the EBL MANEUVER operation,

the Menu will be closed and the maneuver curve creating
operation will be stopped.
3-97
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Procedures 1 Click "OFF" radio button of EBL MNEUVER.

“OFF”in “1.EBL MANEUVER”will be set and the EBL MANEUVER function will
set to OFF.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

３
HL
Supplemental Line
Maneuver Curve
REACH
R
WOL
O
Own Ship's Position Scheduled Route
WOL：Steering point
REACH：Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
R：Turning radius
3-98
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3-99
SECTION 4
MEASUREMENT OF RANGE
AND BEARING
Measurement by Trackball ................................... 4-1

Measurement by Range Rings............................. 4-2
Measurement by EBLs and VRMs ....................... 4-2
Measurement between Two Optional Points ...... 4-4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Measurement by Trackball･･･････････････････････････
Procedures 1. Check the target echoes on the radar display.
2. Move the cross cursor mark to a target by the trackball.
The [CURSOR] on the radar display indicates the bearing and range of the
target.
The range is a distance from own ship’s position.
CURSOR（）
TRUE 45.0° True bearing of the cursor relative to own ship
5.0nm Range between the cursor anda own ship
0 REL 45.0° Relative bearing of the cursor relative to own ship
４ 45°
Target Cursor
5.0NM
270 90
Own Ship
180
Fig. 4.1
4-1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Measurement by Range Rings･････････････････････････････

- 6 +
Procedures 1 SP
RM NUP
TRANSMIT
X-BAND
1. Press
The Range Rings will appear on the radar display.
The range between the target and own ships can be determined by visually
measuring the target’s position that lies between two range rings.
(The range ring interval is fixed and indicates at the upper left of the radar
display.)
Measurement by EBLs and VRMs･･････････････････････････

Procedures 1. Press
EBL1 to select EBL1 display and operation.
４
The “EBL1” indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected and
the EBL1 will appear as a broken-line on the PPI display.
2. Turn the [EBL] control to put EBL1 on a target.
The bearing of the EBL1 will appear at the lower right of the radar display.
The EBL1 bearing represents the target’s bearing.
3. Press
VRM1 to select VRM1 display and operation.
The “VRM1” indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected
and the VRM1 will appear as a broken-line circle on the PPI display.
4. Move the broken-line VRM1 to the target by using the

trackball.
The range of the VRM1 from own ship will appear at the lower right of the radar
display. The range of VRM1 signifies a distance between the target and own
ship.
Refer to Fig. 4.2 in the next page.

In this figure, the range and bearing are;
Range: 5.0 nm
Bearing: 45.0°
4-2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
45°
EBL1
5.0NM
Target
270 90
Own Ship
４ VRM1
EBL1 45.0°
EBL2
VRM1 5.0nm
VRM2 nm
180
EBL1
VRM1
EBL Control
Fig. 4.2
4-3
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Measurement between Two Optional Points･････････････････
Procedures 1. Press EBL2 to select EBL2 display and operation.
The “EBL2” indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected and
the EBL2 will appear as a dotted-line on the PPI display.
2. Left-click the C switch at the lower right of the EBL2.
3. Using the trackball, move the starting point of EBL2 to one

(A) of the two points.
(See Fig. 4.3.)

４
4. Turn the [EBL] control to move EBL2 to the other point (B).
(See Fig. 4.3.)
5. Press VRM2 to select VRM2 display and operation.
(● VRM marker) will appear on a dotted-line of the EBL2.
6. Using the trackball, move the VRM2 marker on a dotted-line of

EBL2 to the point B.
The VRM2 marker ● moves away from the center of the display by turning the
trackball clockwise, and closer to the center.
The bearing and range between the two points will appear in the “VRM2” and
“EBL2” area on the lower right of the radar display.
4-4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
0 VRM2
EBL1
340
VRM2 Marker
Starting Point of EBL2
Cape 90DEG
A B
EBL2
3NM
270 90
４
Own Ship
EBL1 340.0°
EBL2 90.0°
VRM1 nm
VRM2 3.0nm
180
EBL2
VRM2
EBL Control
Fig. 4.3
It is also possible to use EBL1 instead of EBL2 in measuring the bearing and
range between two optional points. In the procedures above, change EBL2
into EBL1 and VRM2 into VRM1, and left-click C of the EBL2 in step 2.
4-5
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
4-6
SECTION 5
OPERATION OF ARPA
5.6 DATA DISPLAY ...........................................................5-18

Types of Data Display .......................................................5-18
Using ARPA ...........................................................................5-1 Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA].................5-19
5.1 INITIAL SETTING .........................................................5-2 Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA].........5-19
Setting Collision Decision Criteria: SAFE LIMIT...............5-2 5.7 ALARM DISPLAY .......................................................5-20
Automatic Setting Mode (System Start) ..............................5-4 Dangerous Target Alarm: CPA/TCPA .............................5-20
Setting Range Scale: RANGE SCALE .............................5-4 Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONE]..................................5-21
Setting Own Ship’s Speed...................................................5-5 Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET] ..................................5-22
5.2 DISPLAY MODE SETTING...........................................5-7 System Function Alarm [ARPA (DATA)] ............................5-23
Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYRO] ............................................5-23
Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM] ...............................5-7
Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ........................5-7 5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING ..............................................5-24
5.3 TARGET ID No. DISPLAY.............................................5-8 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode ......................5-24
Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ................5-25
5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION ...............................................5-9 Using the TRIAL Function .................................................5-26
Automatic Acquisition [AUTO] .............................................5-9 5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS ..........................5-27
Manual Acquisition [MANUAL] ..........................................5-11 Deleting Targets ................................................................5-27
Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes [GZ1、GZ2]
[ACQ MANUAL] ................................................................5-12 5.10 ARPA SETTING ........................................................5-29
5.5 ARPA DATA DISPLAY.................................................5-13 Simulation .........................................................................5-30
Gate Size ..........................................................................5-32
Display of Vectors .............................................................5-13 Test Video .........................................................................5-34
Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN] ...........................5-16
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Using ARPA
Attention
There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and tracking
functions of ARPA:
[I] Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic

tracking
DepENTing on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between
adjacent targets during automatic tracking usually ranges somewhere
between 0.03 and 0.05 nm. If multiple targets approach each other,
resolution will become about 0.03 nm and this may cause the system to
regard them as one target and thus to swap between them or lose one or
more of them. Such swapping or loss of targets may also occur if the
target image is affected by rain or snow clutter, sea clutter or if the target
moves close to land.
５ [II] Intensity of echoes and the tracking function

The intensity of echoes and the tracking function are correlated, and thus
the target will be lost if no echoes are detected for six consecutive scans.
Therefore, if there is a lost target, radar gain must be increased to improve
target detection. If, however, radar gain is increased too much, sea clutter
or other noise may be mistakenly detected and tracked as a target, and a
false alarm may result. In such cases, do not apply strong impact to the
touch panel, trackball or gain, because doing so may cause a malfunction.
[III] Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking

To execute accurate tracking, it is necessary to accurately adjust the
[GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] controls of the radar so that the target to be
acquired and tracked is clearly displayed. Inappropriate settings for these
controls will reduce the reliability and accuracy of automatic tracking.
5-1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5.1 INITIAL SETTING

The initial settings for using the ARPA functions are described in this section.
Setting Collision Decision Criteria: SAFE LIMIT･････････････
See sections 3.4 “Basic Operations” and 4 “Measurement of Range and Bearing” for descriptions of
operation.
Attention
Set the optimum values of collision decision conditions, depENTing on the vessel
type, water area, weather and oceanographic conditions. (For the relations
between those conditions and alarms, refer to section 5.7 “ALARM DISPLAY.”)
Before starting, check the collision decision criteria settings.
SUB1 MENU ５
ARPA/AIS
Procedures 1 Press MENU or OPTION2 key on the 1.CPA LIMIT
screen. 0.0-9.9nm 1.5
2.TCPA LIMIT
1-99min 10
3.CPA RING
2 Click SUB1 MENU , then ARPA/AIS.
OFF ON
The ARPA Menu will appear.
4. TRIAL
3 Set CPA LIMIT (Closest Point of 5.GATE

2.HIGH
Approach).
6. AIS SETTING
(1) Left-click the“CPA LIMIT”edit box.

The numeric input dialogue box will be
opened.
０． EXIT
(2) Set the number by pressing the“+”or“−”keys in dialogue box.
(3) Press ENT to set up the value entry.

The input number will be fixed.
5-2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
4 Display the CPA LIMIT ring. SUB1 MENU

ARPA/AIS
1.CPA LIMIT
0.0-9.9nm 1.5
2.TCPA LIMIT
(1) Click the "ON" of "3.CPA RING". 1-99min 10
“ON”in“3.CPA RING”will be set 3.CPA RING
and“CPA RING”will appear on the OFF ON
radar display. 4. TRIAL
5.GATE
2.HIGH
6. AIS SETTING
(2) Should the CPA ring not appear, click
the "OFF" of "3.CPA RING".
"OFF" in "3.CPA RING" will be set.
０． EXIT
Attention: The CPA RING is not appear in the TRUE Vector mode.
５ 5 Set TCPA LIMIT (Time to CPA)

(1) Click the numeric section of
LIMIT".
"2.TCPA SUB1 MENU
ARPA/AIS
0.0-9.9nm 1.5
opened.
2.TCPA LIMIT
1-99min 10
(2) Set the number by pressing 3.CPA RING
the“+”or“−”keys in the dialogue box. OFF ON
(3) Press ENT to set up the value entry. 4. TRIAL
5.GATE
2.HIGH
Exit 1 Click EXIT . 6. AIS SETTING
2 Click EXIT .
０． EXIT
Attention: The set values of CPA LIMIT/TCPA
LIMIT will appear on the radar display.
5-3
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Automatic Setting Mode (System Start)･････････････････････
See sections 3.4 “Basic Operations” and 4 “Measurement of Range and Bearing” for descriptions
of operation.
Fig. 5-1 Mode Setting at System Start
Mode Initial setting Refer to Section

DISPLAY MODE RM (relative motion) 3.4
ACQUIRE AUTO OFF 5.3
TRIAL OFF 5.7
GUARD ZONE OFF 3.4, 5.6
Setting Range Scale: (RANGE SCALE)･･････････････････････
The ARPA functions can operate on all range scales. Usually, set the range between 1.5 to 24 NM
depENTing on the area of operation.
Attention: The ARPA acquisition range is 0.1 to 32 NM.

５
5-4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Setting Own Ship’s Speed･････････････････････････････････
[Ⅰ] When the LOG is not in operation (Manual Setting)
SUB1 MENU
If the LOG is not in operation, set the estimated ship’s speed manually. SETTING1
1.SET GYRO
0.0-359.9° 0.0
Procedures 1 Press the MENU or OPTION2 key on 2.SELECT SPEED
1. MANUAL
the screen.
1. MANUAL
SET MANUAL SPEED
The Main Menu will appear. 3.
2. 1AXIS
4. SELECT
3. 2AXISNAV
W
4. 2AXIS G
2 Click SUB1 MENU , then SETTING1 . 5. SET/DRIFT
5. GPS
The SETTING1 Menu will appear. 6. TIME/DAY
7.PRF
2.HIGH
3 Left-click the “2.SELECT SPEED” edit 8.RANGE SELECT
box. 96nm 120nm
The “2.SELECT SPEED” edit box will be 9. SETTING2
５ selected.
0. EXIT
4 Click MANUAL .
1.MNUAL will be set.
SUB1 MENU
5 Click SET MANUAL SPEED . SETTING1
“3.SET MANUAL SPEED”will be set. 1.SET GYRO
0.0-359.9° 0.0
2.SELECT SPEED
opened. 2. 1AXIS
3. SET MANUAL SPEED
6 Set the number by pressing the “+” or 4. SELECT NAV
5. SET/DRIFT
“−” keys in the dialogue box.
6. TIME/DAY
7.PRF
2.HIGH
7 Press ENT to set up the value entry. 8.RANGE SELECT
96nm 120nm
Own ship's speed will be set.
9. SETTING2
0. EXIT
5-5
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

2 Click EXIT .
[Ⅱ] When the LOG is operating
When the system is set to the LOG mode, the speed signal will be entered automatically and the ship’s
speed will appear on the radar display.
The speed devices which are displayed on the screen are as follows:
LOG...............1-axis log
2AXW ............2-axis log Speed against water
2AXG.............2-axis log Speed against ground
GPS...............Speed from GPS
5-6
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5.2 DISPLAY MODE SETTING

Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM]･･････････････････････
Press RM(R) / TM button on the upper left of the screen, then select the true motion (TM) display
mode or the relative motion (RM) display mode.
In the initial state, the mode is set to RM.
Note━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
５ For further details on the TM/RM modes, refer to section 3.4 “Select True/Relative Motion
Display Mode.”
Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]･･･････････････････
Set the bearing display mode by pressing N UP/H UP/C UP on the upper left of the screen.
Note━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
For further details on the TM/RM modes, refer to section 3.4 “Select True/Relative Motion
Display Mode.”
5-7
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5.3 TARGET ID No. DISPLAY

The target ID number is a number displayed next to the symbol when a target ship is acquired.
This number is allocated to target ships from 1 to 50 in the order that they are acquired. This number
is used to identify each target ship until the target ship is lot or released.
Attention: Whether the Target ID No. display is turned ON or OFF can be checked only
with a target acquired. For a description of acquisition, refer to 5.4 “Target
Acquisition.”
TGT
Depress DATA
to turn Target ID No. Display ON or OFF.
With this display ON, the target ID NO. is displayed next to the capture symbol.
With this display OFF, all the target ID Nos. are non-displayed.
However, the numbers remain displayed for captured targets of which numeric data
display is specified.
Note━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━ ５
For a description on how to specify the numeric data display, refer to 5.6 “Data Display.”
5-8
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION

Attention
It is important to adjust the controls [SEA] and [GAIN] properly in the automatic
target acquisition mode to minimize the effect of sea clutter.
Target acquisition can be performed in two modes, AUTO and MANUAL, and both
modes can be used at the same time.
Automatic Acquisition [AUTO]･････････････････････････････
Attention
５
If untracked targets enter the guard zone when the maximum number of targets
(50 targets) is already being tracked, targets with lower levels of danger will be
cancelled and replaced.
Procedures 1 Click GZ1 or GZ2 on the screen.
Automatic target acquisition will start. The target acquired will be marked with
“▽” and its target ID No., which will move with the target. Its vector will appear
within one minute.
Attention: When the Target ID No. display is set to OFF, any acquired target ship will not
be given a target ID No.
0°
-45° 45°
0.5NM
3NM
5-9
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
In the ACQ AUTO mode, the targets within a guard zone will be acquired
automatically. The guard zone can be set arbitrarily. If a guard zone is not set,
a guard zone of 3 NM and ±45 degrees in the direction of the own ship will be set.
(Guard Zone 1: Heading direction, Guard Zone 2: Sternward direction)
For the setting method, refer to section 3.4 “Set Guard Zones.”
Guard zone 1 will come on when GZ1 is clicked. When GZ1 is pressed again,
automatic tracking will turn off and the guard zone will be erased from the radar
screen, but other ships that were being tracked shall continue to be tracked.
Guard Zone
Target that has entered the guard zone.

The guard zone intruder symbol is displayed.
Target that has continued to intrude in the guard

zone for one minute.
５
The guard zone intruded symbol, acquired symbol
and vector are displayed.
Target that has moved outside the guard zone.

The capture symbol and vector are displayed.
The guard zone intruder symbol is cleared.
5-10
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Manual Acquisition [ACQ MANUAL]･････････････････････････
Attention
If the maximum number of targets (50) is already acquired, then new targets
cannot be acquired. To do so, cancel any current targets that are not required.
ACQ
Procedures 1 Press MANUAL .
2 Move the cross cursor on to the target to be acquired, then
press the left trackball button .
The acquired target will be marked with “ ” and it’s target ID No. Its vector will
appear within one minute.
Attention: When the Target ID No. display is set to OFF, any captured target ship will not
５ be given a target ID No.
Number of Targets and Acquisition Area
Target to be acquired
HL
To use the manual acquisition mode only without the automatic mode on concurrently,
press [ACQ AUTO] to turn Automatic Acquisition OFF.
5-11
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Manually acquired target.

The initial acquisition symbol is displayed.
Target that has intruded into the zone for one minute.
The acquisition symbol and vector are displayed.
Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes [GZ1、GZ2]

[ACQ MANUAL]･･･････････････････････････････････････････
Method of Operation
Execute manual target acquisition in the automatic acquisition mode, that is, in the state in
which the Automatic Acquisition mode [GZ1, GZ2] is ON.
５
Use of Combined Auto/Manual Mode
When both automatic and manual acquisition modes are used concurrently, important
targets should be acquired manually, and the rest should be acquired automatically. If
new targets enter the zone and they exceed the maximum number of targets that can be
acquired, manual targets will continue to be displayed until they leave the guard zone, but
automatically acquired targets will be cancelled according to their degree of importance.
5-12
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5.5 ARPA DATA DISPLAY

(Refer to the Display Example on page 2-1.)
Display of Vectors･････････････････････････････････････････
Attention
When a targeting or the own ship changes course or when a target is acquired,
the vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until three minutes or more has
passed after such a course change or target acquisition.
Even if three minutes or more have passed, the vector may include an error
depENTing upon the tracking conditions.
A vector representing a target’s predicted position can be presented in the TRUE vector or RELATIVE
vector mode. In each mode, a vector length can be freely changed for a time interval of 1 to 60
５ minutes.
[I] Vector Mode Selection
True Vector Mode

In the true vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of the
target and its vector length is proportional to its speed.
In this mode, the own ship’s vector is displayed as shown below.
In this mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and easily
monitored. However, no CPA RING can be displayed in this mode.
The relative vector is not displayed.

Own ship’s vector
True vector
5-13
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Relative Vector Mode

In order to display the relative vector of a target, press the T/R VECT switch to select
the Relative Vector mode.
The relative vector does not represent the true motion of a target, but its relative relation
with the own ship. This means that a target with its relative vector directed at the own ship
(passing through the CPA LIMIT ring) is a dangerous target.
In the Relative Vector mode, the CPA LIMIT of targets can be seen at a glance.
CPA RING
The true vector is not displayed. ５
Relative vector
Therefore, the TRUE/REL modes can be used in the following way: The TRUE vector can
be used to know the true aspect of a target, and the REL vector can be used to know the
closest point of approach (CPA) of a target.
5-14
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[II] Vector Length: VECTOR TIME
The vector length of a target is proportional to its speed, and the vector time can be
changed from 1 to 60 minutes.
The figure below illustrates a vector length of a target of six minutes. The tip of the vector
represents the target’s expected position in six minutes.
５ Current position Future predicted position

(Six minutes later in this example)
Setting Vector Time

In order to display the relative vector, press the [TRUE/REL] key to select it.
ARPA STAB GND

Procedures 1 Click the numeric section
VECTOR T 6 min
of “VECTOR”.
LIMIT
The numeric input dialogue box is 1.5 nm 10 min
opened.
PAST POSN T 1 min
GUARD ZONE 1 2
2 When changing vector constants, left-click the numbers 0 to 9
or the “+” or “−” keys to change the vectors.
3 Click ENT .
The number input will be applied as the vector time.
5-15
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN]･････････････････････

Press the [PAST POSN] switch to display the past position of targets.
A maximum of six past positions for each target can appear. Every time the [PAST POSN]
switch is pressed, the time interval is changed between 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 minutes. When the
interval is 4 and the switch is pressed again, the past positions on display will be turned
OFF.
The interval is displayed under PAST POSN in the
ARPA information screen. When OFF is
displayed, the past position display is turned off.
The trail mode is interlocked with the vector mode
to allow the past positions of a target to appear in
the True or Relative Vector mode. In the Relative
Vector mode, the target’s relative past positions
are displayed. In the True Vector mode, the
target’s true past positions are displayed after
calculating them from its relative bearing and
range, and the course and speed of the own ship.
Fig. 5-2 shows an example of a screENTisplay,
and Table 5-1 shows the meanings of the symbols on the radar screen.
Guard zone
５
Lost target Target intruding into the guard zone
HL
Trackball
Dangerous target
(Cursor)
Past positions
(Changed course)
Untracked target
NAV line
Safe target
Past Positions
(Straight course)
Fig. 5.2 Example of Display (In North Up and True Vector Mode)
In addition to the marks and symbols shown above, fixed/variable range markers, electronic
bearing lines and other symbols are shown in an actual image.
5-16
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Table 5.1 Definitions of Symbols
Vector/Symbol Definition Remarks

Tracked target
Dangerous target Alarm characters (CPA/TCPA) appear and

(CPA/TCPA) an alarm sounds. The vector and symbol
blink.
Initial acquisition Displayed after a target is acquired and until

mark its vector is displayed.
Target with its data WhENTesignating a target’s data indication

indicated with the trackball, the target’s symbol is
changed into □ and the target’s ID is
indicated. However, in case of a lost target
or a dangerous target, its corresponding
symbol is displayed instead of □.
５
Lost target Alarm characters (LOST) appear and an
(This symbol appears alarm sounds. No vector is displayed, but
when a target cannot the symbol blinks.
be tracked for any
reason.)
Target that has entered Alarm characters (GZ) appear and an alarm
the guard zone sounds.
The symbol blinks.
Trackball cross cursor This cursor is used to select a target when
acquiring manually, canceling targets and
for setting numerical data.
Post positions of The symbols and vectors are only displayed
targets when [PAST POSN] is ON.
The position interval can be set to 0.5, 1, 2 or
4 minutes.
5-17
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5.6 DATA DISPLAY

Attention
When a target or the own ship changes course or when a target is acquired, the
vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until three minutes or more has
passed after such a course change or target acquisition.
Even if three minutes or more have passed, the vector may include an error
depENTing upon the tracking conditions.
Types of Data Display･･････････････････････････････････････
Target Data
Target identification (ID) ID number of the target

True bearing: T BRG
Range: RNG
0.1 degree units
0.01 NM units
５
True course: T CSE 0.1 degree units
True speed: T SPD 0.1 knot units
Closest point of approach (CPA) 0.1 NM units
Time to CPA (TCPA) 0.1 minute units
Bow crossing range (BCR) 0.1 NM units
Bow crossing time (BCT) 0.1 minute units
Targets that have their numeric data displayed are indicated with the symbol “□” to
distinguish them from other targets.
Note━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
If a target’s data is displayed, but without the symbol “□”, such a target exists
outside the currently shown radar display.
5-18
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA]･･･････････････
TGT
Procedures 1 Press DATA .
TGT DATA will appear in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right of the radar
screen.
2 Move the cross cursor to a target (being tracked) to indicate its

data using the trackball. Next, press the left trackball button
to select it. (Up to two targets can be selected.)
The data of the designated target will be displayed, and the symbol will change to
“□”. The target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost and
its vector disappears, or until another target is designated.
If a target with the “ ” symbol is designated, only its true bearing (BRG) and
range (RNG) will appear until its vector appears.
Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA]･･･････････

TGT
Procedures 1 Press DATA .
TGT DATA will appear in the CURSOR ( )at the upper right of the radar
screen.
2 Move the cross cursor to a target (being target) to indicate its

data using the trackball. Next, press the right trackball button
to select it.
The data of the designated target will be deleted, and the symbol will, change to
acquisition mark.
5-19
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5.7 ALARM DISPLAY

The ARPA system provides the following alarms:
Dangerous target alarm: CPA/TCPA
Guard zone intrusion alarm: GZ
Lost target alarm: LOST
System function alarm: ARPA (DATA)
Gyro set alarm: SET GYRO
Dangerous Target Alarm: (CPA/TCPA)･･･････････････････････
CAUTION
If either the CPA LIMIT or TCPA LIMIT is set to zero, then the
５
dangerous target alarm will not operate.
Since these alarms may include some errors depENTing on the
target tracking conditions, the navigation officer himself should
make the final decision for ship operations such as collision
avoidance.
In the ARPA system, targets are categorized into two types: tracked targets and
dangerous targets. The degree of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a
glance, so that an officer can easily decide to which target he should pay attention.
The types of targets and alarms are shown below.
Dangerous Target Alarm
Symbol on Alarm
Status Alarm sound Conditions
CRT characters
• CPA>CPA LIMIT
Tracking
○ (OFF) (OFF) • 0>TCPA
target
• TCPA>TCPA LIMIT
Beeping
Dangerous CPA/ • CPA≤CPA LIMIT
△ (pee-poh)
target TCPA 0≤TCPA≤TCPA LIMIT
Acknowledgeable
CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT: The setting values
5-20
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONE]･･････････････････････････
CAUTION
In setting a guard zone, it is necessary to adjust radar tuning,

gain, sea clutter suppression and rain/snow clutter suppression
to ensure that target echoes are displayed in the optimum
conditions. The guard zone alarm is not generated for the
targets that are not detected by radar.
The guard zone function is used to set a zone at an arbitrary range and to sound an alarm if
a target intrudes into this zone.
５ Refer to section 3.4 “Set Guard Zones” on how to set guard zones.
Guard zone
Guard Zone Alarm
Symbol on Alarm
CRT characters
Target Beeping (pipipi) An alarm sound is
entering the Acknowledgeable generated when a target
guard zone ▽ GZ enters the 0.5 NM range
between the outer and inner
rings.
5-21
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET]･･････････････････････････
Attention
If the radar tuning, gain, sea clutter suppression and rain/snow clutter suppression
are not appropriate, the lost target alarm may be generated frequently, so that
adjustments should be made carefully.
When it is impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, the LOST target
alarm will be generated. The typical causes for this alarm are shown below, but they are
not limited to these:
• The target echo is very weak;
• The target has entered the shadow of land or a large ship and its echo is not being
received;
• The target echo is hidden by sea clutter.
Lost target
Lost Target Alarm
Symbol on Alarm
CRT characters
Lost target LOST Beep sound (pee) The alarm will sound once
Acknowledgeable when a lost target symbol is
displayed.
5-22
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
System Function Alarm [ARPA (DATA)]･･････････････････････
When an abnormal state of an input signal or a problem in the processing circuitry occurs, a
character string or alarm is generated. When an alarm occurs for any ARPA function,
ARPA (DATA) will appear in the WARNING display area, but no indication is made in the
ARPA information display. The cause of the alarm may be an operational error in ARPA,
so please contact the service depot or manufacturer.
Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYRO]････････････････････････････････
The North Stabilizing Kit (NSK) in this system receives signals from a gyro. Even if the
power is turned off, the system will track gyro motions. However, the system stops
tracking the gyro if the power of the master gyro is turned off or if there are any problems
with the line. When the power of the master gyro is turned back on, the SET GYRO alarm
will be generated.
If this alarm is sounded, set the gyro.
５ Gyro Set Alarm
Alarm
Alarm sound Conditions
characters
The signals from the gyro are stopped, but the gyro is
SET GYRO Beep sound (pipi)
recovered.
5-23
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING

Attention
In trial maneuvering, a simulation is executed with the current course and speed
of the target ship. Since the situation is different from actual ship maneuvers, the
CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT should be set with ample leeway.
Trial maneuvering is used to simulate the course and speed necessary to avoid a collision
when a dangerous target appears. When the ship’s course and speed are manually
entered against the data of the acquired target, a check is made to determine whether there
is any danger.
The ranges of course and speed to be entered manually are as follows:
Course: 360 degrees (0.1 degree intervals) .................. [EBL] control
Speed: 0 to 100 knots (0.1 knot steps)......................... [VRM] control
Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode･･････････････････５

In the True Vector mode, calculations are made according to the values set by TRIAL
SPEED and TRIAL COURSE, and the result is displayed as a bold-line that represents the
change of the own ship’s vector as shown in the figure below (an example of the course
changed to starboard).
In this figure, the dangerous target that is ahead to the port side becomes safe as a result of
the simulation.
The target data display field indicates the current CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT values
regardless of the result of the simulation.
NORMAL TRIAL
Change of symbol as a
Dangerous target result of trial maneuver
HL HL
Change in course
Own ship Own ship

Trial speed (vector time)
T
5-24
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode･･･････････････
The result of trial maneuvering in the Relative Vector mode is shown by a change in target
vector. In the figure below (with the same conditions as in the True Vector mode on the
previous page), it is seen that the acquired target is a dangerous one because its vector is
crossing the CPA RING.
NORMAL TRIAL
Change of symbol as a
result of trial maneuver
Dangerous target
HL HL
Change in course
５ Own ship CPA RING

Own ship
T
CPA RING
The above figure shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as shown in the
figure as a result of simulation (course and speed), so that the target’s symbol is changed to
“○”; i.e., a safe target. As was the case in the True Vector mode, the data display field
indicates the current values of CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT, not those as the result of the
simulation.
The course change of own ship is displayed as a dotted line.
5-25
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Using the TRIAL Function･･････････････････････････････････
Procedures 1 Press the MENU or OPTION2 key on the screen.

The ARPA menu will be opened.
2 Click SUB1 MENU , then ARPA/AIS and TRIAL .

The ARPA TRIAL menu will be opened.
3 Left-click “ON” under “1.TRIAL”.

“1.TRIAL” will be turned “ON” and the character “T” will blink below the own ship
display in the radar screen, indicating that the system is conducting a trial.
4 Make the settings with the course [EBL] control and speed
[VRM] control.
5 The plot data symbols are “△” for dangerous targets and “○”
for safe targets.
Cancellation 1 Select OFF under TRIAL in the ARPA TRIAL menu. ５

“OFF” will be set for “TRIAL” and the system will return to the normal display.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

The ARPA TRIAL menu will be closed.
2 Click EXIT .
The ARPA menu will be closed.
5-26
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS

When it is no longer necessary to continue tracking acquired and tracked targets with their
symbols and vectors displayed, or when it necessary to reduce the number of vectors to
make the screen easier to observe, unnecessary targets can be cancelled one by one.
When all targets are reacquired from the beginning, all the targets on display can be
cancelled at once.
Deleting Targets･･････････････････････････････････････････
Deleting one target

ACQ
Procedures 1 Press CANCEL .
The ARPA menu is opened.
2 Place the cross cursor over the target to be deleted.

５ 3 Press the left trackball button.
The symbol and vector of the target will be deleted, and only the target echo will
remain.
Or,
ACQ
Procedures 1 Press MANUAL .
The ARPA menu is opened.
2 Place the cross cursor over the target to be deleted.
5-27
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3 Press the left trackball button.

The symbol and vector of the target will be deleted, and only the target echo will
remain.
Target to be deleted.
Attention
When all targets are deleted, the system stops tracking all the targets and they
５
must be acquired again, either automatically or manually. Therefore, do not use
this method except when it is necessary to delete all targets.
Deleting all targets
Procedures 1 Press ACQ

CANCEL
continuously for 2 seconds or more.
All the symbols and vectors of all targets will be deleted.
5-28
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5.10 ARPA SETTING
CAUTION
This simulation is a function to check whether the ARPA system is

operating normally. Do not use this function except to check
ARPA operation.
Especially, avoid using this mode during actual navigation
because it will display pseudo targets on the radar screen which
may be confused with actual targets. Using this function during
actual navigation can lead to accidents.
５ The following constants used for ARPA can be referred to and modified:
[I] SIMULATOR: Pseudo targets are generated on the radar display to check
whether the ARPA functions are operating normally.
[II] VD LEVEL: Quantizing level for the video to be input to the target
detection circuit.
[III] VECTOR CONSTANT: Constant to calculate the ARPA vectors.
[IV] GATE: Gate size to acquire and track targets.
[V] TEST VIDEO: Test video for use in checking the operation of the target
detection circuit.
5-29
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Simulation･･････････････････････････････････････････
CAUTION
Do not change the VD LEVEL and VECTOR CONSTANT,

because they are already set to the optimum values. Making
any changes to these may cause deterioration in the ARPA
performance.
Pseudo targets are generated in certain known positions to check whether the ARPA
processing circuits are operating normally. Since the pseudo targets move according to
known parameters, the values for these pseudo targets can be compared with the known
values by acquiring, tracking and displaying them, and thereby checking whether the ARPA
system is operating normally.
This function should be used only in the standby
mode.
TEST M ENU
５
ARPA TEST
1. SIM ULATOR
TX
Procedures 1 Press STBY to set 1. OFF
1. OFF
2. TEST VIDEO
the standby mode. 2. SCENA RIO1
3. SCENA RIO2
3. STA US
2 Click TEST on the screen.
Or press OPTION1 key.
3 Click ARPA TEST .

The ARPA TEST menu will appear.
4 Click the “1.SIMULATOR” edit

box.
SIMULATOR is selected, and the pull down
menu is displayed. 0. EXIT
5-30
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 When moving the pseudo target:
[Ⅰ] SCENARIO1
TX
Click SCENARIO1 , then STBY to set the transmission mode.
2.SCENARIO1 will be set to generate a pseudo target at the true bearing

of 18°and the relative range of 3.2NM. The target will then approach true
bearing of 90°and the relative range of 1NM at a relative speed of
20kts .Characters“XX”appear blinking at the lower of the radar display,
showing that the system is executing the simulation mode.
[Ⅱ] SCENARIO2
TX
Click SCENARIO2 , then STBY to set the transmission mode.
3.SCENARIO2 will be set to generate a pseudo target at the true bearing of

0°and the relative range of 6NM. The target will then approach own ship at
a relative speed of 10 kts in a relative course of 180°.
Characters“XX”appear blinking at the lower of the radar display, showing
５
that the system is executing the simulation mode.
Note: When the range between own ship and the pseudo target is 0,
the target will disappear.
TX
6 When finishing the simulation, press STBY to set the standby
mode, then click OFF .
1.OFF will be set.
Exit 1 Click EXIT or TEST .

Pseudo Target Parameters
SCENARIO Start point End point Target

NUMBER Distance Direction Distance Direction speed
1 3.2NM 18° 1NM 90° 20kts
2 6NM 0° 0NM 0° 10kts
3 6NM 18° 1NM 18° 10kts
4 6NM 45° 1NM 45° 105kts
5 6NM 45° 6NM 150° 20kts
6 6NM 45° 6NM 150° 20kts
5-31
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Gate Size･････････････････････････････････････････････････
CAUTION
Do not change the preset gate size carelessly. If the gate value is
improper, the ARPA acquisition and tracking functions may
deteriorate.
Otherwise, this may cause accidents to occur.
The Gate Size is defined as an“Area Within which targets are watched by the ARPA”processing
circuit.
If the gate size is too large, targets are not lost but may be swapped with other close targets.
If the gate size is too small, targets are not easily swapped, but may be lost.
The ARPA processing circuit is designed to detect target sizes and set an accurate gate size
depENTing on the ranges and sizes of those targets (NARROW is the standard size). However,
５
change the setting parameters to select the best size in the following conditions:
Set 2.NARROW in normal operation.
・When acquiring and tracking targets that spread widely in the angular direction
(The angular direction of the gate aperture is important)･･････････････････････1.WIDE
・When many targets are densely congested and swapped within 3NM in a port
(The gate size should be reduced)･･････････････････････････････････････････3.SMALL
5-32
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Procedures 1 Press the MENU or OPTION2 key on the screen.

SUB1 M ENU
A RPA
2 Click SUB1 MENU , then
1. CPA LIMIT
ARPA/AIS. 1. 5
0. 1-9. 9n m
The ARPA Menu will appear. 2. TCPA LIMIT
1-99m in 10
3 Click the “5.GATE” edit box. 3. CPA RING

OFF ON
The “2.SELECT SPEED” edit box
4. TRIAL
will be selected.
5. GATE
2. NA RROW
4 Press any of 1 to 3. 1. W IND
2. NA RROW
Enter the number of gate type to
3. SM ALL
change.
５ Exit 1 Click EXIT . 0. EXIT
2 Click EXIT .
5-33
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Test Video････････････････････････････････････････････････
Attention
TEST VIDEO may not appear for targets that are not acquired or tracked, or if the
controls [GAIN] and [SEA] are not adjusted appropriately.
Test Video is used to check whether the video signals under target acquisition and tracking
are inputted to and processed in the target processing circuit normally.
However, it is sufficient to check that 3.VDH in TEST VIDEO is displayed.
The start of the Test video mode is available only in the Standby mode.
TX TEST M ENU
Procedures 1 Press STBY to set ARPA TEST
1. SIMULATOR
the standby mode. 1. OFF
2. TEST VIDEO
2 Click TEST on the screen. 3. VDIN

1. OFF
3. 2. VDG
3. VDH
4. VDL
５
5. VDIN
3 Click ARPA TEST .
The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.
4 Click the “2.TEST VIDEO” edit box.

“2.TEST VIDEO” is selected and the pull down
menu is displayed.
0. EXIT
5 Click “3.VDH” to select it.
3.VDH will be set.
Test video for 3.VDH (video input in quantizing HIGH level) will appear on the
radar display.
TX
6 Press STBY to set
the transmission state.
7 In order to change the test video type, press TX

STBY to enter
the standby mode, then select the test video type from the pull
down menu.
Attention: If OFF is set, test video will not be displayed.
5-34
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Exit 1 Click EXIT or TEST.

Execute TEST VIDEO in 3.VDH normally.
Attention: If any target displayed clearly in the radar display is not displayed in the
Test Video mode, the target detection circuit og te ARPA system may
have a trouble.
5-35
SECTION 6
TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES
ON DISPLAY
Radar Wave with the Horizon .......................................... 6-1

Strength of Reflection from the Targets ......................... 6-3
Sea Clutters....................................................................... 6-3
False Echoes..................................................................... 6-3
Display of Radar Transponder (SART) ........................... 6-6
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best aid in
maneuvering the ship. For this purpose, the operator has to observe the radar displays after fully
understanding the advantages and disadvantages that the radar has. For better interpretation of
radar displays, it is important to gain more experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair
weathers and comparing the target ships watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the
radar display.
The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in open seas, to
check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to measure own ship’s position in the
coastal waters relative to the bearings and ranges of the shore or islands using a chart, and to
monitor the position and movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display.
Various types of radar display will be explained below.
Radar Wave with the Horizon･･････････････････････････････
Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved surface of the earth.
The propagation varies with the property of the air layer through which the radar beam
propagates.
In the normal propagation, the distance (D) of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10%
longer than the distance to the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the following
formula:
６ D = 2.23( h1 + h 2 )(nm)
h1: Height (m) of radar scanner above sea level

h2: Height (m) of a target above sea level
Fig. 6.1 is a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that is limited by the
curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation.
Earth
h1 h2
Radar Targets
6-1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
D (nm)
Height of Scanner Detective Range Height of Target
６
Fig. 6.1
When the height of own ship’s scanner is 10 m for instance,

(a) A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 nm on the radar display is required to
have a height of 660 m or more.
(b) If the height of a target is 10 m, the radar range has to be approx. 15 nm. However, the
maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the radar display depends upon
the size of the target and the weather conditions, that is, the radar range may increase or
decrease depending upon those conditions.
6-2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Strength of Reflection from the Targets･････････････････････
The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size of the target
but also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher and larger target is not
always higher in general.
In particular, the echo from a coast line is affected by the geographic conditions of the coast.
If the coast has a very gentle slope, the echo from a mountain on the inland appears on the radar
display.
Therefore, the distance to the coast line should be measured carefully.
Mountain displayed on the radar display

HL
Sea shore line not displayed on the radar display
Fig. 6.2
６ Sea Clutters･･････････････････････････････････････････････
When the sea surface ruffles, bright echo returns spread around the center of the radar display.
The higher the waves are, the echo returns are larger.
Swirling currents may appears as a smooth line like a coastal line.
False Echoes･････････････････････････････････････････････
The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist actually. These
false echoes appear by the following caused that are well known:
[I] Shadow
When the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that exists in the
direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display because the radar beam is
reflected on the funnel or mast. Whether there are some false echoes due to shadows can be
checked by monitoring the sea clutter returns, in which there may be a part of weak or no returns.
Such shadows appear always in the same directions, which the operator should have in mind in
radar operation.
6-3
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[II] Side Lobe Effect

A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the radar beam on
the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be discriminated when a target echo
appears independent. (See Fig. 6.3)
Fig. 6.3
[III] False Echo by Secondary Reflection

When a target exists near own ship, two echoes from the single target may appear on the radar
display. One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the
secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands in the same direction as shown in Fig.
6.4.
Direct micro wave

HL Actual target
Radar scanner
False echo from

Secondary reflection funnel
Funnel of micro wave
６
Fig. 6.4
[IV] False Echo by Multiple Reflection

When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own ship as shown in Fig.
6.5, multiple reflection returns may appear on the radar display. These echoes appear in the
same intervals, of which the nearest echo is the true echo of the target.
HL
Fig. 6.5
6-4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[V] Abnormal Propagation

The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the scanner and the height of a
target as described in the section of “The Horizon for Radar Beam Radiation”. If a so-called
“duct” occurs on the sea surface due to a certain weather condition, however, the radar beam may
propagate to an abnormally long distance, at which a target may be detected by the radar.
For instance, assuming that the radar range is 6 NM (on the repetition frequency of 1100 Hz), the
first pulse is reflected from a target at about 76 NM or more and received during the next pulse
repetition time. In this case, a false echo appears at a position that is about 76 NM shorter than
the actual distance. If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true distance of
the target is 5 + 76 = 81 NM. On the radar range scale of 1.5 NM (on the repetition frequency of
1900 Hz), a false echo may appear at a position that is about 43 NM shorter than the actual
distance.
This type of false echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale (the repetition
frequency), because the distance of the target changes accordingly.
[VI] Radar Interface

When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship is near own
ship, a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display. This interference pattern
consists of a number of spots which appear in various forms. These spots do not always appear
at the same places, so that they can be discriminated from the target echoes. (See Fig. 6.6)
Fig. 6.6
6-5
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Display of Radar Transponder (SART)･･････････････････････
The SART (Search and rescue Radar Transponder) is a survival device authorized by the GMDSS
(Global Maritime Distress and Safety System), which is used for locating survivors in case that a
distress accident occurs at sea. The SART is designed to operate in the 9 GHz frequency band.
When receiving the 9 GHz radar signal (interrogating signal) transmitted from the radar equipment
on a rescue ship or search aircraft, the SART transmit a series of response signals to inform the
distress position to the rescue and search party.
The SART position can be displayed on the radar video by setting the radar as follows:
Radar range scale: 6 NM or 12 NM
Sea clutter control: Minimum (Most counterclockwise)
AUTO SEA function: OFF
TUNE control: No tuning (to weaken clutter echoes)
Interference rejector (IR): OFF
PROCESS: OFF
SART code
Position of SART
Position of the rescue craft
Land
Other ships
６
[Example of Display]
Attention
When the radar is set as in ① to ⑥ above to detect the SART signal, the targets
around own ship will disappear from the radar display. So it is necessary to
exercise full surveillance over the conditions around own ship by visual watch in
order to avoid any collision or stranding.
If two or more sets of radar equipment are installed on own ship, use one set of 9
GHz band radar for detection of the SART signal and operate others as normal
radars for monitoring targets around own ship, checking on own ship’s position
and avoidance of stranding.
After end of detecting the SART signal, it is necessary to readjust the radar for
normal navigation.
6-6
SECTION 7
MAINTENANCE
7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE .................................... 7-1

7.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT .......................... 7-2
Scanner NKE-1079/1075A/1089/1087 .............................. 7-2
Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037/3037A/3028........... 7-4
Display Unit NCD-4263 ..................................................... 7-5
Coaxial Cable (JMA-9933-SA).......................................... 7-5
Wave Guide (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA)................................... 7-6
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the
equipment by a user.
Inspection or repair work by unauthorized person may cause a
fire or an electric shock.
Ask your nearest branch, business office or a dealer for
inspection and repair.
Turn off the main power source before starting maintenance.

Otherwise, an electric shock may result.
For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make the
maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly, troubles will
reduce. It is recommended to make regular maintenance work as often as possible.
Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follows:
７ Clean the equipment
Remove the dust, dirt and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of dry
cloth.
Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation.
7-1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
7.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT

Scanner NKE-1079/1075/1089/1087･････････････････････････
WARNING
Turn off the main power source before starting maintenance.

Otherwise, an electric shock or injury may result.
Set the Safety Switch for Stopping the Scanner to cents [OFF].
Otherwise, an accidental contact with the rotating scanner may
result in injury.
After finishing the maintenance work, set the safety switch for stopping the scanner to
“ON”.
Precautions on Mounting the Cover
７
When the cover is removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and refitted
after such work, the procedures of fastening bolts shall be taken with the following
precautions:
(a) The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N•cm (120 to 150
kgf•cm) (which makes the inside water-tight and protects the packings against
permanent compressive strain).
The packings start producing from the cover at the torque of approximately 1470
N•cm (150 kgf•cm) or more.
Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the specified value. Otherwise, the
screws may be broken.
(b) Use an offset wrench of 11 mm × 13 mm or a double-ended wrench of 13 mm × 17
mm (not longer than 200 mm).
(c) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten them evenly in
order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the bolts with 25% of the required
torque at the first step.)
*: Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order.
7-2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Bolt (stainless steel)4-M8 Bolt (stainless steel)8-M8

Proper Tightening Torque : 120 to 150 kgf/cm
Proer Tightening Torque : 120 to 150kgf/cm
1
5 7
1 3
3 4
4 2
8 2 6
Cover of NKE-1089 Cover of NKE-1079

Bolt Tightening Procedure Bolt Tightening Procedure
(1) Radiator
Attention
If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled with smoke, salt, dust, paint or
birds’ droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth wetted with alcohol or water and
try to keep it clean at all times. Otherwise, radar beam radiation may attenuate
or reflect on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance.
Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine, trichlorethylene and ketone for cleaning.
Otherwise, the radiation plane may deteriorate.
７ Check up and clean the radiator.
7-3
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(2) Scanner Mechanism
(a) Supply Oil Seal

When there is not a grease nipple, the replenishment of grease oil is
unnecessary.
Remove the cap of the grease nipple on the front of the S band radiator support
and supply it with a grease gun. Make the oiling every six months. The oil
quantity shall be approximately 100 g that is as much as the grease comes out
of the oil seal. Use the grease of Mobilux 2 or EP2 of Mobil Oil.
(b) Oiling gears

Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the
encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Greasing in short intervals is
more effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service
life, but grease those at least every six months. Use Mobilux2 or EP2 of
Mobile Oil.
(c) Mounting legs

Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the scanner unit case on
corrosion sometimes and keep them in order not to cause any danger. Apply
paint to them once a half year because painting is the best measure against
corrosion.
Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037/3028･････････････
Wipe dust on the transmitter and receiver sections with a piece of dry cloth or
feather.
7-4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Display Unit NCD-4263････････････････････････････････････
WARNING
Do not wipe the radar display surface strongly with a piece of dry
cloth or do not use gasoline or thinner for cleaning. Otherwise,
the display surface may be damaged.
Dust accumulated on the radar display will reduce clarity and darken the video. For
cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton). Do not wipe it strongly
with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner.
Coaxial Cable (JMA-9933-SA)･･････････････････････････････
(1) The coaxial pipe gland of the coaxial cable will be provided with perfect water-tight
treatment at the time of installation. Check it and ensure that not water leak occurs
from the connection parts. In particular it is recommended to apply paint to the
coaxial pipe gland every six months.
WARNING
７
Do not give strong impact to the coaxial cable by hitting it with
any tool or hammer.
Otherwise, it may be broken.
Do not put any heavy article on the coaxial cable. Otherwise, it

may be broken.
Do not twist or pull the coaxial cable. Otherwise, it may be

broken.
(2) For further details, refer to the Coaxial Cable Connection Procedures for the S band
Radar.
7-5
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Wave Guide (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA)･･････････････････････････
Attention
Connect the wave guide properly with no gaps. Otherwise, such gaps may
cause water leaks or corrosion later.
7-6
SECTION 8
COUNTERMEASURES FOR
TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT
8.1 FUNCTION CHECK ......................................................8-1 Vector Constant...............................................................8-38

Function Check on Test Menu .........................................8-2 Quantization Level ..........................................................8-39
List of Alarms and other Indications .............................8-14 Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log ...8-40
8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................8-17 Main Bang Suppression Adjustment ............................8-42
8.3 COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE ......................8-18 8.6 SETTING .....................................................................8-44
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS.........................8-24 True Bearing Setting.......................................................8-44
Replacement of PARTS Periodically…………………..8-26 Ship Speed Setting .........................................................8-45
Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor..................8-32 Navigation Equipment Setting.......................................8-47
8.5 ADJUSTMENTS..........................................................8-33 Current Correction (SET/DRIFT) Setting.......................8-48
Tuning Adjustment..........................................................8-34 Time/Day Display Setting ...............................................8-50
Bearing Adjustment ........................................................8-35 Adjustment of Performance Monitor (NJU-63/64)........8-52
Range Adjustment ..........................................................8-36 Adjustment of Inter switch ...........................................8-54
Antenna Height Adjustment ...........................................8-37
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8.1 FUNCTION CHECK

Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is found, investigate it
immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage sections in checking and take full care that no
trouble is caused by any error or carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of checking,
which can be used effectively in the next check work.
Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8.1 Function Check List in the order as
specified in it.
Table 8.1 Function Check List
Equipment Check Item Criteria Remarks

Transmitter- Tuning LED of Receiver The LED is lighting during 48 NM range
receiver Unit operation
Video and echoes on the Can be correctly controlled
screen
Sensitivity
CRT brilliance can be
controlled correctly
Various markers
Various numerical
indications
Lighting
Safety switch and various (1) Refer to Check of Safety
currents and voltages Switch, Various Currents
and Voltages, and Signals.
Display Unit
Communication lines (2) Refer to Check of
Peripheral Units.
Panel (3) Refer to Check of Panel.
ARPA (4) Refer to Check of ARPA.
Magnetron current (5) Refer to Check of
Magnetron Current.
Performance Monitor (6) Refer to Check of
Performance Monitor.
８ Error Logging Display
System Information Display

(7)
(8)
Refer to Check of Error
Logging Display.
Refer to System
Information Display.
8-1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Function Check on Test Menu･･････････････････････････････

The function status of this radar equipment can be checked on the TEST Menu.
Procedures
1 Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.
2 Left-click at any test item.
A click of the left mouse button at any test item displays detailed information on
the selected test item.
TEST MENU (1) Check of Memory, Safety Switch, Various

Currents and Voltages, and
1. SELF CHECK Communication Lines
2. PANEL TEST (2) Check of Panel
3. ARPATEST (3) Check of ARPA
4.MAG　CURRENT (4) Check of Magnetron Current
OFF ON
5.PM (5) Check with Performance Monitor
OFF ON
6. ERROR LOGGING (6) Error Logging Display
7. SYSTEM INFO (7) System Information Display
０． EXIT
８
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .
8-2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1 SELF CHECK
1-1 SENSOR
Procedures 1 Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.

2 Click SELF CHECK .

The SELF CHECK Menu will appear.
3 Click SENSOR .
The SENSOR Menu will appear.
4 Check OK on each item.

If any item is no good, NG will be selected.
In the standby mode, ** will be selected for VIDEO.
If the safety switch on the scanner is OFF, OFF will be selected.
TEST MENU
SELF CHECK
SENSOR
* SAFETY SWITCH Scanner Rotation Signal
OK
* AZI PULSE OK Safety Switch on the Scanner
* HL PULSE OK Ship's Heading Line Signal
* MH CURRENT
Load Current of High Voltage in Modulator
OK
Radar Trigger Signal
* TRIGGER OK
* VIDEO OK Radar Video
* FAN1 OK Fan 1
* FAN2 OK Fan 2
８０． EXIT
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The SELF CHECK Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
The TEST Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
8-3
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-2 LINE CHECK

2 Click SELF CHECK .

The SELF CHECK Menu will appear.
3 Click LINE CHECK .

The LINE CHECK Menu will appear.
4 Check whether each communication line is connected.

・When the device is connected: CONNECT
・When the device is not connected: DISCONNECT
・When the not recognition: ＊＊＊＊＊
TEST MENU
SELF CHECK
LINE CHECK
* MTR CONNECT Transmitter-receiver Unit
* SIG.PROC. Signal Processing Circuit
CONNECT
* ARPA CONNECT ARPA Processing Circuit
* SERI I/F CONNECT Serial Interface Circuit
* NSK CONNECT NSK Unit
* ISW CONNECT
Interswitch (Option)
* NAV1 CONNECT
Navigation Equipment 1
* NAV2 CONNECT Navigation Equipment 2
* 2AXIS CONNECT 2-axis Log
８
０． EXIT
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The SELF CHECK Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
The TEST Menu will reappear.
3 Click EXIT .
8-4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-3 MONITOR CHECK

Keep off condition.
This function is useful for monitor adjustment with service man.
NOTE: Keep off condition.

If the test pattern of the monitor is displayed, it can be returned to the
previous screen with "OPTION2" or by left-clicking the mouse.
2 PANEL TEST
2-1 KEY
Refer to (2) Checking panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.
Procedures 1 Click the TEST on the screen.

The TEST menu will appear. TEST MENU
PANEL TEST
2 Click PANEL TEST . 1. KEY
The PANEL TEST Menu will appear. 2. BUZZER
3. LAMP
3 Click KEY .
“1.KEY” is set and the control panel
diagram will appear on the display.
When a key on the control panel of the
actual equipment is pressed, the portion
corresponding to the pressed key in the
panel diagram will turn the color.
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be finished. ０． EXIT
2 Click EXIT .
８ The TEST Menu will be closed.
8-5
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2-2 BUZZER
Refer to (2) Checking Panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.
TEST MENU
PANEL TEST
1. KEY
The TEST menu will appear.
2. BUZZER
3. LAMP
2 Click PANEL TEST .
The PANEL TEST Menu will appear.
3 Click BUZZER .
The BUZZER Menu will appear. A beep of
the buzzer indicates that the operation is
normal..
Exit 1 Click EXIT .

０． EXIT
2-3 LAMP
Refer to (2) Checking Panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.

TEST MENU
The TEST menu will appear. PANEL TEST

1. KEY
2 Click PANEL TEST . 2. BUZZER
The PANEL TEST Menu will appear. 3. LAMP
3 Click LAMP .
The LAMP Menu will appear. The key
８
backlight is turned on, the operation is
normal.
Exit 1 Click TEST .
The TEST Menu will be closed. ０． EXIT
Note: When performing a LAMP test, the operation cannot be checked if the
8-6
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
brilliance level of the key backlight is at maximum. (The brilliance will not
change)
3 ARPA TEST
3-1 SIMULATOR
Refer to (3) Checking ARPA in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.
TX
Procedures 1 Press STBY
to set the standby
TEST MENU
mode.
ARPA TEST
1.SIMULATOR
2 Click the TEST on the screen. 1.OFF
The TEST menu will appear. 2.TEST VIDEO
1.OFF
3 Click RPA TEST. 1.OFF
3. STATUS
2.VDG
The ARPA TEST Menu will appear. 3.VDH
4.VDL
4 Click SIMULATOR . 5.VDIN
“1.SIMULATOR”will be selected and the

5 Select any setting item of ARPA

Simulator in the pull-down menu
and press any of 1 to 7. EXIT
０．
TX
6 Press STBY to set the transmission mode.
Exit 1 Click TESE .
Note: In normal operation, it is necessary to turn off the "SIMULATOR".
8-7
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3-2 TEST VIDEO

Refer to (3) Checking ARPA in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.
TX
Procedures 1 Press STBY to set the standby
mode . TEST MENU
ARPA TEST
2 Click the TEST on the screen. 1.SIMULATOR
The TEST menu will appear. 1.OFF
2.TEST VIDEO
3 Click ARPA TEST . 1.OFF
1.OFF
The ARPA TEST Menu will appear. 3. STATUS
2.VDG
3.VDH
4 Click TEST VIDEO . 4.VDL
5.VDIN
2.TEST VIDEO will be selected and the
5 Select any setting item in the

pull-down menu and press any of 0
to 7 numbers.
０． EXIT
TX
6 Press STBY to set the transmission mode.
Exit 1 Click TEST .
8-8
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3-3 STATUS

2 Click ARPA TEST .

The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.
3 Click STATUS .
The STATUS Menu will appear to indicate the ARPA setting values and
conditions.
Vector Constant
TEST MENU
(Refer to Vector Constant in Section 8.5
ARPA TEST
ADJUSTMENTS)
STATUS Quantization Level in Automatic Acquisition
* CONSTANT 4
(Refer to Quantization Level in Section
* VID LEVEL TD 45 8.5 ADJUSTMENTS)
* VID LEVEL HI 40 Quantization Level on medium and Short
* VID LEVEL LOW 35 Ranges (Refer to Quantization Level in
Section
* GATE SIZE NARROW
8.5 ADJUSTMENTS)
* TRACKING 0
Quantization Level on Long Range
(Refer to Quantization Level in Section
8.5 ADJUSTMENTS)
Ｇate Size
(Refer to Gate Size in Section 5.10 ARPA
SETTING)
Current Numbers of Targets Under Tracking
０． EXIT
８ EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The ARPA TEST Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
The TEST Menu will be reappear.
3 Click EXIT .
8-9
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
4 MAG CURRENT

2 Select "ON" radio button of MAG CURRENT .

“ON”in“4.MAG CURRENT”will be set. The magnetron current is displayed
at the bar-graph on the TEST Menu.
TEST MENU
1. SELF CHECK
2. PANEL TEST
3. ARPATEST
4.MAG　CURRENT
OFF ON
5.PM
OFF ON
6. ERROR LOGGING
7. SYSTEM INFO
MAG Magnetron current
０． EXIT
Check“5－9.5”in the 24 NM range.
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed. ８
8-10
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 PM (Performance Monitor)
Refer to (5) Checking Performance Monitor in Section 8.1.1 Function Check
on Test Menu.
Procedures 1 Click the TEST on the screen. TEST MENU

The TEST menu will appear.
1. SELF CHECK
2 Select "ON" radio button of PM . 2. PANEL TEST
If the Performance Monitor is installed, 3. ARPATEST

“ON” in “5.PM” will be set and the status 4.MAG　CURRENT of
performance monitor will appear by the OFF ON
5.PM
[PM] bar-graph in the TEST Menu. OFF ON
Press 5 again. “5.PM” will be set to “ＯＮ”
6. ERROR LOGGING
and the [PM] indicator in the menu will
7. SYSTEM INFO
disappear.
PM
Exit 1 Click EXIT or TEST .
The TEST Menu will be closed. If “5.PM” is
set to “ON”, the status will be set to “OFF”
０． EXIT
automatically.
8-11
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
6 ERROR LOGGING
If any system error occurs, the communication line in which the error is caused will be
indicated by the selected characters. The errors that are released will also be
indicated in time sequence.
Procedures
1 Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.
2 Click ERROR LOGGING .

The ERROR LOGGING Menu will appear and the location in which an
error has occurred will appear by selected characters..
TEST MENU
ERROR LOGGING
1. ALL CLEAR
０． EXIT
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The ERROR LOGGING Menu will be closed.
８
2 Press EXIT .
8-12
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
7 SYSTEN INFO
The current system information will be indicated.

2 Click SYSTEM INFO .

The SYSTEM INFORMATION Menu will appear to display the current
system information.
TEST MENU
SYSTEM INFO
* INDICATOR
Ver.01.00
* MTR Ver.02.10
* SYSTEM
Ver.01.00
* TX TIME
1 hours
* TOTAL TIME
2 hours
０． EXIT
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

８ The TEST Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
8-13
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
List of Alarms and other Indications････････････････････････
Table 8.2 List of Gyro Alarms
Message Description
SET GYRO Requires initialization of NSK or setting of initial values for gyro.
TM RESET Own ship’s position has reached at approx. 60% of the radar PPI
radius in the TM mode.
POSN RST Change the latitude and longitude sentence.
Table 8.3 List of ARPA Alarms
Message Description
CPA/TCPA CPA/TCPA of a target (ARPA)
GZ A target approaching own ship exists in a guard zone.
LOST A target under acquisition can not be tracked.
Table 8.4 List of Operational Error Messages and Warnings
Error Message Description

OUT OF RANGE Tried to create a guard zone outside the specified range.
CHANGE RANGE The range is set outside the specified in creating a guard zone.
MAX POINT Tried to enter navigation information beyond the specified.
CAN’T TRANSMIT Tried to transmit within 1 second after standby or when the
transmitter-receiver has any trouble.
MAX MARK Tried to enter more than 20 plot marks.
CAN’T CHANGE Key in with the [+] or [-] at any place where only a numerical value
can be entered.
NO GYRO DATA Any operation requiring Gyro data was made without it.
INVALID DATA Tried to enter any data beyond its range.
NO POSITION DATA Any operation requiring position data was made without it.
CHG REL VECTOR Tried to display a CPA ring in TRUE mode.
MAX TARGET
SELECT STRAIGHT
The maximum number of targets (50 targets) is under acquisition.
The operator set PM to ON without selecting straight. ８
NOT ALLOWED Improper operation
8-14
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Table 8.5 List of Interswitch Alarms and Messages
Error Message Description

MASTER RANGE CHG Tried to change the master range.
ALREADY SELECTED Selected the already selected pattern.
ISW END! The switchover of the Interswitch ended normally.
ISW BUSY! Access to the ISW menu was made during interswitching.
MTR ST-BY! The master MTR is in the standby mode.
ISW STRAIGHT Failed in straight connection when the Interswitch system stops
operating.
ISW STAND-BY! The Interswitch recovered normally.
ISW TIME OUT Communication error occurred between interswitch and display.
ISW ERROR! The interswitch is disabled.
Note:━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
An error message and a warning are displayed at lower right (shown below) in radar
display mode.
PANEL DISPLAY INFO

FUNC3 NAV TOKYO
EBL1 T 037.0 °C PIN
EBL2 T 135.0 °O MENU PI GZ TEST
VRM1 1.70 nm
VRM2 ACK
2.20 nm No Alarm
８
Display position
8-15
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Table 8.6 List of System Alarms
Message Description
MTR(AZI) Bearing signal error
MTR(HL) Ship’s heading line signal error
MTR(MHV) Modulator’s high voltage error
MTR(DATA) Communications error with the transmitter-receiver unit
MTR(HEATER) Magnetron heater voltage is abnormal
MTR(REVERSE) Antennal rotation is reversed
MTR STATUS Transceiver status error
SSW OFF The safety switch is OFF during switchover of the scanners
NSK(GYRO) Gyro signal OFF
ISW(DATA) Communications error with the interswitch
LOG Log signal OFF
NAV(DATA) Date from navigation equipment OFF
DLOG 2-axis log signal OFF
ARPA(DATA) Communications error with the ARPA unit
NSK(DATA) Communications error with NSK unit
VIDEO Radar video OFF
TRIGGER Trigger signal OFF
FAN1 Fan alarm 1
FAN2 Fan alarm 2
PROC(DATA) Signal processing circuit error
SERI(DATA) Serial interface circuit error
LAN(DATA) LAN I/F circuit error
232C(DATA) RS-232C communications error
MTR(VID) Abnormal scanner vibrations
MTR(TMP) Abnormal scanner temperature
MAG(HDG) Data from Mag compass have been cut off
PROC(AZI) Bearing pulse is abnormal
8-16
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
In case of semiconductor circuits, it is deemed that there is few cases in which the used
semiconductor devices have inferior quality or performance deterioration except due to insufficient
design or inspection or by other external and artificial causes. In general, the relatively many causes
are disconnection in a high-value resistor due to moisture, a defective variable resistor and poor
contact of a switch or relay.
Some troubles are caused by defective parts, imperfect adjustment (such as tuning adjustment) or
insufficient service (such as poor cable contact). It will also be effective to check and readjust these
points.
Melted fuses are caused by any clear cause. When a fuse is replaced, it is necessary to check the
related circuits even if there is no trouble. In this case, note that there is some dispersion in the
fusing characteristics. Table 8.7 shows a list of fuses used in the equipment.
Table 8.7 Fuse List

Nominal
Location Parts No. Protection Circuit Type
Current
Transmitter- F1 1A Rectifier circuit PC1001 MF51NN-1A
receiver Unit
Display Unit F1 to F4 0.5A LOG.NSK circuit PC4201 MF60NR-0.5A
(NSK)
8-17
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8.3 COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE

As this radar equipment includes complicated circuits, it is necessary to request a specialist engineer
for repair or instructions for countermeasure if any circuit is defective.
There are also troubles by the following causes, which should be referred to in checking or repair
work.
1 Poor Contact in Terminal Board of Inter-Unit Cables

a) Poor contact in terminal board
b) The cable end is not fully treated, so that it is earthed or contacts with another
terminal.
c) Disconnected cable wire
2 Poor Contact of Connector within Unit
Reference:━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
This radar equipment is provided with the standard spares as shown in
Table 8.8.
Table 8.8 Spares (6ZXRD00198)
In
Name Type/Code Shape (mm) Spare Parts No. Location
use
Fuse MF51NN-1A 1 3 F1 Transmitter-
(5ZFAD00042) φ5.2 receiver
PC1001
20
Fuse MF60NR-0.5A 4 12 F1 to F4 Display

(5ZFAD00013) φ6.4 NSK Circuit
８
30
8-18
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Table 8.9 Special Parts
[Ⅰ] JMA-9933-SA
Parts No. Name Type Manufacturer Location Code

V201 Magnetron M1302 NJRC Transmitter- 5VMAA00032
receiver
A201 Circulator NJC3310 NJRC Transmitter- 5AJBV00002
receiver
A202 TRHPL TL378A NJRC Transmitter- 5VLAA00032
receiver
[Ⅱ] JMA-9932-SA

V101 Magnetron M1302 NJRC Scanner 5VMAA00032
A101 Circulator NJC3320 NJRC Scanner 5AJBV00004
A303 TRHPL TL378A NJRC Scanner 5VLAA00032
[Ⅲ] JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

V1 Magnetron M1568B(J) NJRC Transmitter- 5VMAA00082
receiver
A201/A202 Circulator FCX68 TOSHIBA Transmitter- 6AJRD00001
CORPORATION receiver
A203 Diode Limiter NJS6930 NJRC Transmitter- 5EZAA00024
receiver
A302 Pin Attenuator NJS6926 NJRC Transmitter- 5ENAC00019
receiver
[Ⅳ] JMA-9922-6XA/9XA
８ Parts No.
V1
A101
Name
Magnetron
Circulator
Type
M1568B(J)
FCX68
Manufacturer
NJRC
TOSHIBA
Location
Scanner
Scanner
Code
5VMAA00082
6AJRD00001
CORPORATION
A303 Diode Limiter NJS6930 NJRC Scanner 5EZAA00019
8-19
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Table 8.10 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9933-SA)
Location Circuit Block Type Remarks

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30030 AC220/230V3φ
Transmitter- Modulator NMA-1253-1 Including PC210 (CPA-209)
receiver Excluding Magnetron
Transmitter- Receiver NRG-88 PC301(CEA-334-1)
receiver PC302(CEA-424)
PC303(CEA-205)
Including PC304 (CBD-1274)
Transmitter- Power supply circuit CBA-1682
receiver
Transmitter- T/R control circuit CMC-1205
receiver
Display Power supply circuit CBD-1661
Display Terminal board circuit CQD-1949
Display NSK/LOG I/F circuit CMJ-462A
Display Mother board CMC-1094
Display Panel circuit-1 CCK-900
Display Display control circuit CMC-1218
Display Signal processing circuit CDC-1209
Display Interswitch circuit NQE-3141 (Option)
8-20
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Table 8.11 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9932-SA)

Transmitter- Receiver NRG-222 PC301(CEA-334-4)
receiver PC302(CEA-424)
PC303(CEA-205)
Including PC304 (CBD-1274)
receiver
receiver
8-21
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Table 8.12 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA)

Scanner Motor with gear MDBW10645 AC220/230V3φ
Transmitter- Receiver NRG-98
receiver
receiver
receiver
8-22
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Table 8.13 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9922-6XA/9XA)

Scanner Motor with gear MDBW10645 AC220/230V3φ
Transmitter- Receiver NRG-154
receiver
receiver
receiver
8-23
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
DENGER
In this INTER-SWITCH system, even if it turns OFF
a Indicator power supply, the power supply may
be supplied to the scanner.
Turn off the main power source of the radar before
open the scanner unit.
8-24
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
CAUTION
Turn off the main power source before replacing parts. Otherwise, an
electric shock or injury may result.
Before replacing the magnetron, turn off the main power source and wait for
5 minutes or more until the high voltage circuits are discharged.
Take off your wrist watch when bringing your hands close to the magnetron.
Since the magnetron is a strong magnet, your wrist watch may be damaged
if not taken off.
Replacement of the LCD unit requires two persons.

If one person attempts replacing the LCD unit, he/she may drop it and get
injured.
High voltage will temporarily remain inside, even after the main power has
been turned off. Do not touch the inverter circuit of the LCD unit with wet
hands.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in electrical shock.
8-25
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Replacement of PARTS Periodically･････････････････････

The parts shown below, it is need to exchang periodically.
Parts Exchange Standard

1. Magnetron 4,000 hours
2. Motor 10,000 hours
3. LCD 50,000 hours
4. Fan Motor 20,000 hours
5. Lithium battery 3 years
Replacement of Magnetron (V1/V101/V201)･･････････････････
Remove the shield cover of the modulator and check that no charge remains in the
high-voltage modulator circuit. Then, remove the socket of the magnetron. The
magnetron can be demounted by removing the screws fixing it. When mounting a
new magnetron, do not touch the magnet with a screwdriver or put it on an iron place.
After replacement, connect the lead wire correctly.
Handling of Magnetron under Long-Time Storage

The magnetron that has been kept in storage for a long time may cause sparks and
operate unstably when its operation is started. Perform the aging in the following
procedures:
(1) Warm up the cathode for a longer time than usually. (20 to 30 minutes in the
STBY state.)
(2) Start the operation from the short pulse range and shift is gradually to the longer
pulse ranges. If the operation becomes unstable during this process, return it to
the standby mode immediately. Keep the state for 5 to 10 minutes until the
operation is restarted.
(3) After transmission is made for about 15 minutes, conduct the tuning adjustment.
(4) Adjust RV1 within the receiver so that the bar graph of the tuning indicator on the
display reaches the reading 10 without saturation.
8-26
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
< Scanner: NKE-1075A Magnetron Exchange Procedure
Open portside cover.
Magnetron
Heading
・Remove the reads of magnetron on

terminal.
Terminal ・Loosen 9 bolts A.
And remove 2 attached plates.
Caution）
Be careful of the handling of a
magnetron.
・Exchange Magnetron.
Attach Magnetron, plates, reads.
Setting up scanner unit.
８ Bolt A
Magnetron
Attached Plate
8-27
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
< Scanner: NKE-1087 Magnetron Exchange Procedure
Open starboard cover of

scanner.
Loosen 4 screws A.
And remove
magnetron-cover.
Screw: A Heading
Remove Magnetron-cover
・Remove Magnetron-leads at the

terminal.
・Remove 4 screws B.
Remove The Magnetron.
Caution）
Be careful of the handling of a
magnetron and screws.
Screw: B
Attach Magnetron, leads and
cover.
Setting up scanner unit.
８
Magnetron
Terminal
8-28
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
< Transmitter Receiver: NTG-3037A Magnetron Exchange Procedure
Screw:A ・Remove outer-cover.

・Loosen 6 screws A.
・Remove inner cover.
Inner cover
Terminal
・Remove Magnetron leads

from terminal.
・Remove 9 bolts B.
Remove Magnetron.
Attach Magnetron, leads
and cover.
Setting up TR control
unit.
８
Bolt: B
8-29
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
< Transmitter Receiver: NTG-3028 Magnetron Exchange Procedure
Remove outer cover.

Screw: B Screw: C Loosen screw A.
And slide and remove
Screw: C attach plate.
PIN
Screw: C
Loosen 4 screws B
about 4-5 turns.
The pin falls.
When pin is not fall, push
the pin by Philips.
Screw: B
Screw: A
Screw: C
Attach plate
Screw: C
Modulator
Screw: C
Remove 4 screws C.
Pulls out rotating Modulator

in the direction of an arrow
８
for a while.
8-30
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Magnetron
Remove Magnetron cover.

Remove Magnetron leads
on the terminal.
Termial
Loosen 4 screws D.
Screw: D
Remove the Magnetron.
Exchange the Magnetron.

Attach the leads and cover.
Setting up TR control
unit.
8-31
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor････････････････
Attention
z The liquid-crystal monitor is easily damaged, even by a slight shock. When

handling this monitor for replacement, be extra careful so as not to hit a hard
object against the monitor. In addition, do not place the monitor on a hard
object.
1 JMA-9933-SA, JMA-9923-7XA/9XA (Display unit: NCD-4263)
(1) Four screws of the front of a processing part are loosened.

(2) The cable connected from the liquid crystal (LCD) part is removed. (Three)
The band which is fixing the cable is removed.
A cable is drawn out upwards.
(3) Four bolts which have stopped the liquid crystal display part to the case are
removed..
(4) A display part is removed.
(5) Four screws of a liquid crystal top and six screws (rotation part) stopped from the
lower side are removed. (It becomes only the display part of liquid crystal.)
(6) A reverse procedure performs attachment of a new liquid crystal display monitor.
8-32
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8.5 ADJUSTMENTS
This section describes the electrical adjustments of the equipment as the
adjustment procedures to be carried out by service persons at the time
of installation.
CAUTION
Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized
service persons. Otherwise, an accident or trouble may result.
Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation. Otherwise, the radar
performance may be affected, resulting in an accident or trouble.
Tuning adjustments, bearing adjustments, and range adjustments can be performed from
the keyboard.
The following procedure must be used to enter the equipment into adjustment mode:
Procedures 1 Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.

ADJUST
1.TUNE
2 Click CODE INPUT . 0-127 1.5
2.BEARING
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.
0.0-359.9゜ 000.0
3.CPA RING
3 Click 0 , then END . 0-999 10
８
4.ANTENNA HEIGH
The ADJUST Menu will appear. 3.OVER 25m
5. ARPA/AIS
EXIT 1 Click EXIT . 6. SECTOR BLANK
The ADJUST Menu will be closed. 7. MBS
2 Click EXIT .
The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.
０． EXIT
3 Click EXIT .
8-33
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Tuning Adjustment･･････････････････････････････････
1 If the AUTO TUNE mode is ON, change the mode to the Manual
Procedures
mode.
ADJUST
2 Set the range scale to 24 NM and
adjust the [TUNE] control to the 1.TUNE
0-127 1.5
center.
2.BEARING
0.0-359.9゜ 000.0
3 Click MENU on the screen. Or 3.CPA RING
0-999 10
press OPTION2 key. 4.ANTENNA HEIGH
3.OVER 25m
5. ARPA/AIS
6. SECTOR BLANK
4 Click CODE INPUT .
7. MBS
5 Click 0 , then END .

０． EXIT
The ADJUST Menu will appear.
6 Click the “1.TUNE”edit box.

7 Using △ and ▽ , adjust the bar-graph of the tuning

indicator on the upper left of the display so that it becomes
the longest, and press END to set it.
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will be closed. ８
2 Click EXIT .
3 Click EXIT .
8-34
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Bearing Adjustment･･･････････････････････････････････････
Adjust the bearing so that bearing of the target measured with the ship’s compass
corresponds to that of the target echo on the radar display.
Procedures
1 Press the “N UP/H UP/C UP” button on the upper left of the
screen, then change the bearing display to relative display
(H UP) .
2 Measure the bearing of an adequate target (for example, a ship

at anchor, a breakwater or a buoy) relative to own ship’s
heading. (For instance, assume that the bearing of the target
is 25°.)
ADJUST
1.TUNE
3 Click MENU on the screen. Or press 0-127 1.5
2.BEARING
OPTION2 key. 0.0-359.9゜ 000.0
The MAIN Menu will appear. 3.CPA RING
0-999 10
4.ANTENNA HEIGH
4 Click CODE INPUT . 3.OVER 25m
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear. 5. ARPA/AIS
6. SECTOR BLANK
5 Click 0 , then END . 7. MBS
6 Click the “2.BEARING”edit box. ０． EXIT

2.BEARING will be selected.
7 The EBL for bearing adjustment will appear.
８ Rotate the [EBL] control and adjust EBL to the target selected
in Step 2 above.
Press [EBL] control to set it.
8 Rotate the [EBL] control and adjust the EBL for bearing
adjustment to the bearing of the target selected in Step 2
above.
Press [EBL] control to set it.
(Adjust the EBL bearing to 25°as the instance in Step 2 above)
9 Repeat the procedures from step 5 above if the bearing is not

completely coincident with the target's actual bearing.
8-35
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will be closed.
Range Adjustment･････････････････････････････････････････
Adjust the range that the range of the target on the radar video is indicated correctly.

ADJUST
1.TUNE
2 Click CODE INPUT . 0-127 1.5
2.BEARING
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear. 0.0-359.9゜ 000.0
3.CPA RING
3 Click 0 , then END . 0-999 10
4.ANTENNA HEIGH
The ADJUST Menu will appear. 3.OVER 25m
5. ARPA/AIS
4 Click the “3.RANGE”edit box. 6. SECTOR BLANK
3.RANGE will be selected. 7. MBS
5 Find a target on the radar display the

range of which is already known.
（For example, assume that the actual range of EXIT
０．
the target is 0.33NM)
6 Using + and - , adjust the target echo's position to the
position of the target selected in step 4 above. Press END to

set it.
Move the target echo upward by + and downward by - .
８
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .
2 Click EXIT .
3 Click EXIT .
8-36
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Antenna Height Adjustment････････････････････････････････

Set the height of the antenna above the sea level.
Do not change this setting inadvertently.

ADJUST
1.TUNE
2 Click CODE INPUT. 0-127 1.5
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear. 2.BEARING
0.0-359.9゜ 000.0
3.CPA RING
3 Click 0 , then END . 0-999 10
The ADJUST Menu will appear. 4.ANTENNA HEIGH

3.OVER 25m
1.UNDER 15m
5. ARPA/AIS
2.15m-25m
4 Click the “4.ANTENNA HEIGHT”edit 3.OVER
SECTOR 25m
BLANK
6.
box. 7. MBS
4.ANTENNA HEIGHT will be selected.
5 Measure the height from the sea

surface to the top of the antenna,
then select the corresponding ０． EXIT
antenna height from the pull-down
menu.
The selected antenna height value will be set.
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

８ 2 Click EXIT .
3 Click EXIT .
8-37
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Vector Constant･･･････････････････････････････････････････
Attention
z Do not change the set value carelessly.

The vector constant shall be set to 4 normally. If the vector constant value is
higher, a target’s vector will be better followed up when the target and own ship
change their course or speed, but the vector accuracy will be lower on the

ADJUST
ARPA/AIS
2 Click CODE INPUT. 1.VECT CONST
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear. 1-8 4
VIDEO LEVEL
3.LIMIT RING
3 Click 0 , then END . OFF ON
4 Click ARPA/AIS .
The ARPA/AIS Menu will appear.
5 Click the “1. VECT CONST”edit box.

1.VECT CONST will be selected.
０． EXIT
6 Input the new value by pressing the 0

to 8 number buttons or by using the + or - buttons, then
press END to input.
８
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .
2 Click EXIT .
3 Click EXIT .
8-38
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Quantization Level･････････････････････････････････････････
CAUTION
Do not change the set quantization level carelessly. If the level deviates
from the proper value, the ARPA acquisition and tracking functions will
deteriorate.
Otherwise, this may cause accidents to occur.
The quantization level determines the minimum signal level of the input video to the ARPA
target detection circuit. In this test, the value of the quantization level can be set in a
range of 1 to 63.
If the value is set to a lower level, weak target echoes will be inputted to the ARPA target
detection circuit, but much radar noise will also be inputted to the circuit together, and
target acquisition and tracking may be disabled. Therefore, it is important to set a value
that is 4 or 5 higher than the detected noise level.
Procedures
1 Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.
The MAIN Menu will appear. ADJUST
ARPA/AIS
2 Click CODE INPUT . VIDEO LEVEL
1.TD LEVEL
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear. 1-63 45
2.LOW LEVEL
1-63 35
3 Click 0 , then END . 3.HIGH LEVEL
The ADJUST Menu will appear. 1-63 40
８ 4 Click ARPA/AIS .
The ARPA/AIS Menu will appear.
5 Click VIDEO LEVEL .

The VIDEO LEVEL Menu will appear. ０． EXIT
6 Click the “3.HIGH LEVEL”edit box.

3.HIGH LEVEL will be selected.
8-39
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
7 To change the quantization level, enter a new value using any

of 0 to 9 or + and - , and press END to set it.
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

2 Click EXIT .
3 Click EXIT .
Control will be returned to the MAIN Menu.
Do not change the quantization level LOW LEVEL.
Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log･･････････
The NSK Unit of the radar equipment is of solid-state type and designed to be compatible
with almost all types of gyro compass by switch operation (For the step motor type, 35 V
DC to 100 V DC, and for the synchro-motor type, the primary excitation voltage is 50 V AC
to 115 V AC). Before power-on operation, the switches S1, S2, S6 and S7 on the NSK
Unit (CMJ-462) shall be set to the type of gyro compass in use in accordance with the
procedures as described below. The gyro select switch on the NSK Unit is set to the
gyration ratio of 360X and to be compatible with the synchro type before delivery from
factory. Check the type of the gyro compass used in own ship and make settings in the
procedures below. For further details, refer to Fig. 127 Setting Table of Gyro Compass
and Gyro Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263.
① Set the switches and jumper of the NSK Unit (CMJ-462) before tuning on the radar
equipment.
• S5: Set it to [OFF].

• S6, 7: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of gyro.
S6, S7･･･････････････｢UP｣･････････ Step signal
｢DOWN｣･････ Synchro signal
８
• S1-1 to 4: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of gyro.
S1-1･･････････････････ Set this switch assembly according to the
particular type of gyro.
｢UP｣･････････ Step signal
｢DOWN｣･････ Synchro signal
S1-2, 3････････････････ Gyration ratio
Gyration ratio S1-2 S1-3

36× ON ON
8-40
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
90× OFF ON
180× ON OFF
360× OFF OFF
S1-4･･････････････････ Gyration direction

｢ON｣･････････ Reverse (counterclockwise)
｢OFF｣････････ Normal (clockwise)
• S1-5-8: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of log.
S1-5･･････････････････ Log type-1
｢ON｣･････････ Synchro signal
｢OFF｣････････ Pulse signal
S1-6･･････････････････ Log type-2

｢ON｣･････････ 1-axis
｢OFF｣････････ 2-axis
S1-7,8････････････････ Log ratio
Log ratio S1-7 S1-8

100P/30× ON ON
200P/90× OFF ON
400P/180× ON OFF
800P/360× OFF OFF
② Connect the gyro signal and the log signal cables to the Terminal Board Circuit.
③ Set S7 to [ON].
After power-on operation, the switch S1-4 shall be set to [ON] if the radar video and
the indicated value of COPURSE (own ship’s true bearing) is reversed.
Table 8.14 Gyro and Log Select Switches (S1 Dip Switch)
S1 Setting Table
S１ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STEP TYPE ON
８ GYRO
SIG.
SYNC TYPE OFF
36× ON ON
/ 90× OFF ON
GYRO RATIO
180× ON OFF
SIGNAL
360× ON OFF
SET
REV (Reverse) ON
DIRECTION
NORM (Normal) OFF
LOG SIG. SYNC ON
/ TYPE1
PULSE OFF
LOG １AXIS ON
SIGNAL TYPE2
２AXIS OFF
SET
PULSE 100P/30× ON ON
8-41
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
/NM 200P/90× OFF ON

400P/180× ON OFF
800P/360× OFF OFF
S2 Setting Table
1 2 3 4
GYRO LOG
LOG ALM N/A
SIMULATOR SIMULATOR
S2
5 6 7 8
GYRO ALM
N/A N/A N/A
ON=5S,OFF=0.5S
Main Bang Suppression Adjustment････････････････････････
The adjustment is intended for suppressing the main bang that is an echo signal from the
microwave circuit such as waveguide appearing as a circular echo at the radar video
center. It is the optimum level in which the main bang suppression is adjusted so that the
main bang remains weak on the video.
Attention
z Do not change the adjusted level carelessly. If the adjustment is improper, the
target signals on the short ranges may be cleared.
Procedures 1 Set the radar range scale to the minimum 0.125 NM, set
PROCESS, TGT ENH and FUNCTION to OFF, and set the
system to the Transmit mode.
ADJUST
2 Adjust the operation controls as MBS
follows:
1.MBS LEVEL
[GAIN] control: Maximum 0-255 0
[SEA] control: Center (MANUAL)
[RAIN] control: Minimum (MANUAL)
2.MBS AREA
0-255 0
８
3 Click MENU on the screen.

4 Click CODE INPUT .

０． EXIT
8-42
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 3 Click 0 , then END .

6 Click MBS .
The MBS Menu will appear.
7 Click the “1.MBS LEVEL” edit box.

1.MBS LEVEL will be selected.
8 Enter any value to adjust the suppression range using 0 to 9

or + and - , and press END to set it up.
9 Click “2.MBS AREA” edit box in the state of step 5.

2.MBS AREA will be selected. ADJUST
MBS
10 Enter any value to adjust the
1.MBS LEVEL
suppression level using 0 to 9 or + 0-255 0
2.MBS AREA
and - , and press END to set it up. 0-255 0
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
3 Click EXIT .
The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed. ０． EXIT
８ 4 Click EXIT .
8-43
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8.6 SETTING
True Bearing Setting･･･････････････････････････････････････
Adjust the bearing that the bearing angle of the radar is the same as that of the gyro.
Procedures SUB1 MENU

SETTING1
1.SET GYRO
Or press OPTION2 key. 0.0-359.9゜ 0.0
The MAIN Menu will appear. 2.SELECT SPEED
1.MANUAL
3. SET MANUAL SPEED
2 Click SUB1 MENU , then
4. SELECT NAV
5. SET/DRIFT
SETTING1 .
6. TIME/DAY
7.PRF
1.HIGH
8.RANGE SELECT
3 Click in the “GYRO SETTING” edit
96nm 120nm
box. 9. SETTING2
The GYRO SETTING edit box will be
selected. ０． EXIT
4 Enter any value using 0 to 9 or + and - to adjust the
radar bearing to the gyro bearing, and press END to set it up.
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The SUB1 Menu will reappear.
８
2 Click EXIT .
The SUB1 Menu will be closed.
3 Click EXIT .
8-44
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Ship Speed Setting････････････････････････････････････････
The ship’s speed and various other related values, and manual speed can be set.
SUB1 MENU
Procedures 1 Click MENU on the screen. SETTING1
1.SET GYRO
Or press OPTION2 key. 0.0-359.9゜ 0.0
2.SELECT SPEED
The MAIN Menu will appear. 1.MANUAL
1.MANUAL
3. SET MANUAL SPEED
2.1AXIS
2 Click SUB1 MENU , then SETTING1 . 4. 3.2AXISNAV
SELECT W
4.2AXIS G
5. SET/DRIFT
6. TIME/DAY
7.PRF
3 Click the “2.SELECT SPEED” edit box. 1.HIGH
8.RANGE SELECT
The SPEED edit box will be selected.
96nm 120nm
9. SETTING2
4-1 Manual Speed Setting
０． EXIT
(1) Click MANUAL .
1.MANUAL will be set.
SUB1 MENU
(2) Click SET MANUAL SPEED after step 2
SETTING1
above is completed. SET MANUAL SPEED
The SET MANUAL SPEED Menu will appear. 1.MANUAL SPEED
0-60.0kts 30
(3) Click the“1.MANUAL SPEED”edit box.
８ (4) Press any of 0 to 9 or + and -
and press END.

The speed (max. 100.0 kts) will be set.
０． EXIT
Note: The manually entered speed is effective only when MANUAL
is set in SELECT SPEED.
8-45
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
4-2 LOG Setting
(1) Click 1AXIS for 1-axis log.

2.1AXIS will be set.
4-3 Selection of Data against Water for 2-axis Log (NMEA Signal)
(1) Click 2AXIS W .

3.2AXIS W will be set.
4-3 Selection of Data against Ground for 2-axis Log (NMEA Signal)
(1) Click 2AXIS G .

4.2AXIS G will be set.
Attention
z The speed data cannot be selected when the sentence VBW of NMEA0183
is not entered.
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The SUB1 Menu will reappear.
2 Click EXIT .
The SUB1 Menu will be closed.
3 Click EXIT .
8-46
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Navigation Equipment Setting･･････････････････････････････
The data from the navigation equipment such as GPS will be selected.
Procedures 1 Click MENU on the screen. SUB1 MENU

SETTING1
SELECT NAV
1.L/L (GPS)
1.NONE
1.NONE
2 Click SUB1 MENU , then SETTING1 . 2.NAV1
3.NAV2
3 Click SELECT NAV .

The SELECT NAV Menu will appear.
4 Click the “1.L/L (GPS)”edit box.

The“1.L/L (GPS)”edit box will be selected.
０． EXIT
- When using no navigation
equipment -
5-1 Select and set “NONE” by clicking .
- When using navigation equipment 1 -

5-2 Select and set “NAV1” by clicking .
- When using navigation equipment 1 -

5-3 Select and set “NAV2” by clicking .
８ EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The PORT Menu will be closed.
2 Click EXIT .
The SETTING Menu will be closed.
3 Click EXIT .
8-47
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Current Correction (SET/DRIFT) Setting･････････････････････

The current set and drift will be set.
Attention
z Setting with this function is valid only when MANUAL or 1AXIS is selected for
ship’s speed setting (SPEED).
Procedures 1 Click MENU on the screen. SUB1 MENU

SETTING1
SET/DRIFT
The MAIN Menu will appear. 1.CORRECTION
OFF ON
2.SET
2 Click SUB1 MENU, then STTING1 . 0.0-359.9゜ 0.0
The STTING1 Menu will appear. 3.DRIFT
0.0-15.0kts 0.0
3 Click SET/DRIFT .
The SET/DRIFT Menu will appear.
4 Click “1.CORRECTION” to “ON” .

０． EXIT
“ON” in “1.CORRECTION” will be set to
operate the current correction mode.
If the current correction mode is not operated, press “1.CORRECTION”to set
it to “ＯＦＦ”．
5 Set “1.CORRECTION” to “ON” and click the “2.SET” edit

box.
The numeric input dialogue box will be opened.
８
6 Enter any angle of the current set using 0 to 9 or + and - ,
and press END to set it up.

The current set will be set.
7 Set “1.CORRECTION” to “ON“ and click the “3.DRIFT” edit

box.
The numeric input dialogue box will be opened
8-48
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8 Enter any angle of the current set using 0 to 9 or + or - ,
and press END to set it up.

The current drift will be set.
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The PORT Menu will be closed.
2 Click EXIT .
3 Click EXIT .
8-49
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Time/Day Display Setting･･･････････････････････････････････

In displaying the time, it is necessary to set the LOCAL TIME, LOCAL DATA and GMT +/-.
Procedures
SUB1 MENU
SETTING1
TIME/DAY
1.UTC/LOCAL
1.OFF
2 Click SUB1 MENU, then STTING1 . 2.CPA RING1.OFF
2.UTC
3.LOCAL
The STTING1 Menu will appear. 3.LOCAL DATE
1999/01/27
4.GMT +/-
3 Click TIME/DAY . +/- 12:00 0:00
The TIME/DAY Menu will appear.
4 Click “1.UTL/LOCAL” edit box.

The UTL/LOCAL pull-down menu will appear.
０． EXIT
- If the time of day is not to be displayed -
5-1 Left-click on “OFF” to select no time display.
- If UTC (Universal Coordinated Time) is to be displayed -

5-2 Left-click on “UTC” to select UTC display.
- If LOCAL (Location Time) is to be displayed -

5-3 Left-click on “UTC” to select local time display.
1) Left-click in the“2.LOCAL TIME”edit SUB1 MENU
box.
SETTING1
opened. TIME/DAY
2) Enter any local time using 0 to 9 and 1.UTC/LOCAL
８
1.OFF
press END to set it up.
The LOCAL TIME will be set. 2.CPA RING
00:00
3) Left-click in the“3.LOCAL DATE”edit 3.LOCAL DATE
box. 1999/01/27
The numeric input dialogue box will be 4.GMT +/-
opened. +/- 12:00 0:00
4) Enter any local date sing 0 to 9 and
press END to set it up.
The LOCAL DATE will be set.
5) Left-click in the“4.GMT + / -”edit box.
opened. EXIT
０．
8-50
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
6) Enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC
using + and - , and press END to set it up.
The“GMT + / -”will be set.
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The TIME/DATE Menu will be closed.
2 Click EXIT .
3 Click EXIT .
Attention
z Time correction is not available when the “ZDA” sentence of NMEA0183 is

not received.
8-51
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Adjustment of Performance Monitor (NJU-63/64)･････････････
Procedures 1 Set the radar to Master Radar when the Interswitch is

installed.
2 Press to display VRM1 and set the range of VRM1 to
10-18* NM.
* Set the range to 12 to 18 NM when a waveguide is installed between the
scanner unit and the transmitter-receiver unit. (X band radar)
* Set the range to 12 to 18 NM when the transceiver unit is incorporated in
the scanner unit or in case of operating the S band radar.
3 Open the ADJUST Menu as directed in

ADJUST
Section 8.5, Adjustments.
1.TUNE
0-63 32
　　　 2.BEARING
4 Left-click on PM PRESET .
0.0-359.9° 000.0
The PM PRESET Menu will appear. The radar 3.RANGE
0-999 510
will automatically be set to RM, OFF CNTER
4.ANTENNA HEIGHT
OFF, IR OFF, PROCESS OFF, TGT ENH OFF, 3.OVER 25m
FUNCTION OFF and 24 NM range. 5. ARPA
5 Affix the INFORMATION LABEL as 6. ISW
supplied with the Performance Monitor 7. MBS

to a suitable position of the board side 8.PM PRESET
of the Display Unit. 0-127 30
6 Write down the value of the "PM"

indicator in the TEST Menu and the
０． EXIT
date of checking in the INFORMATION
LABEL.
8-52
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Adjust the PM pattern

using the ten-key or [+]
and [-] so that its outer
edge is within 12 to 18 NM.
12 to
(See step 2)
18 NM
PM Pattern
EXIT 1 Click EXIT .

The PM PRESET Menu will be closed and the display will return to the
status existing before the tests were conducted.
Note: • All target acquisitions by ARPA functions will be

cancelled.
The target acquisition cancelled when PM is ON will not
be recovered.
• The radar image is suppressed to make the PM image
easier to see.
Therefore, the ADJUST MENU should be always opened
after PM check is completed.
8-53
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Adjustment of Inter switch ････････････････････････････････

[Checking after Installation]
Turn off the ship's mains (switch board) for the radar equipment.
(1) Check that the Interswitch is installed properly after completion of the installation.
In particular, check if the cable is connected correctly and if the shield meshwork of the
cable is grounded properly.
(2) Check that the internal settings in each Display Unit are made adequately.
[Checking the Interswitch Operation]

Turn on the ship's mains (switch board) for the radar equipment.
(1) Checking Interswitch Patterns.
6 interswitch patterns are available for 2-ynits of radar system, and 12 interswitch
patterns are available for 3-units of radar system.
For the checking procedures, refer to the Instruction Manual for Interswitch Kit as
attached hereto.
(2) Checking and adjusting Radar Video
The radar system with the built-in interswitch kit shall be adjusted in the following three
parameters:
・Range adjustment (0 NM adjustment)
・Bearing adjustment
・Rough tuning adjustment
These types of adjustment shall be made for each interswitch pattern as follows:
2-units system ･･･････ No.1 and No.2
3-units system ･･･････ No.1 , No.2 , No.3 and No.12 .
For the method of adjustment, refer to the respective adjustment procedures.
Note: Each adjustment should be performed swiftly after the interswitch is equipped.
These adjustments should be performed on the patterns specified according to the
radar quantity of the system.
If the patterns are switched without adjustments and the radar is used, accurate
information cannot be obtained from the radar.
2-units System
a. Pattern No.1
① Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the Display Unit (right))
② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the
８
panel of the Display Unit (left))
b. Pattern No.2
① Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the
panel of the Display Unit (right))
② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating the
3-units System
a. Pattern No.1
8-54
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by
operating the panel of the Display Unit (center))
② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the
③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
b. Pattern No.2
① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the Display Unit (center))
② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the Display Unit (left))
③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Unnecessory
adjustment)
c. Pattern No.3
① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the Display Unit (center))
② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Unnecessory
adjustment)
③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by operating
d. Pattern No.12
① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (center). (Unnecessory
adjustment)
② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the display Unit (left))
③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating
8-55
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8-56
9 SECTION 9
アフターサービス
AFTER-SALES SERVICE
When you Request for Repair .................... 9-1

Recommended Maintenance ..................... 9-1
Radar Failure Check List ............................ 9-2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
When you Request for Repair ･･････････････････････

If you suppose the product may be out of order, read the description in Section8
carefully and check the suspected point again.
If it is still out of order, you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment and
consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product, or our branch office in
your country or district, the sales department in our main office in Tokyo.
● Repair within the Warranty Period

If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with
the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC will repair free of change. In case that
any failure is caused due to misuse, faulty operation, negligence or force major
such as natural disaster and fine, the product will be repaired with charges.
● Repair after the Warranty Period

It any defective function of the product is recoverable by repair, the repair of it will
be made at your own charge upon your request.
● Necessary Information for Repair

☆ Product name, model, manufacturing date and serial number
☆ Trouble conditions (as detailed as possible. Refer to "Radar Failure Check
List" in page 9-2
☆ Name of company/organization address and telephone number
Recommended Maintenance ･･･････････････････････

The performance of the product may deteriorate due to the secular change of the
parts used in it, though such deterioration depends upon the conditions of
operation.
So checkup and maintenance is recommendable for the product in addition to your
daily care.
For maintenance, consult with the near-by dealer or our sales department.
Such maintenance will be made with changes.
For futher details of after-sale service, contact the JRC Offices in the list at the end of this
９ manual.
9-1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Radar Failure Check List
When placing an order for repair of the product, it is requested that you could confirm the check items
and fill the results and sent the sheet to our contact.
If there is any unclear items, contact the ship on which the product is installed, and give the correct
information on the product.
Ship name: Phone: Fax:

Radar general model name: JMA- Serial No. :
(Write the full model name correctly)
（1） Check the following items in the order of the number, and circle the applicable answer between
YES or NO. If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO, explain in detail in the item (18),
others.
（2） If any of the items (1) to (5) if marked as NO, check the fuse of the product (refer to Section 8.2
and 8.3).
（3） Check the items (4) to (17) while the transmission (TX) in ON.
*Function mentioned in the items (14), (15) and (17) may be optional, answer is not necessary.
No. Check Item Result

（1） Power can be turn on. (The lamp on the operation panel is lit) YES NO
（2） A few minutes after powering-on, it will become standby status . YES NO
（3） When powering-on (or TX ON), the LCD displays something (LCD is lit). YES NO
The scanner rotates at the transmission (TX) ON.
（4） YES NO
(Check the following items while transmission is ON)
（5） Current is supplied to the magnetron. (Refer to the instruction manual) YES NO
（6） Tuning is enabled. (Check with the range of 6 NM or more) YES NO
（7） Fixed marker is displayed. YES NO
（8） VRM is displayed. YES NO
While noise is displayed while set at STC and FTC minimum,
（9） YES NO
GAIN maximum, IR-OFF and range 48 NM.
（10） Target reflection echo is displayed. YES NO
（11） Sensitivity of reflection echo is normal. YES NO
（12） EBL is displayed. YES NO
（13） cursor mark moves. YES NO
９
*（14） GYRO course can be set and normally displayed. YES NO
*（15） LOG speed can be normally displayed. YES NO
（16） ARPA works normally. YES NO

*（17） If wquipped with an interswitch, when switching from the straight mode (| |) to YES NO
(×), the failures (items marked NO) in the ablve (1) to (16), are switched over to
the other unit.
（18）Others (Error message, etc.)
9-2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
9-3
SECTION 10
DISPOSAL
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT ..................... 1

10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES ....... 1
10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON ... 1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT

When disposing of this unit, be sure to follow the local laws and regulations foe the place of
disposal.
10.2 DISPOSAL OF USE BUTTERIES
WARNING
When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to
insulate the batteries by taping the + and −
terminals.
Otherwise, heat generation, explosion or a fire may
occur.
In this unit, lithium batteries are used for the following parts:
Indication control board（CMC-1218）: BT1(Maxell:CR2032）
● Do not store used lithium batteries but dispose of them as non-combustible waste.
● When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to insulate the batteries by
taping the + and - terminals.
For disposal of batteries, be sure to follow the local laws and regulation.
For detail, consult with the dealer you purchased the product our business office,
or local government.
10.3 DISPOSAL OF
USED MAGNETRON
１
０ Magnetron is used in the Scanner (NKE-1079/1089) and the Transmitter-receiver
unit (NGT-3037/3037A/3028) of the unit.
● When the magnetron is replaced with a new one, return the used magnetron
to our dealer or business office.
For detail, consult with our dealer or business office.
10-1
SECTION 11
SPECIFICATIONS
11.1 JMA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR ...................................... 11-1

11.2 JMA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR ...................................... 11-2
11.3 JMA-9923-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................ 11-3
11.4 JMA-9922-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................ 11-4
11.5 SCANNER（NKE-1079）.............................................. 11-5
11.6 SCANNER（NKE-1075）.............................................. 11-5
11.7 SCANNER（NKE-1089-7/9） ....................................... 11-6
11.8 SCANNER（NKE-1087-6/9） ....................................... 11-7
11.9 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT（NTG-3037） ......... 11-8
11.10 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT（NTG-3028） ......... 11-9
11.11 DISPLAY UNIT（NCD-4263） ..................................... 11-10
11.12 ARPA ........................................................................ 11-12
11.13 PERFORMANCE MONITOR（NJU-63） .................... 11-13
11.14 PERFORMANCE MONITOR（NJU-64） .................... 11-13
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
SPECIFICATIONS
11.1 JMA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR ･････････････････
■ General Specification
(1) Type of Emission ：P0N
(2) Display ：Color Raster Scan
(3) Screen ：23.1-inch Color LCD
(Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)
(4) Range scale ：0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
and 96 (or 120) NM
(5) Range Resolution ：Less than 30m
(6) Minimum Detective Range ：Less than 40m
(7) Bearing Accuracy ：Less than 1°
(8) Bearing Indication ：North-up / Head-up / Course-up
(9) Ambient Condition ：Temperature
Scanner −25℃ to ＋55℃
(Storage Temperature−25℃ to ＋70℃)
Other Units expect Scanner−25℃ to ＋55℃
Relative Humidity 93% at +40℃
(10) Vibration ：2 to 13.2Hz amplitude ±1mm±10%
13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s2 constant
(11) Power Supply Input ：Scanner AC220V,60Hz,3φ
AC110/220V, 60Hz,1φ
(12) Power Consumption ：Approx.800VA
(13) Power Supply Input
Voltage Fluctuation ：Input Voltage ±10%
(at the maximum cable length)
(14) Pre-heating Time ：Within 4 min
(15) From Standby
up to Operation ：Within 15 sec
■ Scanner (NKE-1079) See 11.5
■ Transmitter-receiver (NTG-3037） See 11.9
■ Display (NCD-4263） See 11.11
■ Performance Monitor（NJU-63） See 11.13
■ Option
(1) Scanner with Deicing Heater ：NKE-1079-D (only heater collar)
(2) Radar Interswitch ：NQE-3141-2/4
１
１ (3) Display Unit (Desktop Type) ：NCD-4263T
■ Distance between Units Maximum Distance
11-1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(1) Scanner to Transmitter-receiver ：30m

(2) Display to Transmitter-receiver ：35m
■ Compass Safety Distance Standard

(1) Scanner ：1.4m
(2) Transmitter-receiver ：2.8m
(3) Display ：3.2m
11.2 JMA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR ･････････････････

(4) Range scale ：0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
and 96 (or 120) NM
(6) Minimum Detective Range ：Less than 40m
(Storage Temperature −25℃ to ＋70℃)
13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s2
constant
(11) Power Supply Input ：Scanner AC220/230V,60Hz,3φ
AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz,1φ
Voltage Fluctuation ：Input Voltage ±10%
(15) From Standby
■ Scanner (NKE-1075A） See 11.6
■ Display (NCD-4263） See 11.11
■ Performance Monitor（NJU-63） See 11.13 １

１
■ Option
(1) Scanner with Deicing Heater ：NKE-1075A-D (only heater collar)
11-2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(2) Radar Interswitch ：NQE-3141-2/4

(3) Display Unit (Desktop Type) ：NCD-4263T

(1) Scanner - Display ：65m

(1) Scanner ：1.4m
(2) Display ：3.2m
11.3 JMA-9923-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ････････････

(4) Range Scale ：0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
and 96 (or 120) NM
(6) Minimum
Detective Range ：Less than 40m
constant
AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz,1φ

Voltage Fluctuation ：Input Voltage±10%
(15) From Standby
１
１ ■ Scanner (NKE-1089-7/9) See 11.6
■ Transmitter-receiver (NTG-3028) See 11.10
11-3
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■ Display (NCD-4263) See 11.11
■ Performance Monitor (NJU-64) See 11.13
■ Option
(1) Scanner with Deicing Heater ：NKE-1089-7D/9D (only heater coller)
(2) Radar Interswitch ：NQE-3141-2 / 4
(3) Display Unit (Desktop Type) ：NCD-4263T

(1) Scanner to Transmitter-receiver ：30m
(2) Display to Transmitter-receiver ：35m

(1) Scanner ：1.4m
(2) Transmitter-receiver ：2.8m
(3) Display ：3.2m
11.4 JMA-9922-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ････････････

(4) Range Scale ：0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
and 96 (or 120) NM
(6) Minimum
Detective Range ：Less than 40m
(10) Vibration : 2 to 13.2Hz amplitude ±1mm±10%
constant
AC100/110/220/230V, 60Hz, 1φ
Voltage Fluctuation ：Input Voltage±10% １
１
(15) From Standby
11-4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■ Scanner (NKE-1087-6/9) See 11.6
■ Display (NCD-4263) See 11.11
■ Performance Monitor (NJU-64) See 11.13
■ Option
(1) Scanner with Deicing Heater : NKE-1087-6D/9D (only heater coller)
(2) Radar Interswitch : NQE-3141-2 / 4
(3) Display Unit (Desktop Type) : NCD-4263T

(1) Scanner Display : 65m

(1) Scanner ：2.4m
(2) Display : 3.2m
11.5 SCANNER（NKE-1079）･･････････････････････
(1) Dimensions ：Height 837×Swing Circle 4000 (mm)
(2) Mass ：Approx. 142kg
(3) Polarization ：Horizontal Polarization
(4) Directional Characteristic ：Horizontal Beam Width 1.9°(-3dB width)
Vertical Beam Width 30°(-3dB width)
Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (Within ±10°)
Below -30dB (Outside ±10°)
(5) Revolution ：Approx. 26rpm (60Hz)
(6) Drive Motor ：220V AC, 60Hz, 3φ

AC110/220V , 60Hz, 1φ
(7) Wind Velocity ：Relative Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100 knots)
11.6 SCANNER（NKE-1075A）･･････････････････････
(1) Dimensions ：Height 581 × Swing Circle 4000 (mm)
(4) Directional Characteristic ：Horizontal Beam Width 1.9°(-3dB width)
Vertical Beam Width 30°(-3dB width)
１
１ Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (Within ±10°)
Below -30dB (Outside ±10°)
(5) Revolution ：Approx. 26 rpm (60Hz)
(6) Drive Motor ：AC220/230V, 60Hz,3φ
11-5
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
AC100/110/220/230V , 60Hz, 1φ
(7) Wind Velocity ：Relative Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
(8) Transmitting Frequency ：3050±10MHz
(9) Peak Power ：30kW
(10) Transmitting Tube ：Magnetron［M1302］
(11) Pulse Width /
Repeatition Frequency ：0.07µs/1900Hz （0.125,0.25,0.5NM）
0.07µs/1900Hz （0.75NM） By change over
0.15µs/1900Hz SP switch
0.1 µs/1900Hz
0.2 µs/1900Hz (1.5NM) By change over
0.3 µs/1900Hz SP switch
0.2 µs/1900Hz
0.3 µs/1900Hz (3NM) By change over
0.6 µs/1100Hz (6,12NM) By change over
1.2 µs/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)
(12) Modulation ：Solid States Modulator Circuit

(13) Duplexer ：Circulator + TRHPL
(14) Front End Module ：Built-in
(15) Intermediate Frequency
Amplifier ：Intermediate Frequency：60MHz
Band Width：20/6/3MHz
Gain：More than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics：Logarithmic Amplifier
(16) Overall Noise Figure ：7.5dB (Average)
(17) Tuning ：Manual/Auto
11.7 SCANNER（NKE-1089-7/9）･････････････････
(1) Dimensions ：7ft Height 536×Swing Circle 2270 (mm)
9ft Height 536×Swing Circle 2825 (mm)
(2) Mass ：7ft Approx. 43kg
9ft Approx. 46kg
(4) Directional Characteristic ：Horizontal Beam Width 7ft 1°(-3dB width）
9ft 0.8°(-3dB width）
Vertical Beam Width 20°(-3dB width）
Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (within ±10°)
Below -30dB (Outside±10°)
(6) Drive Motor ：7ft AC 220/230V, 60Hz, 3φ １

１
AC100/110V / 220/230V ,60Hz, 1φ
9ft AC220/230V ,60Hz, 3φ
AC100/110V / 220/230V ,60Hz, 1φ
11-6
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(7) Wind Velocity ：Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
11.8 SCANNER（NKE-1087-6/9）･････････････････
(1) Dimensions ：6ft Height 536 × Swing Circle 1910(mm)
9ft Height 536 × Swing Circle 2825(mm)
(2) Mass ：6ft Approx. 48kg
9ft Approx. 52kg
(4) Directional Characteristic ： Horizontal Beam Width 6ft 1.2°(-3dB
width)
9ft 0.8°(-3dB width)
Vertical Beam Width 20°(-3dB width）
Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (within ±10°)
Below -30dB (Outside±10°)
(6) Drive Motor ：6ft AC220/230V ,60Hz, 3φ

AC100/110V / 220/230V,60Hz, 1φ
9ft AC220/230V,60Hz, 3φ
AC100/110V / 220/230V, 60Hz, 1φ
(7) Wind Velocity ：Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
(10) Transmitting Tube ：Magnetron［M1568B(J)］
(11) Pulse Width /
0.1 µs/1900Hz
0.2 µs/1900Hz
1.2 µs/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)

(13) Duplexer ：Circulator + Diode Limiter
１
１ (15) Intermediate Frequency
11-7
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11.9 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT（NTG-3037）

(1) Dimensions ：Height 615 × Width 615 × Depth 365 (mm)
(2) Structure ：Wall Mount Drip Proof
(6) Transmitting Tube ：Magnetron［M1302］
(7) Pulse Width /
0.1 µs/1900Hz
0.2 µs/1900Hz
1.2 µs/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)

１
１
11-8
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
11.10 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT（NTG-3028）

(1) Dimensions ：Height 461 × Width 460 × Depth 227 (mm)
(2) Structure ：Wall Mount Drip Proof
(6) Transmitting Tube ：Magnetron［M1568B(J)］
(7) Pulse Width /
0.1 µs/1900Hz
0.2 µs/1900Hz
1.2 µs/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)
(8) Modulation ：Solid States Modulation circuit

１
１
11-9
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
11.11 DISPLAY UNIT（NCD-4263）･････････････････

(1) Dimension ：Height 1100 × Width 703 × Depth 1052 (mm)
(2) Structure ：Self-Standing Drip Proof
(4) Display ：23.1-inch Color LCD
(5) Range Scale ：0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48,
and 96 (or 120) NM
(6) Range Marker ：0.025,0.05,0.1,0.25,0.5,1,2,4,8,and 16(or 20) NM
(7) Range Accuracy ：Less than 1% of the maximum distance of the
range scale in use or 30m whichever is larger
(8) Variable Rage Markers ：2(VRM1 / VRM2)
(9) VRM Scale ：0.00 - 96.0(or 120.0) NM, Numerical indication in
4 digits
(10) Bearing Marker ：360°in 1°steps
(11) Off Center ：Within 60% of the radius of any range except
96 NM and 120NM
(12) Trackball Cursor ：Built-in (Target range, Relative / True bearing
presentation)
(13) Electronic Bearing Lines ：2 (EBL1 / EBL2) (Center / Independent)
(14) EBL Bearing Indication ：0.0°- 359.9°, Numerical indication in 4 digits
(15) Tuning Indication ：Bar-graph
(16) Marking Function ：Electronic mark(Max. 20 points
(17) Heading Line Indication ：Electronic
(18) True Motion Unit ：Built-in (0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24 and 48 NM）
(19) STC(SEA) ：Manual / Auto
(20) FTC(RAIN) ：Manual / Auto
(21) Display Mode ：North-up / head-up / Course-up
(22) Trails Indication ：0.5 min / 1 min / 3 min / 6 min / OFF
(23) Video Process ：Built-in
(24) Interference Rejection ：Built-in (ON/OFF)
(25) Guard Zone ：Ring
(26) Navigation Lines ：Built-in (256 points × 10 types)
(only with navigation equipment is connected)
(27) Self-diagnostic-Function ：Built-in
(28) Own Ship's Track Indicate ：Built-in
(only with navigation equipment is connected)
(29) Parallel Line Cursor ：Built-in
１
１
11-10
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(30) Interface ：Sub display

Loran-C
IEC61162-1(NMEA0183)
GPS
Radar buoy
LOG
GYRO
Radar Interswitch (option)
External Alarm output
(Reference) NMEA0183 Interface
Receivable sentence ・BWC ・GGA
・GLL ・RMA
・RMB ・RMC
・VBW ・ZDA
・VTG
Priority
（1）Latitude/Longitude ：GGA > RMC > RMA > GLL
（2）Waypoint ：RMB > BWC
Note：The speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall conform to IMO

Resolution A.824(19).
１
１
11-11
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
11.12 ARPA ･････････････････････････････････････

(1) Acquisition
・Acquisition Mode ：Auto/Manual Acquisition(Targets are acquired
within guard zone in the automatic acquisition
mode)
・Manual Cancellation of
Unwanted Target ：Each One Target or All Target at once
(2) Tracking
・Number of Targets ：50 Targets (Auto Tracking)
・Acquisition and
Tracking Range ：32 NM
(3) Presentation
・Display Modes ：TM (True Motion) / RM (Relative Motion)
・Bearing Modes ：North-up / Head-up / Course-up
・Vector Modes ：True/Relative Display
Vector Length：Adjustable from 1 to 60 min
・Past Position Display ：True / Relative Display
Number of Dots：6 points
Display Time 30sec, 1 min, 2 min, 4 min
・Time to Display Vector ：Within 1 min
・Time to Stabilize Vector ：Within 3 min
(4) Alarm
・Guard Zone ：2
・Setting Ranges ：Guard Zone 1 (0.5 - 32 NM),
Guard Zone 2 (0.5 - 32 NM)
・Alarm Indication ： mark on LCD with Visible / Audible alarm
(5) Safe Limits (CPA/TCPA)
・Setting Condition ：CPA LIMIT (0.1 - 9.9 NM)
TCPA LIMIT (1 - 99 min)
・Alarm Condition ：
Safe ・CPA>CPA LIMIT

Target ・ 0>TCPA
・ TCPA>TCPA LIMIT
Danger ・ CPA CPA LIMIT，
Target 0 TCPA TCPA LIMIT
・Alarm Display ：
Status LCD Symbol Alarm Buzzer

Safe Ship
Danger Ship
〇 OFF
CPA／TCPA
OFF
ON
１
１
・Lost Target ： mark on LCD
Visible / Audible Alarms
11-12
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(6) Data Indication

・Target Data ：Simultaneous and Continuous Display for
2 targets
True Bearing, Range, True Course,
True Speed, CPA, TCPA, BCR and BCT
・Own Ship's Data ：Course and Speed
(7) Trial Maneuver Manual Setting
・Trial Course ：0°- 360°
・Trial Speed ：0 - 100 knots
(8) Accuracy of Display ：Complied with IMO Technical Requirements
(9) System Failure Alarm ：Visible / Audible Alarms
(10) Speed Input ：Manual/Auto(log)
11.13 PERFORMANCE MONITOR（NJU-63）････････

Dimensions ：Height 56 × Width 150 × Depth 249 (mm)
Mass ：Approx. 1.5kg
Operation Frequency ：3050±30MHz
11.14 PERFORMANCE MONITOR（NJU-64）････････

Dimensions ：Height 56 × Width 150 × Depth 215 (mm)
Mass ：Approx. 1.5kg
Operation Frequency ：9410±30MHz
１
１
11-13
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Radar System Composition..................................................
Table A-1 S band System Composition
Equipment JMA-9933-SA JMA-9932-SA
Type of Scanner NKE-1079(*1) NKE-1075A(*1)
Type of Performance Monitor NJU-63 NJU-63
Type of Transmitter-receiver NTG-3037 ------
Unit
Type of Modulator Unit NMA-446 NMA-487
Type of Receiver Unit NRG-88 NRG-222
Type of Display Unit NCD-4263(*2)
*1 NKE-1079-1 (110V AC 60 Hz 1φ)

NKE-1079-2F (220V AC 60 Hz 3φ)
NKE-1079-D (110V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
NKE-1079-2DF (220V AC 60 Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)
NKE-1075A-1 (100/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
NKE-1075A-2F (220/230V AC 60 Hz 3φ)
NKE-1075A-D (110/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
NKE-1075A-2DF (220/230V AC 60 Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)
*2 NCD-4263 ：Self-standing type

NCD-4263T：Desktop type (NWZ-158T: Monitor Unit, NDC-1279T: Control Unit,
NCE-7721: Keyboard Unit) (Option)
Note: The ARPA unit have the approbation by the Ministry of Transport
Automatic equipment for Prevention of collision JAS-9900.
Table A-2 X band System Composition
Equipment JMA-9923-7 JMA-9923-9 JMA-9922-6
JMA-9922-9XA
XA XA XA
Type of Scanner NKE-1089- NKE-1089- NKE-1087- NKE-1087-9(*4)
7(*1) 9(*2) 6(*3)
Type of Performance NJU-64
Monitor
Type of Modulator Unit NMA-449
Type of Receiver Unit NRG-98/154
Type of Display Unit NCD-4263(*5)
*1 NKE-1089-71/72 (7ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)

NKE-1089-72F (7ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)
NKE-1089-71D/72D (7ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)
(Option with deicing heater collar)
NKE-1089-72DF (7ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)
*2 NKE-1089-91/92 (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)

NKE-1089-92F (9ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)
NKE-1089-91D/92D (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
*3 NKE-1087-61/62 (6ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)

NKE-1087-62F (6ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)
NKE-1087-61D/62D (6ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
*4 NKE-1087-91/92 (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)

NKE-1087-92F (9ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)
NKE-1087-91D/92D (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)
*5 NCD-4263 ：Self-standing type

NCD-4263T：Desktop type (NWZ-158T: Monitor Unit, NDC-1279T: Control Unit,
NCE-7721: Keyboard Unit)(Option)
Note: The ARPA unit have the approbation by the Ministry of Transport
Automatic equipment for Prevention of collision JAS-9800.
A-2
Radar System Circuit Block.................................................
Table A-3 3-unit Type Scanner (S band)
Type of Scanner NKE-1079-1 NKE-1079-2F NKE-1079-1D NKE-1079-2DF
(100V AC,1φ) (220V AC,3φ) (100V AC,1φ) (220V AC,3φ)
Inner Antenna CQC-764 CQC-764 CQC-764 CQC-764
Driving Part CBP-129 CBP-128 CBP-129 CBP-128
Heater Cont. --- --- CCK-751 CCK-751
("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont：CCK-751）
Table A-4 2-unit Type Scanner (S band)

Type of Scanner NKE-1075-1 NKE-1075-2 NKE-1075-2F
(100V AC,1φ) (230V AC,1φ) (230V AC,3φ)
Inner Antenna CQC-1004 CQC-1004 CQC-1004
Driving Part CBP-129 CBP-146 CBP-128
IF AMP circuit CAE-344-4 CAE-344-4 CAE-344-4
Inner Receiver Unit CMA-554 CMA-554 CMA-554
Receiver Unit RNG-222
RF AMP circuit CAF-424 CAF-424 CAF-424
LO OSC circuit CCH-205 CCH-205 CCH-205
Bias circuit CBD-1274 CBD-1274 CBD-1274
Limiter circuit CNL-23 CNL-23 CNL-23
Modulator Unit NMA-534
Modulator circuit CPA-209 CPA-209 CPA-209
Inner Modulator circuit CNM-239 CNM-239 CNM-239
Filter circuit CFR-161 CFR-161 CFR-161
T/R control circuit CMC-1205 CMC-1205 CMC-1205
Power circuit CBD-1682 CBD-1682 CBD-1682
Relay circuit CSC-632 CSC-632 CSC-632
("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont：CCK-751）
Table A-5 3-unit Type Scanner (X band)
Type of NKE-1089-71/91 NKE-1089-72/92 NKE-1089-72F/92F

Scanner (100/110VAC,1φ) (220/230VAC,1φ) (220/230VAC,3φ)
("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont：CCK-751)
Table A-6 2-unit Type Scanner (X band)

NKE-1087-6 NKE-1087-6 NKE-1087-6
Type of Scanner
(100/110VAC,1φ) (220/230VAC,1φ) (220/230VAC,3φ)
Receiver Unit RNG-222
IF AMP circuit CAE-344 CAE-344 CAE-344
Inner Receiver Unit CMA-588 CMA-588 CMA-588
Modulator circuit CPA-209-1 CPA-209-1 CPA-209-1
Inner Modulator Unit CNM-234 CNM-234 CNM-234
Filter circuit CFR-161 CFR-161 CFR-161
T/R control circuit CMC-1025 CMC-1025 CMC-1025
Power circuit CBD-1645 CBD-1645 CBD-1645
Relay circuit CSC-632 CSC-632 CSC-632
("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont：CCK-751)
A-4
Table A-7 3-unit Type Transmitter-receiver Unit Composition (S band)
Type of Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037
・Modulator circuit CPA-209
・Filter circuit CFR-161
・Inner Modulator Unit CNM-236
Receiver Unit NRG-88
・IF AMP circuit CAE-344-1
・RF AMP circuit CAF-424
・LO OSC circuit CGH-205
・Bias circuit CBD-1274
・Limiter circuit CNL-23
・Inner receiver unit CMA-554
・Power circuit CBD-1682
・T/R control circuit CMC-1205
・Relay circuit CSC-632
・Inner transmitter-receiver unit CQC-1093
Table A-8 3-unit Type Transmitter-receiver Unit Composition (X band)

Type of Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3028
・Modulator CPA-209-1
・Filter circuit CFR-161
・Inner modulator unit CNM-235
Receiver Unit NRG-98
・IF AMP CAE-344
・Inner receiver unit CMA-588
・Power circuit CBD-1682
・T/R control circuit CMC-1205
・Relay circuit CSC-632
・Inner transmitter-receiver unit CQC-1092
Table A-9 NCD-4263 Type Display Unit Circuit Compositions
Display Unit NCD-4263 JRC Code Remarks
1 Inner display unit CWB-1256
2 NSK/LOG I/F unit
CMJ-462A
NSK/LOG I/F circuit
3 Rack unit
Terminal board circuit CQD-1949
Display control circuit CMC-1218
Radar process circuit CDC-1209
Mother board CQC-1094
4 Inner keyboard unit CWB-1211-PSO/RST
Panel circuit 1 CCK-900
Connection cable CFQ-6908-RSO/RST
5 Monitor unit
Case part CWB-1255
Operation unit CCK-906
6 Inner power supply unit
Power supply circuit CBD-1661
7 Interswitch circuit CCL-291
(NQE-3141) (Option)
A-6
Table A-10 NDC-1279 Type Control Unit Circuit Compositions
Control Unit NDC-1279 JRC Code Remarks
1 Inner display unit CWB-1256
2 NSK/LOG I/F unit CMJ-462A
NSK/LOG I/F circuit
3 Rack unit
Terminal board circuit CQD-1949
Display control circuit CMC-1218
Radar process circuit CDC-1209
Mother board CQC-1094
4 Inner power supply circuit
Power supply circuit CBD-1661
5 Interswitch circuit CCL-291
(NQE-3141) (Option)
Table A-11 NCE-7721 Type Keyboard Unit Circuit Compositions

Keyboard Unit NCE-7721 JRC Code Remarks
1 Inner keyboard unit CWB-1211-RSO/RST
Connection cable CFQ-6908-RSO/RST (Option)
Table A-12 NWZ-158 Type Monitor Unit Circuit Compositions

Monitor Unit NWZ-158 JRC Code Remarks
1 Monitor unit
Case part CWB-1255T
Operation unit CCK-906
INTERSWITCH
(NQE-3141)
OPERATION MANUAL
1. GENERAL........................................................................1
1.1 OUTLINE ......................................................................1
1.2 INTERSWITCH CONSTRUCTION ......................................1
2. OPERATIONS..................................................................2
2.1 OPERATION FLOW ........................................................2
2.2 SUB1 MENU .................................................................3
2.3 ISW (INTERSWITCH) MENU ...........................................4
2.3 CHANGING INTERSWITCH PATTERNS .............................6
3. REFERENCES...............................................................10
A-8
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1. GENERAL
1.1 Outline･････････････････････････････････････････････
The NQE-3141 interswitch allows interconnections to be changed freely between

bridge-installed multiple radar display units and multiple scanner units different in characteristics.
The NQE-3141 can change the interconnections between multiple radar display units and
multiple transmitter-receiver/scanner units (in the remainder of this manual, referred to as MTRs)
in the JMA-9900 Series radar system.
It is possible to change the interconnections between up to eight combinations of units: (two units
in the case of a built-in type) x (four units in the case of a separate type).
1.2 Interswitch Construction･････････････････････････････

The Interswitch Kit is incorporated in the display unit. (Option)
The number of combined display units and MTRs according to the interswitch kit is different
between the 2-units system and the 3-units system.
The distinction between the 2-units system and the 3-units system is determined by the internal
settings.
The pattern switchover operations can be exercised simply and quickly according to the menus
displayed on the display unit. The interseitch patterns as shown below are displayed at the upper
left of the radar display. (The position filled on the mark indicates the position of the display unit
currently operated.)
Radar system of
2-radar indicators
...... Interswitch patterns
(Combinations of six patterns) MTR L R
Unit arrangement (towards the ship's heading) Display unit L R

MTR (L) MTR (R)
No.1 No.2
No.3 No.4
Display unit (L) Display unt (R) No.5 No.6
Radar system of
3-radar indicators
...... Interswitch patterns MTR L C R
(Combinations of twelve patterns)
Display unit L C R
Unit arrangement (towards the ship's headhing)
MTR (L) MTR (C) MTR (R)
No.1 No.2 No.7 No.8
No.3 No.4 No.9 No.10

APPENDIX
No.5 No.6 No.11 No.12

Display unit (L) Display unit (C) Display unit (R)
A-1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2. OPERATIONS
When switching over the interswitch patterns, first set the system to the STBY mode and
proceed the switch operations on the operation panel of the Display Unit as shown in the
operation flow below.
2.1 Operation Flow･･････････････････････････････････････

The following flowchart shows the operation flow from menu opening to menu closing.
〔Open of software button〕〔Open of the Sub1 Menu〕
① Click the ① Click MENU , then SUB1 MENU
on the upper left of the screen.

〔The ISW Menu will appear〕
(This software button is differing in
selecting pattern. This picture is ① Click ISW .
2UNIT, No.4.)
〔Changing interswitch patterns〕 The radar will be placed in

the standby mode. The
changed pattern diagram
① Click the pattern selection menu number.
in the center of the display
Click SET . as well as the change
② Click EXIT . menu at the right of the
display will be displayed.
〔Closing the interswitch menu〕
① Click EXIT .
〔The Sub1 Menu will be closed〕
① Click MENU .
APPENDIX
A-2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2.2 Software button /Sub1 Menu･･････････････････････････

Refer to: (A) [Sub1 Menu display･･･Selection of an ISW Menu]
Open of software button
Click the on the upper left of the screen.
Open the ISW Menu.

This software button is differing in selecting pattern. This picture is 2UNIT, No.4.
Open of the Sub1 Menu
① Click Menu .
② Click SUB1 MENU .

Sub1 Menu
SUB1 MENU
1. SETTING1
2. LEVEL
3. NAV/MAP INFO
4. TRACK
5. ARPA
6. PIN
7. ISW
8. EBL MANEUVER
9. SUB2 MENU
０． EXIT
The Sub1 Menu will be closed
③ Click Menu . Or click EXIT .

APPENDIX
A-3
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2.3 ISW (Interswitch) Menu･･･････････････････････････････
Refer to: (B) [ISW MENU 1･･･2-units (No.1 to No.6)]

(C) [ISW MENU 2･･･3-units (No.1 to No.6)]
(D) [ISW MENU 3･･･3-units (No.7 to No.12)]
The Interswitch Menu can be selected only when the radar system is set to on the standby mode.
Although the Interswitch Menu can be opened during transmission, the radar system will stop
transmission and enter the standby state automatically.
The Sub1 Menu will appear
The ISW Menu will appear
③ Click ISW .
ISW Menu (on display right)
(2-unit system) ←Set with the equipped (2-unit/ 3-unit)→ (3-unit system)
ＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨ
Ｎo.１Ｎo.２Ｎo.１Ｎo.２
Ｎo.３Ｎo.４ 2UNIT Ｎo.３Ｎo.４ 3UNIT
1. 1. PREVIOUS/NEXT
2. SET 2. SET
0. EXIT 0. EXIT
Ｎo.５Ｎo.６Ｎo.５Ｎo.６
Pattern No. Unit No. of radar system

The number surrounded by a
frame is the number to be
APPENDIX
selected.
A-4
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
ISW Menu (Pattern Diagram)(on display center)
The pattern diagrams for the 2-units sysem is different from the pattern diagrams for the 3-units
system.
・6 pattern diagrams are displayed gor 2-units system.
・12 pattern diagrams (on two pages with 6 patterns per page) are displayed for 3-units system.
In the pattern diagram.

・The pattern diagram dark filled represents the current pattern.
・The display unit currently in operation is highlighted in the reverse black/white view.
・A display unit or MTR marked with“×”is not connected or has a failure.
・The pattern diagram with the mark“×”cannot be selected as described above.
The ISW Menu will be closed
② Click EXIT .
③ Click EXIT .
× The MTR not-connected or

at fault.
(× mark draw)
Ｎo.１
The MTR currently operated.

(filled in reverse video)
APPENDIX
A-5
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2.3 Changing Interswitch Patterns････････････････････････
The Sub1 Menu will appear
The ISW Menu will appear
Select an ISW pattern
① Click + or - to select Pattern No.
ISW Menu (on display right)
(2-unit system) (3-unit system)
ＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨ
Ｎo.１Ｎo.２Ｎo.１Ｎo.２
Ｎo.３Ｎo.４ 2UNIT Ｎo.３Ｎo.４ 3UNIT
1. 1. PREVIOUS/NEXT
2. SET 2. SET
0. EXIT 0. EXIT
Ｎo.５Ｎo.６Ｎo.５Ｎo.６
Click + or - , and the pattern diagram will be enclosed by a square line,

which signifies“selecting”.
3-unit system is click PEVIOUS/NEXT ,selectid No.7 to No.12
② Click SET .
(SET is indicated to selecting pattern.)

APPENDIX
A-6
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Message Area (on display lower right)

“ISW END”is blinking and an alarm buzzer sounds.

The selected pattern deagram is blinking for about 5 seconds, and if it is
established, the pattern is selected.
Note that if the seitchover fails, the selected pattern will not appear. The
blinking is stopped after about 5 second and the previous pattern diagram
will reappear. In this case."ISW TIME OUT"will appear on the message area
on the lower right of the display and an alarm sound is given.
In this state, re-select the pattern diagram and seitch over the units. If the
re-selection fails, contact JRC service depot.
Pre-heat Time Countdown (on display center or the upper part)
When the seitchover operation is completed, the timer at the display center
or the upper part will start the countdown. At this time, the radar operation
state at the upper right of the display indicates "PREHEAT".
If the count "0:00" is indicated, the indication at the upper right on the
radar display is changed from "PREHEAT" to "STANDBY".
The ISW Menu will be closed

APPENDIX
A-7
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
350 000 010
340 020
TRUE 137.1 ° HDG 245.0 °
1 SP
330 030 4.514 nm SPEED 15.0 kts
TRANSMIT 320 040 N 35゜31.675' COG 279.1 °
X-BAND E139゜43.773' SOG 9.2 kts
SET 30.0 °
310 050
OFF DRIFT 9.0 kts
CENTER
U 2003 / 03 / 18 14：36
HL OFF OWN N 35°35.0000'
300 060
CPA MAN E139°40.0000'
RING ARPA STAB GND
VECTOR T 6 min
290 070
LIMIT
1.5 nm 10 min
PAST POSN T 1 min
280 080 GUARD ZONE 1 2
SUB1 MENU
270 090 1. SETTING1

2. LEVEL
3. NAV/MAP INFO
260 100
4. TRACK
5. ARPA
6. PIN
250 110 7. ISW
8. EBL MANEUVER
F MAP
9. SUB2 MENU
ACT 240 120
SHIFT
DACT DEPTH
100m 0. EXIT
IR 230 130 DAY1
SEA 220 140 FUNC3 NAV TOKYO
RAIN EBL1 T 037.0 °C PIN
TRAILS 0.5min T 200 160
VRM1 1.70 nm
PROC PROC1 ENH OFF VRM2 2.20 nm ACK
190 180 170 No Alarm
(A) [Sub1 Menu display･･･Selection of an ISW Menu]
ＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨ OS STAB GND

HDG 245.0 °
SPEED 15.0 kts
MAN WATER
COG 279.1 °
SOG 9.2 kts
SET 30.0 °
DRIFT 9.0 kts
U 2003 / 03 / 18 14：36
OWN N 35°35.0000'
MAN E139°40.0000'
ARPA STAB GND
VECTOR T 6 min
LIMIT
Ｎo.１Ｎo.２ 1.5 nm 10 min
PAST POSN T 1 min
GUARD ZONE 1 2
SUB1 MENU
1. SETTING1
2. LEVEL
3. NAV/MAP INFO
4. TRACK
5. ARPA
Ｎo.３Ｎo.４ 6. PIN
2UNIT
7. ISW
8. EBL MANEUVER
1. 9. SUB2 MENU
2. SET
0. EXIT 0. EXIT
DISPLAY INFO
NAV TOKYO
PIN
MENU PI GZ TEST
Ｎo.５Ｎo.６
No Alarm ACK
(B) [ISW MENU 1･･･2-units (No.1 to No.6)]

APPENDIX
The current connection pattern: No.1

The current connection pattern to be selected: No.4
A-8
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

HDG 245.0 °
SPEED 15.0 kts
MAN WATER
COG 279.1 °
SOG 9.2 kts
SET 30.0 °
DRIFT 9.0 kts
U 2003 / 03 / 18 14：36
OWN N 35°35.0000'
MAN E139°40.0000'
ARPA STAB GND
VECTOR T 6 min
LIMIT
Ｎo.１Ｎo.２ 1.5 nm 10 min
PAST POSN T 1 min
GUARD ZONE 1 2
SUB1 MENU
1. SETTING1
2. LEVEL
3. NAV/MAP INFO
4. TRACK
5. ARPA
Ｎo.４ 6. PIN
Ｎo.３ 3UNIT
7. ISW
8. EBL MANEUVER
1. PREVIOUS/NEXT
9. SUB2 MENU
2. SET
0. EXIT 0. EXIT
DISPLAY INFO
NAV TOKYO
PIN
MENU PI GZ TEST
Ｎo.５Ｎo.６
ACK
No Alarm
(C) [ISW MENU 2･･･3-units (No.1 to No.6)]

The current connection pattern: No.1

HDG 245.0 °
SPEED 15.0 kts
MAN WATER
COG 279.1 °
SOG 9.2 kts
SET 30.0 °
DRIFT 9.0 kts
U 2003 / 03 / 18 14：36
OWN N 35°35.0000'
MAN E139°40.0000'
ARPA STAB GND
VECTOR T 6 min
LIMIT
Ｎo.７Ｎo.８ 1.5 nm 10 min
PAST POSN T 1 min
GUARD ZONE 1 2
SUB1 MENU
1. SETTING1
2. LEVEL
3. NAV/MAP INFO
4. TRACK
5. ARPA
Ｎo.10 6. PIN
Ｎo.９ 3UNIT
7. ISW
8. EBL MANEUVER
1. PREVIOUS/NEXT 9. SUB2 MENU
2. SET
0. EXIT 0. EXIT
DISPLAY INFO
NAV TOKYO
PIN
MENU PI GZ TEST
Ｎo.11 Ｎo.12
ACK
No Alarm
APPENDIX
(D) [ISW MENU 3･･･3-units (No.7 to No.12)]

A-9
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3. REFERENCES
Preheating Time after Pattern Selection
After switching over the interswitch patterns, it is necessary to wait for the time as
mentioned below because the pre-heat time is different from the previous
interconnection between the MTR and the display unit. This measure is taken for
protecting the electronic tube emitting radar pulses.
(a) Not changed to the new interconnection condition:.........................No preheat
time
(b) Changed to the new interconnection condition.
However, the MTR was used before change:...........................................30
seconds
(c) Changed to the new interconnection condition.
However, the MTR was used before change:.............................................3
minutes
Notes on Pattern Selection
Immediately after switching over the patterns, the try to select another pattern may fail.
This means that even If the pattern switchover is completed, it takes some time to
prepare for the next interswitch operation. In this case, "ISW BUSY" will be indicated in
the message area on the display lower right, and the interswitch operation is not
available.
Alarm Sound Control
The interseitch alarm continues to sound for about 5 seconds. In setting the alarm sound
level, open the Sub1 Menu, press [2] switch to select the "5.BUZZER" in LEVEL Menu.
When stopping the alarm sound immediately after it sounds, press [ALARM ACK] switch.
Even when the alarm sound stops, a certain message will remain in the message area.
Notes on Master/Slave Connection
The Master/Slave connection is a configuration in which the Display Unit connected to the
Scanner Unit is the Master Unit, while the Display Unit connected to the Master Unit is a
Slave Unit. Of the interswitch patterns, the following pattern numbers includes the
Master/Slave connection:
a) 2-unit System: No.3, No.4, No.5 and No.6
b) 3-unit System: No.4, No.5, No.6, No.7, No.8, No.9, No.10 and No.11
If the Master Display Unit is not in the transmission state, it is impossible to set the Slave
Display Unit to the transmission state, If the Master Display Unit is changed from the
transmission to the standby mode, the Slave Display Unit will also be set to the standby
mode forcibly. In this status, "MTR ST-BY" will be indicated in the message area and the
APPENDIX
alarm will beep.
A-10
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The Slave Display Unit will not change the radar video even if the tuning control is adjusted
because the tuning is controlled by the Master Display Unit. The tuning indicator at the
upper left of the display will show "SLAVE".
The change of the range scale on the Slave Display Unit depends upon the range scale on
the Master Display Unit. In general, the Slave Display Unit can not change the range scale
into a higher one than that on the Master Display Unit. However, a higher range scale may
be selected by the Slave Display Unit if the pulse length/repetition frequency is the same as
on the Master Display.
Scanner Safety Switch
If the Scanner Units are changed over in the condition that the safety switch of one Scanner
Unit is set to "OFF" while the other is set to "ON", "SSW OFF" will be indicated on both the
display.
APPENDIX
A-11
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
◎ Setting the DIP switches of the interswitch circuit (CCL-304)
Set DIP switches SW11, SW12, and SW13 as follows:
SW 11 SW 13 SW 12
Interswitch circuit board

CCL-304
(1) Setting SW11 (Expansion mode setting and master/slave setting)
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
Expansion mode setting

4 Description Select OFF to connect up to four
units.
ON Expansion mode
OFF Normal mode
Master/slave setting
In expansion mode, select ON
3 Description
for the ISW circuit board at the
ON Slave slave side.
OFF Master
Not used
1, 2 Description Select OFF.
ON Not used
OFF Not used
APPENDIX
A-12
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(2) Setting SW12 (Radar connection setting)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF Radar connection setting

1 ON No. 1 display unit connection
OFF No. 1 display unit non-connection
2 ON No. 1 scanner unit connection
OFF No. 1 scanner unit non-connection
(3) SW13 (Not used)
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
1, 2, 3, 4 Not used
Note: Set the DIP switches of the ISW circuit in accordance with the INSTALLATION
MANUAL, and ensure safety when and before setting the DIP switches.
APPENDIX
A-13
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
JMA-9900 series Radar
INSTALLATION OF AIS
APPENDIX
A-14
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the optional AIS information display kit for JRC marine radar. This
product provides the AIS information display function, which is optionally available on the JMA-9900
Radar series.
●Read this operation manual carefully before use.

●This manual describes operations of the optional AIS display function only.
Please refer to JAM-9900 series operation manual for operation of other radar functions.
Please keep this operation manual for reference.
●There are two types of AIS interfaces for JMA-9900 Series Radar as follows.
JMA-9900 TYPE AIS I/F Type

Self-standing type NQA-4172*, 7ZCRD0967
Desktop type NQA-4172*, NQA-4172-6
* NQA-4172 : Base Kit (Common unit for both types of JMA-9900 radar.)
Note
This optional AIS kit was checked the operation only by the connection with JRC AIS（JHS-180）.
The capacity and limitations of the system and operational limitations
1. Vectors of ARPA target are displayed by dashed lines instead of solid lines to keep
consistency with those of AIS targets.
2. Maximum 50 AIS targets are displayed in this system. Three kinds of AIS target filter are
provide to prioritize on displaying AIS targets effectively. See 1-10 in this manual.
3. Note that following operational restrictions in this system before using.
1) An AIS function cannot turn ON
・When "MANUAL" was selected as a speed input source.
・When SET and DRIFT was set in “LOG” speed mode
2) "LOG" speed mode cannot be chosen as a speed source.
・When an AIS function was ON and SET and DRIFT were set.
3) "MANUAL" speed mode cannot be selected..
・When an AIS function was ON.
4) SET／DRIFT (Current correction) function cannot turn ON.
・When an AIS function was ON and speed was set as "LOG".
APPENDIX
A-15
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Table of Contents
Introduction …………………………………………………………………… A-15
１． AIS Information Display Function

1-1. AIS Software Buttons ………………………………………… A-18
1-2. Initial Setting
■GPS Antenna installation position Setting …………………… A-19
■Collision Decision Criteria Setting …………………………..……… A-20
1-3. AIS Function ON/OFF ………………………………………… A-21
1-4. AIS Target Activation
■Manual Target Activation ………………………………………………… A-22
■Automatic Target Activation …………………………………………..… A-23
1-5. AIS Target Deactivation …………………………………………… A-24
1-6. AIS Symbol Display ON/OFF ………………………………………… A-25
1-7. ARPA Symbol Display ON/OFF ………………………………………… A-26
1-8. AIS Target Data Display
■Types of Data Display ……………………………………………..…… A-27
■Target Data Display …………………………………………… A-27
■Target Data Display Cancel …………………………………………… A-28
■Target Data Display with simple/detail mode …………………… A-28
1-9. Definitions of AIS Target Symbols ……………………………… A-29
1-10. AIS Filter Setting
■Meaning of AIS Filter …………………………………………………… A-31
■AIS Filter Type Selection…………………………………………………… A-31
■AIS Filter Setting …………………………………………………… A-33
■AIS Filter Area Display ………………………………………… A-34
1-11. AIS and ARPA Target Association Condition ……………… A-35
1-12. AIS Lost Target ………………………………………… A-36
1-13. Conditions of AIS Symbol Display
■Maximum AIS Target Number and Display Priority ……… A-37
■AIS Target Vector Display ……………………………………..……… A-37
1-14.Alarm Display …………………………………………………… A-38
1-15.Operational Restrictions ………………………………………………… A-39
２．Basic Operation with Track Ball ……………………………… A-40

APPENDIX
３．Installation of AIS Information Display Kit

3-1. Composition of AIS Information Display Kit …………………… A-41
3-2. AIS I/F Connection …………………………………… A-41
A-16
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3-3.Set up after Installation ………………………………………… A-42

3-4.Turn on and Check ………………………………………… A-42
APPENDIX
A-17
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
１． AIS Information Display Function
1-1 AIS Software Buttons
When AIS I/F is connected, the AIS software button as shown below is displayed on a radar
screen. By operating these buttons, ON/OFF of an AIS function, activation or deactivation of a AIS
symbol, and the display ON/OFF of ARPA-AIS symbol can be performed.
350 000 010

340 020
SP TRUE 137.1 ° HDG 245.0 °
1 330 030 4.514 nm SPEED 15.0 kts
TRANSMIT 320 040 N 35゜31.675' COG 279.1 °
X-BAND E139゜43.773' SOG 9.2 kts
SET 30.0 °
OFF
310 1 050 DRIFT 9.0 kts
CENTER
U 2003 / 03 / 18 14：36
HL OFF
OWN N 35°35.0000'
300 060 CPA MAN E139°40.0000'
RING ARPA STAB GND
VECTOR T 6 min
290 070
LIMIT
1.5 nm 10 min
PAST POSN T 1 min
280 080 GUARD ZONE 1 2
TARGET ID　　　　　　No 2　
BRG 264 °
RANGE 3.5 nm
270 090
2 COURSE 281 °
6 SPEED 9.3 kts
3 CPA 0.4 nm
TCPA -2581.4 min
260 100 BCR nm
BCT min
TARGET ID　　　　　　No 1　
5 BRG 344 °
250 110
RANGE 3.8 nm
F MAP COURSE 279 °
ACT 4 SHIFT SPEED 9.2 kts
DACT 240 120 CPA 1.0 nm
DEPTH TCPA 5988.6 min
100m BCR nm
IR 230 130 DAY1 BCT min
SEA 220 140 FUNC3 NAV TOKYO
RAIN EBL1 T 037.0 °C PIN
TRAILS 0.5min T 200 VRM1 1.70 nm
160 ACK
PROC PROC1 ENH OFF 190 180 170 VRM2 2.20 nm No Alarm
Example of Display with Optional AIS I/F
F ①AIS FUNCTION ON/OFF BUTTON

ACT ②AIS ACTIVATE
DACT ③AIS DEACTIVATE BUTTON
④AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
⑤ARPA SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
AIS Software buttons
APPENDIX
A-18
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-2 Initial Setting
■GPS Antenna installation position Setting

The distance of the GSP antenna from the position of the radar scanner should be set.
Operation ADJUST
1. Left-click MENU on the screen.
procedure ARPA／AIS
MAIN menu opens.
AIS
1.GSP ANT. LOCATION
2. Left-click CODE INPUT.
a: + 100
CODE INPUT menu opens.
b: + 100
a
(-500 to +500[m])
3. Left-click ０ → END .
ADJUST menu opens.
b
4. Left-click ARPA／AIS .
ARPA/AIS menu opens.
5. Left-click AIS .
0. EXIT
AIS menu opens.
6. The GPS antenna rough direction from the radar scanner is chosen with the GPS
button “ . “.
7. Left-click the button in the a: box of "1.GPS ANT．LOCATION".

The distance of the GPS antenna from the radar scanner in bow-stern
direction should be entered. (The direction of the bow side is plus and the
direction of the stern side is minus.)
8. Left-click the button in the b: box of "1.GPS ANT．LOCATION".

The distance of the GPS antenna from the radar scanner in port-starboard
direction should be entered. (The direction of starboard side is plus and the
direction of the port side is minus.
Note１
Unless it performs this setup correctly, the position of an AIS symbol may not
coincide with the radar echo position of the target.
Note 2
When this setup is performed, offset is added to the data received from GPS, and
APPENDIX
the compensated latitude and longitude are displayed as own ship position. It
would be the radar scanner installation position.
A-19
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■Collision Decision Criteria Setting (CPA/TCPA)

The collision decision criteria CPA/TCPA of ARPA target are used for AIS target as well.
Operation SUB1 MENU

procedure 1. Left-click MENU on the screen. ARPA
MAIN menu opens. 1. CPA LIMIT
△
0.1-99nm 1.5 ▽
2. TCPA LIMIT
2. Left-click SUB1 MENU → ARPA／AIS.
△
1-99min 10 ▽
ARPA menu opens.
3. CPA RING
OFF ON
3. Set CPA LIMIT (Closest Point of Approach)
4. TRIAL
(1) Left-click the "1.CPA LIMIT" edit box. 5. GATE
2. NARROW ▽
CPA LIMIT will be selected. 6. AIS　SETTING

The numeric input dialogue box is
opened.
0. EXIT
(2) Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the + or -
keys, then press END to input.
4. Set TCPA LIMIT (Time to CPA)
(1) Left-click the "2.TCPA LIMIT" edit box.
TCPA LIMIT will be selected.

(2) Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the + or -
keys, then press "END" to input.
For further details, please refer to Chapter 5 of a JMA-9900 series Instruction Manual.
APPENDIX
A-20
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-3. AIS Function ON/OFF
■ON/OFF of AIS function is set up. There are two methods to switch ON/OFF of AIS function.
Operation
procedure
(Method-1 : With the AIS software button on screen.)

Put the arrow cursor on the F button at the lower left a screen and click the left
button of the track ball. Every time the left section button is pressed, AIS function on/off
changes alternatively as follows.
a. When the symbol is displayed in the bright color -----AIS function is ON.
b. When the symbol is displayed in the dark color -------AIS function is OFF.
(Method-2 : With the menu operation.)

SUB1 MENU
ARPA
Main menu opens.
1. CPA LIMIT
△
0.1-99nm 1.5 ▽
2. Left-click SUB1 MENU . 2. TCPA LIMIT

SUB1 menu opens. 1-99min 10 △
▽
3. CPA RING
3. Left-click ARPA/AIS . OFF ON
ARPA/AIS menu opens. 4. TRIAL
5. GATE
4. Left-click AIS SETTING. 2. NARROW ▽
AIS SETTING menu opens. 6. AIS　SETTING
5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "1.AIS FUNCTION".

"1.AIS FUNCTION" is changed to on or off. 0. EXIT
Note:
When AIS function is OFF, no AIS symbol is displayed and all AIS functions are completely
turned off. Even if there is a dangerous target, AIS function would not be turned on
automatically.
APPENDIX
A-21
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1
1-4 AIS Target Activation
■Manual Target Activation

An AIS target is activated by either of the mehod-1 or the method–2 as follows, and then the
vector and the heading of the target are displayed.
Operation
(Method-1 : With the software button on the screen)
procedure
1. Put the arrow cursor on the ACT button at the lower left of the screen
and click the left button of the track ball.
Cursor mode ”AIS ACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the screen.
2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be activated and press the track ball
section left button .
The selected AIS target is activated.
(Method-2 : With the menu operation)

Main menu opens.
2. Left-click SUB1 MENU.

SUB1 menu opens.
3. Left-click AIS/ARPA.
4. Left-click AIS SETTING.

AIS SETTING menu opens.
5. Left-click "ON" of "2.AIS ACTIVATE".

Cursor mode ”AIS ACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the
screen.
6. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be activated and press the track ball section left
button .
The selected AIS target is activated.
APPENDIX
※1
Refer to "1.9 Definitions of AIS Target Symbols” about the activated target.
A-22
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■Automatic Target Activation

The AIS target in a guard zone is activated automatically and the vector and the heading of the
target are displayed. The guard zone for AIS target activation is the same zone used in ARPA. For
further details of guard zone setting, please see “Set Guard Zones” at Chapter 3.4 of the
instruction manual of JMA-9900 series radar. Dangerous AIS targets are also activated
automatically.
Note:
・When the manual ‘ACTIVATION’ operation is performed at the position where no AIS sleeping
symbol is displayed, an AIS target is searched at the near area pointed by the cursor “+”. The
following “search mark” is displayed.
SEARCH
Search Mark
A activated target symbol is displayed when an AIS target is found near the “search mark”. Then
the “search mark” is removed. On the other hand, no AIS target found in approx. 4 minutes, the
“search mark” disappears.
・When no vector of the activated target is displayed, please refer to "1-13 Conditions of AIS
Symbol Display."
・No activated symbol may be displayed if the priority of the search target is lower than existing
activated AIS targets displayed on the screen. Refer to “1-13 Conditions of AIS Symbol
Display”.
APPENDIX
A-23
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-5 AIS Target Deactivation
When an AIS target is deactivated, the vector and the heading are deleted as a
2
sleeping target.
Operation
1. Put the arrow cursor on the DACT button and click the track ball section left
procedure
button.
Cursor mode ”AIS DEACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the screen.
2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be deactivated and press the track ball
The selected AIS target is deactivated.

Main menu opens.
2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .

SUB1 menu opens.
3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .

5. Left-click "ON" of "3.AIS DEACTIVATE".

Cursor mode ”AIS DEACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the
screen.
6. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be deactivated and press the track ball section
left button . The selected AIS target is deactivated.
Note
This operation is only available for an activated target.
APPENDIX
※2
Refer to "1.9 Definitions of AIS Target Symbols” about the sleeping target.
A-24
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1.6 AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF
AIS symbol display is changed to on or off by the procedure method-1 or method-2 as follows.
Operation
procedure

Put the arrow cursor on the button and click the track ball section left button. Each
time the left button is pushed, AIS symbol display is changed to on or off.
When the button is displayed in the bright colour ----- AIS Symbol display is on.
When the button is displayed in the dark colour ----- AIS Symbol display is off.

Main menu opens.

SUB1 menu opens.
3. Left-click ARPA /AIS .


5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "4.AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY".

AIS symbol display is changed to on or off.
Note
The ARPA symbol display can only turned OFF when the AIS function id ON.
Turning the AIS function OFF will automatically return ARPA symbols display back ON.
APPENDIX
A-25
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-7. ARPA Symbol Display ON/OFF
ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off by the procedure either of the method-1 or method-2
as follows.
Operation
procedure

Put the arrow cursor on the button and click the track ball section left button. Every
time the left button is pushed, ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off.
When the button is displayed in the bright color ----- ARPA Symbol display is on.
When the button is displayed in the dark color ----- ARPA Symbol display is off.

Main menu opens.

SUB1 menu opens.

5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "4.AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY".

ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off. APPENDIX
A-26
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-8. AIS Target Data Display
■ Types of Data Display

The detailed or simple numerical data of an AIS target are available. The display items in each
detailed and simple mode are shown as follows.
Display Items Detailed Mode Simple Mode

ＮＡＭＥ（Ship’s Name） Max 20 characters Max 20 characters
ＣＡＬＬＳＩＧＮ Max 7 characters Max 7 characters
ＭＭＳＩ Max 9 characters Max 9 characters
ＣＯＧ Unit 0.1 degrees Unit 0.1 degrees
ＳＯＧ Unit 0.1 knots Unit 0.1 knots
ＣＰＡ Unit 0.1 nm Unit 0.1 nm
ＴＣＰＡ Unit 0.1 min Unit 0.1 min
ＢＲＧ Unit 0.1 degrees
ＲＡＮＧＥ Unit 0.01 nm
ＨＤＧ Unit 0.1 degrees No display
ＲＯＴ Unit 0.1°／min
Ｌ／Ｌ (Lat/Lon) Unit 0.001 seconds
One target data in the detailed mode or two target data in the simple mode are displayed at the
numerical data area on the screen.
■ Target Data Display
Operation
procedure
ＴＧＴ
1. Press
ＤＡＴＡ
Cursor mode changes and "TGT DATA" is displayed on the upper right of the screen.
2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be data displayed and press the track ball
The numerical information of the selected AIS target is displayed at the right side of
the screen, and is displayed on the AIS target symbol.
APPENDIX
A-27
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Note:
When the numerical data is displayed without mark on the radar screen, the target
might exist out of the radar display range.
■ Target Data Display Cancel
Operation
procedure
ＴＧＴ
1. Press
ＤＡＴＡ
Cursor mode changes and "TGT DATA" is displayed on the upper right of the screen.
2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be turn off the numerical data display and
press the track ball section left button .
The numerical information of the selected AIS target data is removed from the
numerical data area at the right-hand side of the screen and the symbol
disappears.
■ Target Data Display in simple/detail mode
Operation
1. Put the cursor on the buttons or at the upper right of AIS target
procedure
numerical data area, and press the trackball section left button.
2. Every time the button is pushed, the mode of numerical data changes to simple
or detail as follows..
Button
When button is
pushed, display
mode is changed
Example of Simple mode

APPENDIX
Example of Detail mode

A-28
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-9. Definitions of AIS Target Symbols
The AIS symbol is as follows.
Symbol AIS Target Definitions & Meaning

A target symbol indicating the presence and orientation of a
vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location. No additional
information is presented until activated thus avoiding information
Sleeping
overload.
Target
The most acute apex of the triangle is aligned with the heading of
the target, or with its COG.
A symbol representing the automatic or manual activation of a
sleeping target for the display of additional graphically presented
information including:
- a vector (speed and course over ground or water);
- the heading; and
- ROT or direction of turn indication (if available) to display
Activated actually initiated course changes.
Target
The COG/SOG vector is displayed as dashed line.
The heading is displayed as solid line of fixed length.
A flag on the heading indicates a turned its direction in order to
detect a target maneuver.
When no data is coming, the vector , heading and flag are not
displayed.
A symbol representing the manual or automatic selection of any
AIS target for the display of detailed information in a separate
data display area. In this area, received target data as well as the
Selected calculated CPA and TCPA values will be shown.
Target
Squares indicated by its corners are drawn around the target
symbol. This mark is displayed on the around of a numerical
display target.
A symbol representing an AIS target (activated or not) which data
contravene pre-set CPA and TCPA limits.
Dangerous
Target
APPENDIX
CPA/TCPA alarm sound occurs and a symbol is flashed until

acknowledged.
Lost Target A symbol representing the last valid predicted position of an AIS
A-29
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
target before the reception of its data was lost.
It will become a lost target when fixed time reception of the data
of a dangerous target cannot be carried out. When it becomes a
lost target, a symbol will be displayed on the position predicted by
data received at the end, such as a course and speed.
APPENDIX
A-30
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-10. AIS Filter Setting
■ Meaning of AIS Filter

When an AIS filter is set up, AIS targets in the filtering area can be displayed preferentially. A
default filter is set up within a circle with a radius of 20nm from own ship and other type of filter is
selectable by the procedure in this section. When 50 or more AIS targets exist within the limits of
the filter, AIS symbols are displayed according to the display priority indicated in 1-13 “Max target
number and Display priority”.
■AIS Filter Type Selection
There are three kinds of AIS filters as follows. One of them can be selected.
1) RANGE・・・ A filter is set up in the shape of a circle which makes a radius

set-up distance.
2) SECTOR・・・A filter is set up in the shape of a sector including the own ship
heading direction.
3) ZONE ・・・A zone area surrounded by two directions and two ranges from
own ship.
Operation
procedure

Main menu opens.

SUB1 menu opens.

5. Left-click AIS FILTER.

AIS FILTER menu opens.
APPENDIX
A-31
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
6. Left-click the selection section (combo box) of "1.FILTER TYPE".

FILTER TYPE is chosen and the following pull down menu is displayed.
SUB1 MENU
AIS/ARPA
AIS SETTING
AIS FILTER
1. FILTER TYPE
1. RANGE
2. SECTOR
4. MAKE3.FILTER
ZONE
3. FILTER DISP
OFF ON
0. EXIT
7. Select the FILTER TYPE from the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the
trackball, then left-click.
Note:
If a ARPA guard zone is set, the filter area for AIS target will be modified automatically to
cover the guard zone.
APPENDIX
A-32
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■ AIS Filter Setting
Note:
An AIS filter setting procedure changes according to the filter type chosen.
Select a filter type should be set before setting up a filter area.
Operation
1. Set up the type of a filter, according to the preceding clause.
procedure
After selecting a filter type, then perform the following procedure to set a filter
area..
2. Left-click MAKE FILTER .

It goes into filter setting mode.
【When a filter type is "RANGE"】

3. Adjust a setting marker to filter setting distance with a VRM knob and left-click.
【When a filter type is “SECTOR”】

3. Adjust a setting marker to a filter start angle with an EBL knob and left-click.
4. Adjust a setting marker to a filter end angle with an EBL knob and left-click.
【When a filter type is “ZONE”】

3. Rotate EBL and VRM control knobs to adjust the cross point of EBL and VRM to
the starting point of a filter zone. Then left click.
4. Rotate EBL and VRM control knobs to adjust the cross point of EBL and VRM to
the end point of a filter zone. Then left click.
APPENDIX
A-33
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■ AIS Filter Area Display
Operation
procedure
Main menu opens.

SUB1 menu opens.

5. Left-click AIS FILTER.

AIS FILTER menu opens.
6. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "3.FILTER DISP".

The filter area display changes to on or off.
When it is set to ON, filter setting area is displayed as a green
dashed line on the radar screen.
APPENDIX
A-34
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-11. AIS and ARPA Target Association Condition
■ When the distance between an AIS target and an ARPA target is less than the “identical
distance” of a preset value, these targets might be the same. In this case, only AIS symbol is
displayed and ARPA symbol may be suppressed. The method of setting the “identical distance”
to activate this association is as follows.
Operation
procedure
Main menu opens.

SUB1 menu opens.

5. Left-click the "7.IDENTICAL DISTANCE" edit box.
TCPA LIMIT will be selected.

6. Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the + or
- keys, then press END to input.
Note:
1. ARPA symbol which was suppressed by this association can be re-displayed by switching
OFF the AIS display. See “1-6 AIS Symbol Display”.
2. Both AIS and ARPA symbol are displayed when the “IDENTICAL DISTANCE” is set to zero.
(Association OFF mode.) When turning power on the radar display, the “IDENTICAL
DISTANCE” is set to zero.
APPENDIX
A-35
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-12. AIS Lost Target
When a dangerous AIS target is lost, the lost target alarm will be activated and the dangerous
target symbol will change to a lost symbol. And the present target position is predicted by the
final received data from the target and the lost symbol position will be updated for approx. 1
minute. The lost symbol would be deleted when “ALARM ACK” key is pressed or no data has
been received for approx. 1 minute after activating a lost target alarm.
LOST TARGET interval depends on the Class A or Class B and the category of ship. Please see
the following the lost target interval for Class A and Class B ship.
【SOLAS ships】（Class A）
Category of Ship Lost target Interval
Ship at anchor or moored and moving at less than 3 knots 18 min
Ship at anchor or moored and moving at more than 3 knots 60 sec
Ship 0 to 14 knots 60 sec
Ship 0 - 14 knots and changing course 60 sec
Ship 14 - 23 knots 36 sec
Ship 14 – 23 knots and changing course 36 sec
Ship > 23 knots 12 sec
Ship > 23 knots and changing course 12 sec
【Non SOLAS ships】（Class B）

Category of Ship Lost target Interval
Ship < 2 knots 18 min
Ship 2 – 14 knots 180 sec
Ship 14 – 23 knots 90 sec
Ship > 23 knots 30 sec
NOTE:
When non dangerous target is lost, the target symbol will be fixed at the last reported position and
deleted automatically after waiting for the data input from the target for above lost target interval.
APPENDIX
A-36
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-13. Conditions of AIS Symbol Display

■ Maximum Target Number and Display Priority
Up to 50 AIS target symbols can be displayed in JMA-9900 series radar. When more than 50 AIS
targets exist, 50 targets to be displayed are selected by the following priority order.
1. Dangerous target. (Both CPA and TCPA of a target are less than the preset CPA and
TCPA safe limit.)
2. Selected Target for numerical data display.
3. The target specified in target search mode. (See 1-4 Note for search mode)
4. The target in an AIS filter. (The closer target from own ship in the filter has higher priority
than further ones.)
5. Targets outside of a filter and they do not conform with the above 1 to 4 conditions. A
nearer target from own ship has higher priority than further ones.
Note:
When the 50 AIS targets symbol are displayed and 51st target enters, "AIS MAX TARGET"
message appears at the lower right part of the screen and alarm sounds with “Pi! Pi! “.
■ AIS Target Vector Display

- The vector of an AIS symbol is displayed in either ground-stabilized or sea-stabilized by a setup
of the own speed equipment.
The vector used now is displayed on "OS STAB" at the upper right of a screen.
When displayed as "OS STAB GND"--- AIS Vector presentation is Ground-stabilized

When displayed as "OS STAB SEA" --- AIS Vector presentation is Sea-stabilized
- When the vector of an AIS symbol is displayed by sea-stabilized, the sea-stabilized vector of
AIS target is calculated from the COG/SOG of AIS target and the own ship COG/SOG &
CSE/STW information.
-
Note:
The vector of AIS target is not displayed in following cases.
Case 1: COG / SOG data is not transmitted from GPS/DGPS.
Case 2: The selected speed equipment is not working normally.
APPENDIX
A-37
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1-14. Alarm Display
■ There are the following alarms in AIS system.
Alarm Message Meaning

CPA / TCPA Dangerous Target is occurred
LOST Lost Target is occurred
The number of displayed AIS symbols was exceeded the
AIS MAX TARGET maximum target number 50. (The 51st data was
received.)
AIS (DATA) AIS is not connected correctly. Or AIS is turned off.
The AIS interface is not connected to radar correctly.
AIS I/ F (DATA)
Otherwise the interface is faulty.
It is the alarm information received from AIS,
AIS ALARM *** Local Alarm Number of an ALR sentence is displayed by
3 figure number “***”.. See the AIS Alarm list below.
AIS Alarm List on RADAR display
AIS Alarm NO.

Meaning of AIS
Alarm
001 Tx malfunction
002 Antenna VSWR exceeds limit
003 Rx channel 1 malfunction
006 General failure
008 MKD connection lost
025 external EPFS lost
026 no sensor position in use
029 no valid SOG information
030 no valid COG information
APPENDIX
032 Heading lost / invalid

035 no valid ROT information
A-38
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Note:
An alarm message is displayed at lower right part of the radar screen.
Alarm message display position
1-15. Operational restrictions
AIS function is not available when the manual speed input or SET/DRIFT data is used and following
operational restrictions exist
1) An AIS function cannot turn ON

・When "MANUAL" was selected as a speed input source.
・When SET and DRIFT was set in “LOG” speed mode
2) "LOG" speed mode cannot be chosen as a speed source.
・When an AIS function was ON and SET and DRIFT were set.
3) "MANUAL" speed mode cannot be selected..

・When an AIS function was ON.
4) DRIFT／SET (Current correction) function cannot turn ON.

・When an AIS function was ON and speed was set as "LOG".
APPENDIX
A-39
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
２．Basic Operation with Track Ball

The operation method of the trackball of each menu in this manual. is described in “3.4 Basic
Operations” of the JMA-9900 Instruction Manual.
APPENDIX
A-40
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
３．Installation of AIS Information Display Kit
Note:
Following connection and setup are not required if the AIS interface was built in the factory before
shipping.
3-1. Composition of AIS Information Display Kit

The AIS kit for JMA-9900 consists of .
-AIS I/F TYPE : AIS I/F PCB, Base attachment
-7ZCRD0967 : Power and Communication cable
3-2. AIS I/F Connection

(1) Attach the AIS I/F in the indicator. Refer to AIS UNIT INSTALLATION MANUAL.
(2) Connect the communication cable as shown in the following figure.
JMA-9900 Terminal Board

(3) P
Covering is skinned and
TB 4601 o
itconnects with a terminal
board. w
COM CD AIS I/F Board
Red e
COM RX
COM TX Green r
COM TR Blak P500 c
COM SG
COM DSR ① a
COM RTS ②
To J500 b
COM RI ③
l
e
c
J16 P16
P1 o
To J1 n
n
Power and Communication e
cable 7ZCRD0967
c
tion
Connect P16 of attached cable to J16 of the terminal board.
Connect P1 of attached cable to J1 of AIS I/F board.
When ISW is equipped, exchange the existing power cable with the 7ZCRD0967 power cable
in this kit.
APPENDIX
A-41
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3-3. Set up after Installation
Set up a link pin, as shown in the following figure.
ON
S100 １
S100
S101
０
12345678
S102
ON
S101 １
０
12345678
ON
S102 １
０
12345678
Note.
It differs from "JMA-9800."
3-4. Turn on & Check

Turn on ship’s main power. And turn on radar power.
AIS I/F is operating normally if the button for AIS (refer to 1-1.AIS button) is displayed on the
screen lower left.
, The connection or the setup may not be performed correctly if the AIS button is not displayed.
Please turn off the radar and check connection and a setup.
Note:
Refer to the installation manual in the case of connection.
APPENDIX
A-42
NKE-1079 SCANNER UNIT NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT
SLOT ANTENNA NSK I/F
CMJ-462A
DRIVE
ROTARY ENCODER
MOTOR
JOINT B102 ΦA,ΦB,ΦZ
B101
SAFETY
SWITCH RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUT CDC-1209
S101 DSP DSP VD TRIG
A/D
MODULE2 MODULE0 SELECTOR DIVIDER
NTG-3037A/3028 Transmitter-Receiver DSP
MODULE1 BEARNG PULSE SELECTOR MOTHER BOARD
CQC−1094
DL/TRHPL PIN
MAG
A303 ATT
CPU CONTROL CIRCUT CMC-1218
GDC
PULSE SCI CPU
TRANS TUNE CONTROL MIC TERMINAL BOARD
A301 CQD−1949 WORK MEMORY by
MEMORY RADAR VIDEO
SWITCHING PC301
CIRCUIT
PC210
IF AMP
TX TRIG
PC220
VIDEO
CHAGE AMP
CIRCUIT
USB
AVR INTERFACE CIRCUIT BP、BZ、VD、TRIG
PC1001 PC1101
TRIG/VD INTERSWITCH
MH
NQE-3141-2/-4
GENERATOR C
DC+48V R
O
G
N
B
T
AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ HS
MOTOR RELAY P+12V,+24V
AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ VS
AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ
+48V,
+5V, KEYBOARD UNIT NCE-7721
P+12V
+3.3V
AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ
±12V CCK-902 CCK-900
AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ MAIN
CONTROL SIRCUIT
SWITCH
DC24V AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ
AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ MOUSE CCK-901
Fig.101 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA,JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

+48V,+5V,+3.3V,
±12V 23.1INCH LCD MONITOR
AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ NWZ-158
MONITOR RELAY AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ
NKE-1075A/NKE-1087 SCANNER UNIT
NSK I/F
SLOT ANTENNA CMJ-462A
DRIVE ΦA,ΦB,ΦZ
ROTARY ENCODER
MOTOR
JOINT B102
B101
RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUIT CDC-1129
SAFETY DSP DSP VD TRIG
A/D
MODULE2 MODULE 0 SELECTOR DIVIDER
SWITCH
S101 DSP
MODULE1 BEARING PULSE SELECTOR MOTHER BOARD
PIN CQC−1094
DL/TRHPL
MAG ATT
A303
除くNKE1087
CPU CONTROL CIRCUT CMC-1143
GDC
PULAS SCI CPU
TRANS TUNE CONTROL MIC TERMINAL BOARD
A301 CQD−1949 WORK MEMORY by
MMORY RADAR VIDEO
SWITCHING PC301
CIRCUIT
PC210
IF AMP
TX TRIG
PC220
VIDEO
CHARE AMP
CIRCUIT
USB
AVR INTERFACE CIRCUIT BP、BZ、VD、TRIG
PC1001 PC1101
TRIG/VD INTERSWITCH
MH
NQE-3141
GENERATOR C
DC+48V O R
N G
T B
AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ HS
MOTOR RELAY P+12V,+24V
AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ VS
AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ
+48V,
+5V, KEYBORD UNIT NCE-7141
P+12V
+3.3V
AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ
±12V CCK-902 CCK-900
AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ MAIN
CONTROL CIRCUIT
SWITCH AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ
Fig.102 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA,JMA-992-6XA/9XA

DC24V AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ
MOUSE CCK-901
+48V,+5V,+3.3V,
±12V 23.1 LCD MONTOR
AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ NWZ-158
MONTOR RELAY AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ
ＡＮＴ
TB4101　 PM UNIT
ISW IN/OUT EXT RADAR 1
TB4201 TB4401 VD + 1 SCANNER　NKE-10７９
VD - 2
NJU-63B
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD ２ (OPTION)
TRIG + 3
2 VDIN 1E 2 RBVDE HEATER POWER 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 TB103 TB104
TRIG - 4 V
3 TRIGIN 1 3 ETIY 3 ３ AC100V1φ PTI
BP + 5 U
4 TRIGIN 1E 4 ETIY 3E PTE
BP - 6 BLU
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 ４ ORG LVR
BZ + 7 +12V RED
6 BPIN 1E 6 SVD 1E WHT PMS
BZ - 8 C2 BLK
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 ORG E
MTR + 9 φZE WHT
8 BZIN 1E 8 ETIY 1E WHT TXI
MTR - 10 ３ φZ
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 EXφA 1 TXE
MTRE 11 1 φA
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E
(NC) 12 E
11 MTRIN 1E 11 EXφB 1 RED
+48V 13 ２ φB
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 EXφB 1E BLU
+48VG 14
13 PWRIN 1E 13 EXφZ 1
14 PWROUT 1 14 EXφZ 1E
15 PWROUT 1E 15 SVD 2
16 SVD 2E CBD-1684
16 VDOUT 1
RED 17 ETIY 2
17 VDOUT 1E TB104
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E TB303 GRY
19 EXφA 2 PTI
19 TRIGOUT 1E U 1
20 EXφA 2E 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE PTE
20 BPOUT 1 V 2 BLU BLU
WHT H - 2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY) LVR
21 BPOUT 1E 21 EXφB 2 (NC) 3 TB102　　 RED RED
22 EXφB 2E YEL PMS
22 BZOUT 1 U1 BLK
BLK 23 EXφZ 2 TB302 GRN E
23 BZOUT 1E V1 ４ WHT
24 EXφZ 2E YEL BRN TXI
24 MTROUT 1+ U 1 W1
25 ITIY GRN TXE
25 MTROUT 1- V 2 MU 1
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE W 3 BRN MV 1
27 EXφAIN MW 1
28 EXφBIN
29 EXφZEN
30 EXφINGND TB301
14-CROES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL U 1 YEL
H - 2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

V 2 GRN
To ECDIS 250V-TTYCS-4 BRN
ARPA DATA W 3
ALARM MONITORING 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

SYSTEM
TB4501
1 NAV1TX + ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ YEL
U
2 NAV1TX - TB4601 GRN
250V-TTYCS-1 V TB204
DGPS 3 NAV1RX + 1 ARPAALM + BRN
W TB201 PTI GRY
4 NAV1RX - 2 ARPAALM - 1
POWER VD + PTE
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM +
CBD-1661 VD - LVR BLU
6 NAV2TX - 4 SYSALM - ２ TRIG + PMS RED
250V-TTYCS-1 7 NAV2RX + 5 PWRALM +
TRIG - E
ECHO SOUNDER 8 NAV2RX - 6 PWRALM - ３ BP + TXI ４
9 LOGRX + 7 ARPAACK +
BP -/BZ - TXE
250V-TTYCS-1 10 LOGRX - 8 ARPAACK - ４
DLOG BZ +
11 ALMTX + 9 SYSACK + ORG MTR +
12 ALMTX - 10 SYSACK - WHT MTR -
13 ALMRX + 11 PWRACK +
MTRE
14 ALMRX - 12 PWRACK -
15 ARPATX + 13 EXEVT +
16 ARPATX - 14 EXEVT -
17 JARPATX + 15 COMCD
18 JARPATX - 16 COMRX
CONINING DISPLAY 250V-TTYCS-4 17 COMTX
19 NSKTX + TB203 TB202　　　
20 NSKTX - 18 COMDTR YEL
+12V ORG U0
21 NET -S 19 COMSG GRN
C2 WHT V0
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR BRN
φZE W0
21 COMRTS YEL
ＬＯＧ φZ ３ U1
22 COMRI GRN
TB4801 φA 1 V1
1 SFA + W1 BRN
E
2 SFA - φB ２
3 SFS + RED +48V
4 SFS - ＧＹＲＯ BLU
LOG 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 1 +48VG
5 PULS 1+ TB4701
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
1 1/R1 U TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1 V
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2 MAIN POWER
W UNIT
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3
10 SYNC 1- 5 AC220V　3φ
5 5/R2 NTG-3037A
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263
Fig.103(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (self standing type AC 220V 3f)
ＡＮＴ
TB4101　 PM UNIT
ISW IN/OUT EXT RADAR 1
TB4201 TB4401 VD + 1 SCANNER　NKE-10７９
VD - 2
NJU-63B
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD ２ (OPTION)
TRIG + 3
2 VDIN 1E 2 RBVDE HEATER POWER 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 TB103 TB104
TRIG - 4 V
3 TRIGIN 1 3 ETIY 3 ３ AC100V1φ PTI
BP + 5 U
4 TRIGIN 1E 4 ETIY 3E PTE
BP - 6 BLU
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 ４ ORG LVR
BZ + 7 +12V RED
6 BPIN 1E 6 SVD 1E WHT PMS
BZ - 8 C2 BLK
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 ORG E
MTR + 9 φZE WHT
MTR - 10 ３ φZ
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 EXφA 1 TXE
MTRE 11 1 φA
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E
(NC) 12 E
11 MTRIN 1E 11 EXφB 1 RED
+48V 13 ２ φB
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 EXφB 1E BLU
+48VG 14
14 PWROUT 1 14 EXφZ 1E
15 PWROUT 1E 15 SVD 2
16 SVD 2E CBD-1684
16 VDOUT 1
RED 17 ETIY 2
17 VDOUT 1E TB104
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E TB303 GRY
19 EXφA 2 PTI
19 TRIGOUT 1E U 1
20 EXφA 2E 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE PTE
20 BPOUT 1 V 2 BLU BLU
WHT H - 2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY) LVR
21 BPOUT 1E 21 EXφB 2 (NC) 3 TB102　　 RED RED
22 EXφB 2E YEL PMS
22 BZOUT 1 U1 BLK
BLK 23 EXφZ 2 TB302 GRN E
23 BZOUT 1E V1 ４ WHT
24 EXφZ 2E YEL TXI
24 MTROUT 1+ U 1 W1
25 ITIY GRN TXE
25 MTROUT 1- V 2 MU 1
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE W 3 MV 1
27 EXφAIN MW 1
28 EXφBIN
29 EXφZEN
30 EXφINGND TB301
14-CROES COMPLEX CABLE

H - 2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

V 2 GRN
To ECDIS 250V-TTYCS-4
ARPA DATA W 3

SYSTEM
TB4501
U
250V-TTYCS-1 V TB204
DGPS 3 NAV1RX + 1 ARPAALM +
W TB201 PTI GRY
4 NAV1RX - 2 ARPAALM - 1
POWER VD + PTE
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM +
CBD-1661 VD - LVR BLU
6 NAV2TX - 4 SYSALM - ２ TRIG + PMS RED
TRIG - E
ECHO SOUNDER 8 NAV2RX - 6 PWRALM - ３ BP + TXI ４
BP -/BZ - TXE
250V-TTYCS-1 10 LOGRX - 8 ARPAACK - ４
DLOG BZ +
11 ALMTX + 9 SYSACK + ORG MTR +
12 ALMTX - 10 SYSACK - WHT MTR -
MTRE
19 NSKTX + TB203 TB202　　　
20 NSKTX - 18 COMDTR YEL
+12V ORG U0
21 NET -S 19 COMSG GRN
C2 WHT V0
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR
φZE W0
21 COMRTS YEL
ＬＯＧ φZ ３ U1
22 COMRI GRN
TB4801 φA 1 V1
1 SFA + E W1
2 SFA - φB ２
3 SFS + RED +48V
4 SFS - ＧＹＲＯ BLU
LOG 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 1 +48VG
5 PULS 1+ TB4701
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
1 1/R1 U TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1 V
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2 MAIN POWER UNIT
W
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3
10 SYNC 1- 5 AC220V　1φ
5 5/R2 NTG-３0３７A
11 SYNC 2+ AC110V　1φ
6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.103(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (self standing type AC220V AC100V 1f)
ISW IN/OUT EXT RADAR PM UNIT
TB4201 TB4401
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD
SCANNER　NKE-10７９ NJU-63B
ＡＮＴ
2 VDIN 1E 2 RBVDE (OPTION)
TB4101　 TB103 TB104
3 TRIGIN 1 3 ETIY 3 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
1 HEATER POWER
4 ETIY 3E VD + 1 V PTI
4 TRIGIN 1E AC100V1φ
5 SVD 1 VD - 2 U PTE
5 BPIN 1 ２ BLU
6 BPIN 1E 6 SVD 1E TRIG + 3 ORG LVR
TRIG - 4 +12V RED PMS
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 WHT
BP + 5 ３ C2 BLK E
8 BZIN 1E 8 ETIY 1E
6 φZE WHT TXI
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 EXφA 1 BP -
４３ φZ
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E BZ + 7 TXE
1 φA
11 MTRIN 1E 11 EXφB 1 BZ - 8
MTR + 9 ORG E
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 EXφB 1E ２
MTR - 10 WHT φB
14 PWROUT 1 14 EXφZ 1E MTRE 11
15 PWROUT 1E 15 SVD 2 (NC) 12
RED
16 VDOUT 1 16 SVD 2E +48V 13
RED BLU
17 VDOUT 1E 17 ETIY 2 +48VG 14
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E TB104
19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 EXφA 2 GRY PTI
20 BPOUT 1 20 EXφA 2E
WHT PTE
21 BPOUT 1E 21 EXφB 2 TB304 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE BLU BLU
H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY) LVR
22 BZOUT 1 22 EXφB 2E 1 1 TB102　　 RED RED
BLK YEL PMS
23 BZOUT 1E 23 EXφZ 2 2 2 U1 BLK
GRN E
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EXφZ 2E 3 3 V1 ４ WHT
BRN TXI
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY W1
TXE
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE MU 1
27 EXφAIN MV 1
U YEL
28 EXφBIN MW 1
V GRN
29 EXφZEN
W BRN
30 EXφINGND
POWER
H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL
CBD-1661
14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)
ARPADATA

SYSTEM
TB4501
1 NAV1TX + ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ
2 NAV1TX - TB4601
DGPS 250V-TTYCS-1 3 NAV1RX + 1 ARPAALM +
TB204
4 NAV1RX - 2 ARPAALM - TB201 GRY
PTI
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM + 1 VD + PTE
6 NAV2TX - 4 SYSALM - BLU
VD - LVR
250V-TTYCS-1 7 NAV2RX + 5 PWRALM + ２ RED
TRIG + PMS
ECHO SOUNDER 8 NAV2RX - 6 PWRALM -
TRIG - E
9 LOGRX + 7 ARPAACK + ３４
BP + TXI
250V-TTYCS-1 10 LOGRX - 8 ARPAACK -
DLOG BP -/BZ - TXE
11 ALMTX + 9 SYSACK + ４ BZ +
12 ALMTX - 10 SYSACK - ORG MTR +
13 ALMRX + 11 PWRACK + WHT MTR -
MTRE
19 NSKTX +
20 NSKTX - 18 COMDTR TB203 TB202　　　
21 NET -S 19 COMSG YEL
+12V ORG U0
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR GRN
C2 WHT V0
21 COMRTS BRN
φZE W0
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI YEL
TB4801 φZ ３ U1
1 V1 GRN
1 SFA + φA
0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6 W1 BRN
2 SFA - U E
3 SFS + φB ２
V MAIN POWER
4 SFS - ＧＹＲＯ RED +48V
LOG 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 1 W AC220V　3φ
5 PULS 1+ TB4701 BLU
PULSE 2 +48VG
6 PULS 1- 1 1 1/R1
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1 TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3 UNIT
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC) NTG-３0３７A
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263T
Fig.104(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (desk top type AC 220V 3f)
ISW IN/OUT EXT RADAR
TB4201 TB4401
PM UNIT
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD
SCANNER　NKE-10７９ NJU-63B
ＡＮＴ
2 VDIN 1E 2 RBVDE TB4101　 (OPTION)
3 ETIY 3 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 TB103 TB104
3 TRIGIN 1 1 HEATER POWER
4 ETIY 3E VD + 1 V PTI
4 TRIGIN 1E AC100V1φ
5 SVD 1 VD - 2 U PTE
5 BPIN 1 ２ BLU
6 SVD 1E TRIG + 3 LVR
6 BPIN 1E ORG RED
7 ETIY 1 TRIG - 4 +12V PMS
7 BZIN 1 ３ WHT BLK
8 ETIY 1E BP + 5 C2 E
8 BZIN 1E WHT
9 EXφA 1 BP - 6 φZE TXI
9 MTRIN 1+ ４３
10 EXφA 1E BZ + 7 φZ TXE
10 MTRIN 1- 1
11 EXφB 1 BZ - 8 φA
11 MTRIN 1E ORG
12 EXφB 1E MTR + 9 E
12 PWRIN 1+ WHT ２
13 EXφZ 1 MTR - 10 φB
13 PWRIN 1E
14 EXφZ 1E MTRE 11
14 PWROUT 1
15 SVD 2 (NC) 12
15 PWROUT 1E RED
16 SVD 2E +48V 13
16 VDOUT 1 BLU
RED 17 ETIY 2 +48VG 14
17 VDOUT 1E
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E TB104
19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 EXφA 2 GRY PTI
WHT PTE
21 BPOUT 1E 21 EXφB 2 TB304 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE BLU BLU
H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY) LVR
22 BZOUT 1 22 EXφB 2E 1 1 TB102　　 RED RED
BLK YEL PMS
23 BZOUT 1E 23 EXφZ 2 2 2 U1 BLK
GRN E
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EXφZ 2E 3 3 V1 ４ WHT
TXI
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY W1
TXE
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE MU 1
27 EXφAIN MV 1
U YEL
28 EXφBIN MW 1
V GRN
29 EXφZEN
30 EXφINGND W
POWER
CBD-1661

ARPADATA

SYSTEM
TB4501
2 NAV1TX - TB4601
TB204
4 NAV1RX - 2 ARPAALM - TB201 GRY
PTI
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM + 1 VD + PTE
6 NAV2TX - 4 SYSALM - BLU
VD - LVR
250V-TTYCS-1 7 NAV2RX + 5 PWRALM + ２ RED
TRIG + PMS
TRIG - E
9 LOGRX + 7 ARPAACK + ３４
BP + TXI
DLOG BP -/BZ - TXE
11 ALMTX + 9 SYSACK + ４ BZ +
12 ALMTX - 10 SYSACK - ORG MTR +
13 ALMRX + 11 PWRACK + WHT MTR -
MTRE
19 NSKTX +
20 18 COMDTR TB203 TB202　　　
NSKTX -
21 NET -S 19 COMSG YEL
+12V ORG U0
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR GRN
C2 WHT V0
21 COMRTS
φZE W0
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI YEL
TB4801 φZ ３ U1
1 V1 GRN
1 SFA + φA
2 SFA - 0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6 W1
U E
3 SFS + φB ２
V MAIN POWER
4 SFS - ＧＹＲＯ RED +48V
W AC220V　1φ
LOG 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 1 TB4701 BLU
5 PULS 1+ AC110V　1φ +48VG
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 1 1/R1
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1 TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3 UNIT
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC) NTG-３0３７A
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.104(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (desk top type AC220V AC100V 1f)
SCANNER
ＡＮＴ
PM UNIT
ISW IN/OUT EXT RADAR TB4101　
NKE-1075A NJU-63B
TB4201 TB4401 1
VD + 1 TB101
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD ３
VD - 2 1 BP +
2 RBVDE ２ TB104
2 VDIN 1E TRIG + 3
3 ETIY 3 2 BP -
3 TRIGIN 1 TRIG - 4 ４ 1 PTI
4 ETIY 3E 3 BZ +
4 TRIGIN 1E ３ 2 PTE
BP + 5 4 BZ -
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 ２ BLU 3 LVR
BP - 6 5 TRIG +
6 BPIN 1E 6 SVD 1E ４ RED
BZ + 7 6 TRIG - 4 PMS
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 ORG BLK 5 E
BZ - 8 7 MTR +
8 BZIN 1E 8 ETIY 1E ORG WHT WHT 6 TXI
MTR + 9 8 MTR -
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 EXφA 1 WHT 7 TXE
MTR - 10 9 MTRE
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E 1
MTRE 11 10 VD +
11 MTRIN 1E 11 EXφB 1
(NC) 12 11 VD -
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 EXφB 1E RED
+48V 13
13 PWRIN 1E 13 EXφZ 1 BLU
+48VG 14 TB102　　
14 PWROUT 1 14 EXφZ 1E RED
15 SVD 2 +48V
15 PWROUT 1E BLU
16 SVD 2E +48VG J8
16 VDOUT 1 YEL
RED 17 ETIY 2 U1
17 VDOUT 1E GRN 1 PTI
18 ETIY 2E V1
18 TRIGOUT 1 TB303 BRN 2 PTE
19 EXφA 2 W1 BLU
19 TRIGOUT 1E U 1 3 LVR
20 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE 1 RED
20 BPOUT 1 EXφA 2E V 2 4 PMS
WHT 21 EXφB 2 H-2695110056 2 BLK
21 BPOUT 1E (NC) 3 5 E
22 EXφB 2E 3 WHT
22 BZOUT 1 (JRC SUPPLY) 6 TXI
BLK 23 EXφZ 2 TB302 4
23 BZOUT 1E 7 TXE
24 EXφZ 2E YEL 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 UTH
24 MTROUT 1+ U 1 8
25 ITIY GRN HEATER POWER U
25 MTROUT 1- V 2 AC100V1φ V
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE W 3 BRN
27 EXφAIN (OPTION)
28 EXφBIN
29 EXφZEN
30 EXφINGND TB301

V 2 GRN
ARPADATA W 3
ALARM MONITORING
SYSTEM 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
TB4501
U
250V-TTYCS-1 V
DGPS 3 NAV1RX + 1 ARPAALM + BRN
W
4 NAV1RX - 2 ARPAALM -
3 SYSALM + POWER
5 NAV2TX
4 SYSALM - CBD-1661
6 NAV2TX -
DLOG
11 ALMTX + 9 SYSACK +
12 ALMTX - 10 SYSACK -
19 NSKTX +
20 NSKTX - 18 COMDTR
21 NET -S 19 COMSG
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR
21 COMRTS
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI
TB4801
1 SFA +
2 SFA -
3 SFS +
4 SFS - ＧＹＲＯ
LOG 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 1 TB4701
5 PULS 1+
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 MAIN POWER
1 1/R1
7 PULS 2+ 2 0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
2 2/S1 U
8 PULS 2- 3 AC220V　3φ
3 3/S2 V
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3 W
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.105(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (self standing type AC 220V 3f)
SCANNER
ＡＮＴ
PM UNIT
ISW IN/OUT EXT RADAR TB4101　
NKE-1075A NJU-63B
TB4201 TB4401 1
VD + 1 TB101
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD ３
VD - 2 1 BP +
2 RBVDE ２ TB104
2 VDIN 1E TRIG + 3
3 ETIY 3 2 BP -
3 TRIGIN 1 TRIG - 4 ４ 1 PTI
4 ETIY 3E 3 BZ +
4 TRIGIN 1E ３ 2 PTE
BP + 5 4 BZ -
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 ２ BLU 3 LVR
BP - 6 5 TRIG +
6 BPIN 1E 6 SVD 1E ４ RED
BZ + 7 6 TRIG - 4 PMS
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 ORG BLK 5 E
BZ - 8 7 MTR +
8 BZIN 1E 8 ETIY 1E ORG WHT WHT 6 TXI
MTR + 9 8 MTR -
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 EXφA 1 WHT 7 TXE
MTR - 10 9 MTRE
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E 1
MTRE 11 10 VD +
(NC) 12 11 VD -
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 EXφB 1E RED
+48V 13
+48VG 14 TB102　　
15 SVD 2 +48V
15 PWROUT 1E BLU
16 SVD 2E +48VG J8
16 VDOUT 1 YEL
RED 17 ETIY 2 U1
17 VDOUT 1E GRN 1 PTI
18 ETIY 2E V1
18 TRIGOUT 1 TB303 2 PTE
19 EXφA 2 W1 BLU
19 TRIGOUT 1E U 1 3 LVR
20 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE 1 RED
20 BPOUT 1 EXφA 2E V 2 4 PMS
WHT 21 EXφB 2 H-2695110056 2 BLK
22 EXφB 2E 3 WHT
22 BZOUT 1 (JRC SUPPLY) 6 TXI
BLK 23 EXφZ 2 TB302 4
23 BZOUT 1E 7 TXE
24 EXφZ 2E YEL 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 UTH
24 MTROUT 1+ U 1 8
25 ITIY GRN HEATER POWER U
25 MTROUT 1- V 2 AC100V1φ V
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE W 3
27 EXφAIN (OPTION)
28 EXφBIN
29 EXφZEN
30 EXφINGND TB301

V 2 GRN
ARPADATA W 3
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
U
250V-TTYCS-1 V
DGPS 3 NAV1RX + 1 ARPAALM +
W
3 SYSALM + POWER
5 NAV2TX
4 SYSALM - CBD-1661
6 NAV2TX -
DLOG
19 NSKTX +
21 NET -S 19 COMSG
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR
21 COMRTS
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI
TB4801
1 SFA +
2 SFA -
3 SFS +
5 PULS 1+
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 MAIN POWER
1 1/R1
2 2/S1 U
8 PULS 2- 3 AC220V　1φ
3 3/S2 V
9 SYNC 1+ 4 AC110V　1φ
4 /S3 W
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.105(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (self standing type AC220V AC100V 1f)
SCANNER
PM UNIT
TB4201 TB4401
NKE-1075A NJU-63B
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD TB101
ＡＮＴ
2 VDIN 1E 2 RBVDE ３
TB4101　 1 BP +
3 ETIY 3 TB104
3 TRIGIN 1 1
VD + 1 2 BP -
4 TRIGIN 1E 4 ETIY 3E ４ 1 PTI
VD - 2 3 BZ +
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 2 PTE
TRIG + 3 ２ 4 BZ -
6 BPIN 1E 6 SVD 1E ２ BLU 3 LVR
TRIG - 4 5 TRIG + RED
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 4 PMS
BP + 5 ３ 6 TRIG -
8 BZIN 1E 8 ETIY 1E ORG BLK 5 E
BP - 6 7 MTR + WHT
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 EXφA 1 WHT 6 TXI
BZ + 7 ４ 8 MTR -
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E 7 TXE
BZ - 8 9 MTRE
11 MTRIN 1E 11 EXφB 1 1
MTR + 9 ORG 10 VD +
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 EXφB 1E
MTR - 10 WHT 11 VD -
14 EXφZ 1E MTRE 11
14 PWROUT 1
(NC) 12 TB102　　
15 PWROUT 1E 15 SVD 2 RED
RED +48V
16 SVD 2E +48V 13
16 VDOUT 1 BLU BLU
RED +48VG 14 +48VG J8
17 VDOUT 1E 17 ETIY 2 YEL U1
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E GRN 1 PTI
V1
19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 EXφA 2 BRN 2 PTE
W1 BLU
20 BPOUT 1 20 EXφA 2E 3 LVR
WHT TB304 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE 1 RED
21 BPOUT 1E 21 EXφB 2 4 PMS
1 1 H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY) 2 BLK
22 BZOUT 1 22 EXφB 2E 5 E
BLK 2 2 3 WHT
23 BZOUT 1E 23 EXφZ 2 6 TXI
3 3 (OPTION) 4
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EXφZ 2E 7 TXE
0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 UTH
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY 8
U
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE HEATER POWER V
27 EXφAIN YEL AC100V1φ
U
28 EXφBIN GRN
V
29 EXφZEN BRN
W
30 EXφINGND
POWER
H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL CBD-1661
ARPADATA
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
2 NAV1TX - TB4601
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM +
6 NAV2TX - 4 SYSALM -
DLOG
19 NSKTX +
21 NET -S 19 COMSG
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR
21 COMRTS
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI
TB4801
1 SFA + 0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
U
2 SFA -
V
3 SFS + MAIN POWER
W AC220V　3φ
5 PULS 1+
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 1 1/R1
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.106(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (desk top type AC 220V 3f)
SCANNER
PM UNIT
TB4201 TB4401
NKE-1075A NJU-63B
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD TB101
ＡＮＴ
2 VDIN 1E 2 RBVDE ３
TB4101　 1 BP +
3 ETIY 3 TB104
3 TRIGIN 1 1
VD + 1 2 BP -
4 TRIGIN 1E 4 ETIY 3E ４ 1 PTI
VD - 2 3 BZ +
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 2 PTE
TRIG + 3 ２ 4 BZ -
6 BPIN 1E 6 SVD 1E ２ BLU 3 LVR
TRIG - 4 5 TRIG + RED
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 4 PMS
BP + 5 ３ 6 TRIG -
8 BZIN 1E 8 ETIY 1E ORG BLK 5 E
BP - 6 7 MTR + WHT
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 EXφA 1 WHT 6 TXI
BZ + 7 ４ 8 MTR -
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E 7 TXE
BZ - 8 9 MTRE
MTR + 9 ORG 10 VD +
MTR - 10 WHT 11 VD -
14 EXφZ 1E MTRE 11
14 PWROUT 1
(NC) 12 TB102　　
15 PWROUT 1E 15 SVD 2 RED
RED +48V
16 SVD 2E +48V 13
16 VDOUT 1 BLU BLU
RED +48VG 14 +48VG J8
17 VDOUT 1E 17 ETIY 2 YEL U1
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E GRN 1 PTI
V1
19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 EXφA 2 2 PTE
W1 BLU
20 BPOUT 1 20 EXφA 2E 3 LVR
WHT 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE 1 RED
21 BPOUT 1E 21 EXφB 2 TB304 4 PMS
H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY) 2 BLK
22 BZOUT 1 22 EXφB 2E 1 1 5 E
BLK 3 WHT
23 BZOUT 1E 23 EXφZ 2 2 2 6 TXI
(OPTION) 4
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EXφZ 2E 3 3 7 TXE
0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 UTH
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY 8
U
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE HEATER POWER V
27 EXφAIN YEL AC100V1φ
28 EXφBIN U
GRN
29 EXφZEN V
30 EXφINGND W
H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL POWER

CBD-1661
ARPADATA
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
2 NAV1TX - TB4601
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM +
DLOG
19 NSKTX +
21 NET -S 19 COMSG
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR
21 COMRTS
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI
TB4801
U
2 SFA -
V
3 SFS + MAIN POWER
W AC220V　1φ
LOG 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 1 TB4701 AC110V　1φ
5 PULS 1+
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 1 1/R1
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.106(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (desk top type AC220V AC100 1f)
PM UNIT
ＡＮＴ
TB4201 TB4401 SCANNER　NKE-1089
TB4101　 NJU-64　　　
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD 1
2 RBVDE VD + 1
2 VDIN 1E TB104
3 ETIY 3 VD - 2
3 TRIGIN 1 ２ PTI
TRIG + 3 TB103
4 TRIGIN 1E 4 ETIY 3E YEL PTE
TRIG - 4 U1 BLU
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 ３ GRN LVR
BP + 5 V1 RED
6 BPIN 1E 6 SVD 1E BRN PMS
BP - 6 W1 BLK
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 ４ ORG E
BZ + 7 +12V WHT
BZ - 8 C2
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 EXφA 1 ORG TXE
MTR + 9 φZE
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E ３
MTR - 10 WHT φZ
MTRE 11 φA
(NC) 12 E
13 PWRIN 1E 13 EXφZ 1 RED ２
+48V 13 φB
14 PWROUT 1 14 EXφZ 1E BLU
15 SVD 2 +48VG 14
15 PWROUT 1E
16 VDOUT 1 16 SVD 2E
RED 17 ETIY 2 (OPTION)
17 VDOUT 1E
TB104
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 TB105　　 GRY PTI
19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 EXφA 2 HEATER POWER
TB303 U
20 EXφA 2E AC100V1φ PTE
20 BPOUT 1 U 1 V BLU BLU
WHT 21 EXφB 2 LVR
21 BPOUT 1E 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
V 2 UTH RED RED
22 EXφB 2E H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY) PMS
22 BZOUT 1 (NC) 3 BLK
BLK 23 EXφZ 2 E
23 BZOUT 1E ４ WHT
24 EXφZ 2E TB302 TXI
24 MTROUT 1+
25 ITIY TXE
25 MTROUT 1- YEL
U 1
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE GRN
V 2 MU 1 MPS
27 EXφAIN BRN
W 3 MV 1 MCT
28 EXφBIN
MW 1
29 EXφZEN
30 EXφINGND
H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL TB301
YEL

U 1

V 2 GRN
ARPADATA
W 3 BRN
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
2 NAV1TX - TB4601 TB204
YEL TB201
250V-TTYCS-1 1 ARPAALM + U GRY
DGPS 3 NAV1RX + GRN 1 VD + PTI
2 ARPAALM - V
4 NAV1RX - BRN VD - PTE
3 SYSALM + W BLU
5 NAV2TX ２ TRIG + LVR
6 NAV2TX - 4 SYSALM - POWER RED
TRIG - PMS
250V-TTYCS-1 7 NAV2RX + 5 PWRALM + CBD-1661 ３ BP + E
ECHO SOUNDER 8 NAV2RX - 6 PWRALM - ４
BP -/BZ - TXI
9 LOGRX + 7 ARPAACK + ４ BZ + TXE
250V-TTYCS-1 10 LOGRX - 8 ARPAACK - ORG
DLOG MTR +
11 ALMTX + 9 SYSACK + WHT MTR - MPS
MTRE MCT
CONINING DISPLAY 250V-TTYCS-4 17 COMTX TB203 TB202
19 NSKTX + ORG
18 COMDTR +12V YEL
20 NSKTX - WHT U0
19 COMSG C2 GRN
21 NET -S V0
20 COMDSR φZE BRN
22 TET -C ３ W0
21 COMRTS φZ YEL
1 U1
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI φA GRN
TB4801 V1
E BRN
1 SFA + ２ W1
φB
2 SFA - RED
+48V
3 SFS + BLU +48VG
5 PULS 1+
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 1 1/R1 TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2 UNIT
9 SYNC 1+ 4 0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
4 /S3 U
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2 NTG-３0２８
V MAIN POWER
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC) W
12 SYNC 2- AC220V/230V　3φ
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.107 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (self standing type AC 220V/230V 3f)
PM UNIT
TB4201 TB4401 ＡＮＴ SCANNER　NKE-1089
TB4101　
NJU-64　　　
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD
VD + 1 1
2 RBVDE TB104
2 VDIN 1E
3 ETIY 3 VD - 2 PTI
3 TRIGIN 1 ２ TB103
4 ETIY 3E TRIG + 3 YEL PTE
4 TRIGIN 1E U1 BLU
5 SVD 1 TRIG - 4 GRN LVR
5 BPIN 1 ３ V1 RED
6 SVD 1E BP + 5 PMS
6 BPIN 1E BLK
7 ETIY 1 BP - 6 ORG E
7 BZIN 1 ４ +12V WHT
8 ETIY 1E BZ + 7 WHT TXI
8 BZIN 1E C2
9 EXφA 1 BZ - 8 TXE
9 MTRIN 1+ ORG φZE
MTR + 9 ３
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E φZ
MTR - 10 WHT
11 EXφB 1 1 φA
11 MTRIN 1E
12 EXφB 1E MTRE 11
12 PWRIN 1+ E
(NC) 12 ２
13 PWRIN 1E 13 EXφZ 1 φB
RED
14 EXφZ 1E +48V 13
14 PWROUT 1 BLU
15 SVD 2 +48VG 14
15 PWROUT 1E
17 VDOUT 1E TB104
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 GRY
TB105　　 PTI
19 EXφA 2 TB303 HEATER POWER
19 TRIGOUT 1E U PTE
YEL AC100V1φ
20 BPOUT 1 20 EXφA 2E U 1 V BLU BLU
WHT 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE LVR
21 BPOUT 1E 21 EXφB 2 V 2 GRN UTH RED RED
H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY) PMS
22 BZOUT 1 22 EXφB 2E (NC) 3 BLK
BLK E
23 BZOUT 1E 23 EXφZ 2 1 ４ WHT
TB302 TXI
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EXφZ 2E MCNT + TXE
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY U 1 MCNT -
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE V 2 M +24V 1 PR
MPS
27 EXφAIN W 3 M +24VG 1 BLK
MCT
28 EXφBIN 2
29 EXφZEN
30 EXφINGND
TB301
YEL

U 1

To ECDIS 250V-TTYCS-4 GRN
V 2
ARPADATA
W 3
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
TB4601 TB201 TB204
2 NAV1TX - U YEL
250V-TTYCS-1 1 ARPAALM + GRN 1 PTI GRY
DGPS 3 NAV1RX + V VD +
4 NAV1RX - 2 ARPAALM - VD - PTE
W BLU
3 SYSALM + ２ TRIG + LVR
5 NAV2TX
4 SYSALM - POWER PMS RED
6 NAV2TX - CBD-1661 TRIG -
250V-TTYCS-1 5 PWRALM + ３ BP + E
7 NAV2RX +
ECHO SOUNDER 6 PWRALM - TXI ４
8 NAV2RX - BP -/BZ -
7 ARPAACK + ４ BZ + TXE
9 LOGRX +
8 ARPAACK - ORG MTR +
DLOG 250V-TTYCS-1 10 LOGRX -
9 SYSACK + WHT MPS PR
11 ALMTX + MTR -
10 SYSACK - MCT BLK
12 ALMTX - MTRE
TB203 TB202
CONINING DISPLAY 250V-TTYCS-4 17 COMTX ORG
19 NSKTX + +12V
18 COMDTR YEL U0
20 NSKTX - C2 WHT
19 COMSG GRN V0
21 NET -S φZE
20 COMDSR BRN W0
22 TET -C φZ ３
21 COMRTS U1 YEL
φA 1
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI V1 GRN
TB4801 E BRN
２ W1
1 SFA + φB
RED
2 SFA - +48V
BLU +48VG
3 SFS +
5 PULS 1+
PULSE 2
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2 UNIT
9 SYNC 1+ 4 0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
4 /S3 U
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2 NTG-３0２８
V MAIN POWER
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC) W
12 SYNC 2- AC220V/230V　1φ
AC100V/110V　1φ
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.108 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (self standing type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)
PM UNIT
ISW IN/OUT EXT RADAR SCANNER　NKE-1089 NJU-64　　　
TB4201 TB4401 ＡＮＴ
1 RBVD TB4101　 TB104
1 VDIN 1
2 VDIN 1E 2 RBVDE VD + 1 1 PTI
TB103
3 TRIGIN 1 3 ETIY 3 VD - 2 YEL U1 PTE
4 ETIY 3E ２ GRN BLU LVR
4 TRIGIN 1E TRIG + 3 V1
5 SVD 1 BRN RED PMS
5 BPIN 1 TRIG - 4 W1
6 SVD 1E ３ ORG BLK E
6 BPIN 1E BP + 5 +12V
7 ETIY 1 WHT WHT TXI
7 BZIN 1 BP - 6 C2
8 BZIN 1E 8 ETIY 1E BZ + 7 ４ TXE
φZE
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 EXφA 1 ３
BZ - 8 φZ
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E MTR + 9 ORG 1 φA
11 MTRIN 1E 11 EXφB 1 MTR - 10 WHT
E
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 EXφB 1E ２
MTRE 11 φB
13 PWRIN 1E 13 EXφZ 1 (NC) 12
+48V 13
15 PWROUT 1E 15 SVD 2 BLU
+48VG 14 (OPTION)
RED 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 TB104
17 VDOUT 1E 17 ETIY 2 GRY
TB105　　 PTI
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E HEATER POWER
U PTE
19 EXφA 2 AC100V1φ
19 TRIGOUT 1E V BLU BLU
TB304 LVR
20 BPOUT 1 20 EXφA 2E UTH RED RED
WHT 21 EXφB 2 1 1 PMS
21 BPOUT 1E BLK
22 EXφB 2E 2 2 E
22 BZOUT 1 ４ WHT
BLK 23 EXφZ 2 3 3 TXI
23 BZOUT 1E
24 EXφZ 2E TXE
24 MTROUT 1+
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY MU 1
26 ITIYE YEL MPS
26 MTORUT 1E U MV 1
27 EXφAIN GRN MCT
V MW 1
28 EXφBIN BRN
W 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
29 EXφZEN H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)
POWER
30 EXφINGND
CBD-1661

ARPADATA
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
1 NAV1TX + ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ TB201 TB204
2 NAV1TX - TB4601 1 PTI GRY
VD +
DGPS 250V-TTYCS-1 3 NAV1RX + 1 ARPAALM + PTE
VD -
4 NAV1RX - 2 ARPAALM - ２ LVR BLU
TRIG +
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM + PMS RED
TRIG -
6 NAV2TX - 4 SYSALM - ３ E
BP +
250V-TTYCS-1 7 NAV2RX + 5 PWRALM + TXI ４
BP -/BZ -
ECHO SOUNDER 8 NAV2RX - 6 PWRALM - ４ TXE
BZ +
9 LOGRX + 7 ARPAACK + ORG MTR +
250V-TTYCS-1 10 LOGRX - 8 ARPAACK - WHT MPS
DLOG MTR -
11 ALMTX + 9 SYSACK + MCT
MTRE
TB203 TB202
ORG
CONINING DISPLAY 250V-TTYCS-4 17 COMTX +12V YEL
19 NSKTX + WHT U0
18 COMDTR C2 GRN
20 NSKTX - V0
19 COMSG φZE BRN
21 NET -S ３ W0
20 COMDSR φZ YEL
22 TET -C 1 U1
21 COMRTS φA GRN
V1
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI 0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6 E BRN
U ２ W1
TB4801 φB
1 SFA + V MAIN POWER RED
+48V
2 SFA - W BLU +48VG
AC220V/230V　3φ
3 SFS +
LOG 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 1 5 PULS 1+ TB4701
PULSE 2 TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
6 PULS 1- 1 1 1/R1
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1 UNIT
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3 NTG-３0２８
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-
4263T
Fig.109 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (desk top type AC 220V/230V 3f)
PM UNIT
TB4201 TB4401 SCANNER　NKE-1089 NJU-64　　　
1 RBVD ＡＮＴ
1 VDIN 1
TB4101　 TB104
2 VDIN 1E 2 RBVDE
3 ETIY 3 VD + 1 1 PTI
3 TRIGIN 1 TB103
4 TRIGIN 1E 4 ETIY 3E VD - 2 YEL U1 PTE
２ GRN BLU LVR
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 TRIG + 3 V1 RED PMS
6 BPIN 1E 6 SVD 1E TRIG - 4
３ ORG BLK E
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 BP + 5 +12V
WHT WHT TXI
8 BZIN 1E 8 ETIY 1E BP - 6 C2
9 EXφA 1 BZ + 7 ４ TXE
9 MTRIN 1+ φZE
10 EXφA 1E BZ - 8 ３
10 MTRIN 1- φZ
11 EXφB 1 MTR + 9 ORG 1
11 MTRIN 1E φA
12 EXφB 1E MTR - 10 WHT
12 PWRIN 1+ E
13 EXφZ 1 MTRE 11 ２
13 PWRIN 1E φB
14 PWROUT 1 14 EXφZ 1E (NC) 12
15 SVD 2 +48V 13 RED
15 PWROUT 1E
16 SVD 2E +48VG 14 BLU
16 VDOUT 1
17 VDOUT 1E TB104
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E TB304 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 TB105　　 GRY PTI
19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 EXφA 2 1 1 U
HEATER POWER PTE
20 BPOUT 1 20 EXφA 2E 2 2 AC100V1φ V BLU BLU
WHT LVR
21 BPOUT 1E 21 EXφB 2 3 3 UTH RED RED
PMS
22 BZOUT 1 22 EXφB 2E BLK
BLK E
23 BZOUT 1E 23 EXφZ 2 1 ４ WHT
TXI
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EXφZ 2E MCNT +
YEL TXE
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY U
GRN MCNT -
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE V PR
M +24V 1 MPS
27 EXφAIN W BLK
M +24VG 1 MCT
28 EXφBIN POWER 2
29 EXφZEN CBD-1661 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
30 EXφINGND H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)
2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE H-

ARPADATA
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
TB4601 TB201 TB204
2 NAV1TX -
250V-TTYCS-1 1 ARPAALM + 1 PTI GRY
DGPS 3 NAV1RX + VD +
4 NAV1RX - 2 ARPAALM - VD - PTE
3 SYSALM + ２ LVR BLU
5 NAV2TX TRIG +
4 SYSALM - PMS RED
6 NAV2TX - TRIG -
250V-TTYCS-1 7 NAV2RX + 5 PWRALM + ３ BP + E
ECHO SOUNDER 6 PWRALM - TXI ４
8 NAV2RX - BP -/BZ -
9 LOGRX + 7 ARPAACK + ４ BZ + TXE
250V-TTYCS-1 10 LOGRX - 8 ARPAACK - ORG MTR +
DLOG WHT PR
11 ALMTX + 9 SYSACK + MTR - MPS
10 SYSACK - BLK
12 ALMTX - MTRE MCT
TB203 TB202
19 NSKTX + ORG
+12V YEL
20 NSKTX - 18 COMDTR WHT U0
C2 GRN
21 NET -S 19 COMSG V0
φZE
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR ３ W0
φZ YEL
21 COMRTS 1 U1
ＬＯＧ φA GRN
22 COMRI V1
TB4801 0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6 E
U ２ W1
1 SFA + φB
V RED
2 SFA - MAIN POWER +48V
W BLU
3 SFS + +48VG
4 SFS - ＧＹＲＯ AC220V/230V　1φ
LOG 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 1 TB4701 BATTERY AC100V/110V　1φ
5 PULS 1+
PULSE 2 TB　　
+
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1 -
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2 UNIT
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2 NTG-３0２８
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.110 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (desk top type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)
SCANNER
ＡＮＴ
PM UNIT
TB4201 TB4401 NKE-1087
TB4101　
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD
1
NJU-64
2 RBVDE VD + 1
2 VDIN 1E
3 ETIY 3 VD - 2
3 TRIGIN 1 ２ TB104
4 ETIY 3E TRIG + 3 TB101
4 TRIGIN 1E
5 SVD 1 TRIG - 4 ３ 1 PTI
5 BPIN 1 ３ 1 BP +
6 SVD 1E BP + 5 2 PTE
6 BPIN 1E 2 BP - BLU
7 ETIY 1 BP - 6 ４ 3 LVR
7 BZIN 1 ４ 3 BZ + RED
8 ETIY 1E BZ + 7 4 PMS
8 BZIN 1E 4 BZ - BLK
9 EXφA 1 BZ - 8 ２ 5 E
9 MTRIN 1+ ORG 5 TRIG + WHT
10 EXφA 1E MTR + 9 6 TXI
10 MTRIN 1- WHT 6 TRIG -
11 EXφB 1 MTR - 10 ORG 7 TXE
11 MTRIN 1E 7 MTR +
12 EXφB 1E MTRE 11 WHT
12 PWRIN 1+ 8 MTR -
13 EXφZ 1 (NC) 12
13 PWRIN 1E RED 9 MTRE
14 EXφZ 1E +48V 13 1
14 PWROUT 1 BLU (OPTION) 10 VD +
15 SVD 2 +48VG 14
15 PWROUT 1E 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 11 VD - TB105　　
RED HEATER POWER U
17 VDOUT 1E 17 ETIY 2 AC100V1φ
V J8
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E
19 EXφA 2 UTH 1 PTI
19 TRIGOUT 1E
20 BPOUT 1 20 EXφA 2E TB303 2 PTE
WHT U 1 1 BLU 3 LVR
21 BPOUT 1E 21 EXφB 2
V 2 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE MCNT + RED 4 PMS
22 BZOUT 1 22 EXφB 2E
BLK (NC) 3 H-2695110056 MCNT - BLK 5 E
23 BZOUT 1E 23 EXφZ 2
(JRC SUPPLY) M +24V 1 WHT 6 TXI
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EXφZ 2E TB102
TB302 M +24VG 1 7 TXE
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY RED +48V
26 ITIYE U 1 YEL BLU 2 8
26 MTORUT 1E +48VG
27 EXφAIN V 2 GRN
28 EXφBIN W 3 BRN YEL U1
29 EXφZEN GRN V1
30 EXφINGND BRN W1
H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL TB301
To ECDIS 250V-TTYCS-4 U 1 YEL
ARPADATA V 2 GRN
W 3 BRN
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
2 NAV1TX - TB4601
DGPS 250V-TTYCS-1 3 NAV1RX + 1 ARPAALM + U YEL
4 NAV1RX - 2 ARPAALM - V GRN
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM + W BRN
POWER
CBD-1661
DLOG
19 NSKTX +
21 NET -S 19 COMSG
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR
21 COMRTS
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI
TB4801
1 SFA +
2 SFA -
3 SFS +
5 PULS 1+
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 1 1/R1
2 2/S1 U
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2 V
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3 W
10 SYNC 1- 5 MAIN POWER
5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ AC220V/230V　3φ
6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.111 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (self standing type AC 220V/230V 3f)
SCANNER
PM UNIT
ＡＮＴ NKE-1087
ISW IN/OUT EXT RADAR TB4101　 NJU-64　　　
TB4201 TB4401 1
VD + 1
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD
VD - 2 TB104
2 VDIN 1E 2 RBVDE ２ TB101
TRIG + 3
3 TRIGIN 1 3 ETIY 3 ３ 1 PTI
TRIG - 4 1 BP +
4 TRIGIN 1E 4 ETIY 3E ３ 2 PTE
BP + 5 2 BP - BLU
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 ４ 3 LVR
BP - 6 3 BZ + RED
6 BPIN 1E 6 SVD 1E ４ 4 PMS
BZ + 7 4 BZ - BLK
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 ２ 5 E
BZ - 8 5 TRIG + WHT
8 BZIN 1E 8 ETIY 1E ORG 6 TXI
MTR + 9 6 TRIG -
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 EXφA 1 WHT ORG 7 TXE
MTR - 10 7 MTR +
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E WHT
MTRE 11 8 MTR -
(NC) 12 9 MTRE
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 EXφB 1E RED 1
+48V 13 10 VD +
+48VG 14 (OPTION) 11 VD - TB105　　
14 PWROUT 1 14 EXφZ 1E 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
15 PWROUT 1E 15 SVD 2 HEATER POWER U
16 SVD 2E AC100V1φ V J8
16 VDOUT 1
RED 17 ETIY 2 UTH
17 VDOUT 1E 1 PTI
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E TB303 2 PTE
19 EXφA 2 U 1 YEL 1 BLU 3 LVR
19 TRIGOUT 1E
20 EXφA 2E V 2 GRN 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE MCNT + RED 4 PMS
20 BPOUT 1
WHT 21 EXφB 2 H-2695110056 MCNT - BLK
22 EXφB 2E (JRC SUPPLY) M +24V 1 WHT 6 TXI
22 BZOUT 1 TB102
BLK 23 EXφZ 2 TB302 M +24VG 1
23 BZOUT 1E RED 7 TXE
+48V 2
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EXφZ 2E U 1 BLU 8
+48VG
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY V 2
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE W 3 YEL U
27 EXφAIN GRN V
28 EXφBIN
29 EXφZEN
30 EXφINGND TB301
U 1 YEL
V 2 GRN
W 3
ARPADATA
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
U
V
DGPS 250V-TTYCS-1 3 NAV1RX + 1 ARPAALM + BRN
W
3 SYSALM + POWER
5 NAV2TX
4 SYSALM - CBD-1661
6 NAV2TX -
DLOG
19 NSKTX +
21 NET -S 19 COMSG
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR
21 COMRTS
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI
TB4801
1 SFA +
2 SFA -
3 SFS + 0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
4 SFS - ＧＹＲＯ U
5 PULS 1+ V
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 W MAIN POWER
1 1/R1
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1
8 PULS 2- 3 AC220V/230V　1φ
3 3/S2
9 SYNC 1+ 4 AC100V/110V　1φ
4 /S3
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.112 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (self standing type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)
TB4201 TB4401
1 VDIN 1 1 RBVD
2 RBVDE ＡＮＴ
2 VDIN 1E
TB4101　 SCANNER
3 TRIGIN 1 3 ETIY 3
4 ETIY 3E VD + 1 1 PM UNIT
4 TRIGIN 1E
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 VD - 2 NKE-1087 NJU-64　　　
6 SVD 1E TRIG + 3 ２
6 BPIN 1E
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 TRIG - 4
8 ETIY 1E BP + 5 ３
8 BZIN 1E TB104
9 EXφA 1 TB101
9 MTRIN 1+ BP - 6
４３ 1 PTI
10 MTRIN 1- 10 EXφA 1E BZ + 7 1 BP +
2 PTE
11 MTRIN 1E 11 EXφB 1 BZ - 8 2 BP - BLU
ORG ４ 3 LVR
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 EXφB 1E MTR + 9 3 BZ + RED
WHT 4 PMS
13 PWRIN 1E 13 EXφZ 1 MTR - 10 4 BZ - BLK
２ 5 E
14 PWROUT 1 14 EXφZ 1E MTRE 11 5 TRIG + WHT 6 TXI
15 PWROUT 1E 15 SVD 2 (NC) 12 6 TRIG -
RED ORG 7 TXE
16 VDOUT 1 16 SVD 2E +48V 13 7 MTR +
RED 17 ETIY 2 BLU WHT 8 MTR -
17 VDOUT 1E +48VG 14
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E 9 MTRE
19 EXφA 2 1 10 VD +
19 TRIGOUT 1E
20 BPOUT 1 20 EXφA 2E (OPTION) 11 VD - TB105　　
WHT 21 EXφB 2 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
21 BPOUT 1E TB304 U
22 EXφB 2E HEATER POWER
22 BZOUT 1 1 1 V J8
BLK AC100V1φ
23 BZOUT 1E 23 EXφZ 2 2 2 UTH 1 PTI
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EXφZ 2E 3 3 2 PTE
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY 1 BLU 3 LVR
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE MCNT + RED 4 PMS
27 EXφAIN H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY) BLK
YEL MCNT - 5 E
28 EXφBIN U WHT
GRN TB102 M +24V 1 6 TXI
29 EXφZEN V
BRN RED M +24VG 1 7 TXE
30 EXφINGND W +48V
BLU 2 8
H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL POWER +48VG
CBD-1661
To ECDIS 250V-TTYCS-4 YEL U1
ARPADATA GRN V1
BRN W1
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
2 NAV1TX - TB4601
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM +
DLOG
19 NSKTX +
21 NET -S 19 COMSG
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR
21 COMRTS
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI
TB4801
U
2 SFA - V MAIN POWER
3 SFS + W AC220V/230V　3φ
5 PULS 1+
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 1 1/R1
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.113 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (desk top type AC220V/230V 3f)
TB4201 TB4401 ＡＮＴ
1 RBVD TB4101　 SCANNER
1 VDIN 1
2 RBVDE VD + 1 PM UNIT
2 VDIN 1E 1
3 TRIGIN 1 3 ETIY 3 VD - 2 NKE-1087
4 TRIGIN 1E 4 ETIY 3E TRIG + 3 ２ NJU-64
5 BPIN 1 5 SVD 1 TRIG - 4
6 SVD 1E BP + ３
6 BPIN 1E 5 TB104
7 BZIN 1 7 ETIY 1 BP - 6 TB101
8 ETIY 1E ４３ 1 PTI
8 BZIN 1E BZ + 7 1 BP +
9 EXφA 1 2 PTE
9 MTRIN 1+ BZ - 8 2 BP - BLU
10 EXφA 1E ORG ４ 3 LVR
10 MTRIN 1- MTR + 9 3 BZ + RED
11 EXφB 1 WHT 4 PMS
11 MTRIN 1E MTR - 10 4 BZ - BLK
12 EXφB 1E ２ 5 E
12 PWRIN 1+ MTRE 11 5 TRIG + WHT
13 EXφZ 1 6 TXI
13 PWRIN 1E (NC) 12 6 TRIG -
14 EXφZ 1E RED ORG 7 TXE
14 PWROUT 1 +48V 13 7 MTR +
15 PWROUT 1E 15 SVD 2 +48VG 14 BLU WHT 8 MTR -
16 VDOUT 1 16 SVD 2E 9 MTRE
RED 17 ETIY 2 1
17 VDOUT 1E TB304 10 VD +
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 ETIY 2E (OPTION) 11 VD -
1 1 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 TB105　　
19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 EXφA 2
2 2 HEATER POWER U
WHT 3 3 AC100V1φ V J8
21 BPOUT 1E 21 EXφB 2
UTH 1 PTI
22 BZOUT 1 22 EXφB 2E
BLK 23 EXφZ 2 2 PTE
23 BZOUT 1E YEL 1 BLU
24 EXφZ 2E 3 LVR
24 MTROUT 1+ U 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE RED
GRN MCNT + 4 PMS
25 MTROUT 1- 25 ITIY V H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY) BLK
MCNT - 5 E
26 MTORUT 1E 26 ITIYE W WHT
TB102 M +24V 1 6 TXI
27 EXφAIN POWER
RED M +24VG 1 7 TXE
28 EXφBIN CBD-1661 +48V
BLU 2 8
29 EXφZEN +48VG
30 EXφINGND
YEL U
GRN V
ARPADATA
ALARM MONITORING
TB4501
2 NAV1TX - TB4601
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM +
DLOG
19 NSKTX +
21 NET -S 19 COMSG
22 TET -C 20 COMDSR
21 COMRTS
ＬＯＧ 22 COMRI
TB4801
0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
1 SFA + U MAIN POWER
2 SFA - V AC220V/230V　1φ
3 SFS + W AC100V/110V　1φ
5 PULS 1+
PULSE 2
6 PULS 1- 1 1 1/R1
7 PULS 2+ 2 2 2/S1
8 PULS 2- 3 3 3/S2
9 SYNC 1+ 4 4 /S3
10 SYNC 1- 5 5 5/R2
11 SYNC 2+ 6 (NC)
12 SYNC 2-
250V-MPYCYS-7
GYRO
Fig.114 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (desk top type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)
DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263) SCANNER (NKE-1079)
B101
JAM-9933-SA:110V_1φ, 220V_3φ POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)
U TB701 U0 M
PB7 U1/TB102
NFB701 V TB701 V0
U TB701 S1
W TB701 W0 V1/TB102
V TB701
W TB701 U J701 W1/TB102 SFA SWITCHI
V J701
PB8 PS(POWER On/Off) J3

TX/STBY J3
CONTROL PWRALM J3 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3037)

CIRCUIT PSMON J4
P+12V
+24V J2 U1/TB202
+24V V1/TB202
W1/TB202
+3.3V On/Off
RELAY CIRCUIT
250V CNT +5V On/Off
CSC-632
±15V
POWER SUPLAY
+12V
PB1 P+12V U0/TB202
CBD-1682
DC250V P+12V J2 V0/TB202
S701
W0/TB202 +5V
100
PB2 +48V
200 +48V J2
INSUPUTVOLTAGE
+48V
Fig.115 Primary Power Supply Block Diagram of Radar,
SELECTION TB203
PB3 +5V
DC24V TB701 +5V J1
J2
PB4 +3.3V
+3.3V J1
+3.3V
AC100/110V
+5V
Type JMA-9933-SA
AC220/230V
MONTOR
CPU CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC-
J2 U
±12V J1 NWZ-158
PB5 ±12V V
RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSIN
J2
1218
CDC-1029
CIRCUIT
KEBOARD UNIT NCE-7721

CCK-901
J207
±12V
+3.3V
PWRALM
P+12V
+5V
P+12V
PWRALM
±12V
TX/STBY
+3.3V
+3.3V
+24V
+48V
INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT
+24V
+48V
+5V
+5V
PS
PS
NQE-3141
+5V (OPTION)
CN1 J4016 J4001 J4001 TB4101 J4048
NSK/LOG IF CIRCUIT +3.3V P+12V
J4007
J3101
J4048
J4303
MOTHER BOARD CQC-1094 CMJ-462A ±12V TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949
B101
POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)
JAM-9932-SA:110V_1φ, 220V_3φ
U TB701 U0 M
NFB70 PB7 U0/TB102 S1
V TB701 V0
U TB701 1
W TB701 W0 V0/TB102 SFA SWITCHI
V TB701
W U J701 W0/TB102
TB701
V J701

TX/STBY J3
U0
CONTROL PWRALM J3
V0
CIRCUIT PSMON J4
RELAY CIRCUIT
W0
P+12V
CSC-632
+24V J2
+24V
U1
+3.3V On/Off V1
250V CNT +5V On/Off W1
PB1 P+12V
DC250V P+12V J2
S701
100 ±15V
PB2 +48V POWER SUPLAY +12V
200 +48V J2
CBD-1682
INSUPUTVOLTAGE
+48V
SELECTION +5V
TB102
PB3 +5V
DC24V TB701 +5V J1
J2
PB4 +3.3V
+3.3V J1
+3.3V
AC100/110V
+5V
AC220/230V
MONTOR
J2 U
NWZ-158
Type JMA-9932-SA
±12V J1
PB5 ±12V V
J2
1218
CDC-1029
CIRCUIT

CCK-901
J207
±12V
+3.3V
PWRALM
P+12V
+5V
P+12V
PWRALM
±12V
TX/STBY
+3.3V
+3.3V
+24V
+48V
INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT
+24V
+48V
+5V
+5V
PS
PS
NQE-3141
CN1 +5V J4016 J4001 J4001 TB4101 J4048 (OPTION)
J4007
J3101
J4048
J4303
B101
POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)
JAM-9923-9XA: 220V/230V_3φ
JAM-9923-7XA:100V/110V_1φ, 220V/230V_1φ, 220V/230V_3φ U0
NFB70 PB7 U TB701 U1/TB102 M
V TB701 V0
U TB701 1
S1
W TB701 W0 V1/TB102
V TB701
W TB701 U J701 W1/TB102
V J701 SFA SWITCHI

TX/STBY J3
CONTROL PWRALM J3 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3028)

CIRCUIT PSMON J4
P+12V
+24V J2 U1/TB202
+24V V1/TB202
W1/TB202
+3.3V On/Off
RELAY CIRCUIT
250V CNT +5V On/Off
CSC-632
±15V
POWER SUPLAY
+12V
PB1 P+12V U0/TB202
CBD-1645
DC250V P+12V J2 V0/TB202
S701
W0/TB202 +5V
100
PB2 +48V
200 +48V J2
INSUPUTVOLTAG
E +48V
SELECTION TB203
PB3 +5V
DC24V TB701 +5V J1
J2
PB4 +3.3V
+3.3V J1
+3.3V
AC100/110V
+5V
AC220/230V
Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
MONTOR
J2 U
±12V J1 NWZ-158
PB5 ±12V V
J2
1218
CDC-1029
CIRCUIT

CCK-901
J207
±12V
+3.3V
PWRALM
P+12V
+5V
P+12V
PWRALM
±12V
TX/STBY
+3.3V
+3.3V
+24V
+48V
INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT
+24V
+48V
+5V
+5V
PS
PS
NQE-3141
J4007
J3101
J4048
J4303
JAM-9922-9XA: 220V/230V_3φ DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263) SCANNER (NKE-1087)
JAM-9922-6XA:100V/110V_1φ, 220V/230V_1φ, 220V/230V_3φ POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)
B101
U TB701 U0 M
NFB70 PB7 U0/TB102 S1
V TB701 V0
U TB701 1
W TB701 W0 V0/TB102 SFA SWITCHI
V TB701
W U J701 W0/TB102
TB701
V J701

TX/STBY J3
U0
CONTROL PWRALM J3
V0
CIRCUIT PSMON J4
RELAY CIRCUIT
W0
P+12V
CSC-632
+24V J2
+24V
U1
+3.3V On/Off V1
250V CNT +5V On/Off W1
PB1 P+12V
DC250V P+12V J2
S701
100 ±15V
PB2 +48V POWER SUPLAY +12V
200 +48V J2
CBD-1645
INSUPUTVOLTAG
E +48V
+5V
SELECTION TB102
PB3 +5V
DC24V TB701 +5V J1
J2
PB4 +3.3V
+3.3V J1
+3.3V
AC100/110V
+5V
AC220/230V
Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA
MONTOR
J2 U
±12V J1 NWZ-158
PB5 ±12V V
J2
1218
CDC-1029
CIRCUIT

CCK-901
J207
±12V
+3.3V
PWRALM
P+12V
+5V
P+12V
PWRALM
±12V
TX/STBY
INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT
+3.3V
+3.3V
+24V
+48V
+24V
+48V
+5V
+5V
PS
PS
NQE-3141
J4007
J3101
J4048
J4303
Type NKE-1079
Type NKE-1079-D
Fig.122 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type
NKE-1075/1075A (230V AC,3-phase)
Fig.123 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type
NKE-1075/1075A (230V AC,1-phase)
Type NKE-1089-7/9 (1-phase)
Fig.128 Internal Connection Diagram of
Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3037/3037A
Fig.129 Internal Connection Diagram of
Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3028
Fig.130 Internal Connection Diagram of Display Unit,
Type NCD-4263
Fig.131 Internal Connection Diagram of CRT Monitor of Display Unit,
Type NCD-4263
HI VOLTAGE SAVE CIRCUIT
AC100/230V
1φ/1φ,3φ HI VOLTAGE SELCT INTERSWITCH=1A
BLEAKER LINE FILTER P+12V 3.5A
CIRCUIT KEBOAD UNIT=2.5A
3.5A SCANNER
+48V±3V X BAND_2.5A, S BAND_3.0A
VOLTAGE SELCT
CIRCUIT
MONITOR
AC100/230V MAX15A
+5.0V (10A)
1φ RADAR SIGNAL PROCCESSIN = MAX 9.3A
MONITOR
CPU CONTROL CIRCUT = MAX 5.4A
POWER
SCANNER
MOTOR
POWER MAX 10A
AC100/230V +3.3V (8A)
1φ/1φ,3φ SCANNER RADAR SIGNAL PROCCESSIN = MAX 4.7A
NSK UNIT = MAX 1.0A
MOTOR POWER POWER CONTROL
CIRCUIT
+12V 2A 1.37A
-12V 1A 0.7A
FAN ALM　POWER CONTROL
Fig.132 Block Diagram of Radar,

Type JMA-9933-SA and JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
Fig.133 List of NSK and LOG Select Switches of Display
Unit, Type NCD-4263
Fig.134 Setting Table of Speed LOG Select Switches of
Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
Fig.135 Setting Table of Gyro Compass and Gyro Select Switches
ofDisplay Unit, Type NCD-4263
DISPLAY1 DISPLAY2
NCD-4263 NCD-4263
TB4201 TB4201
ISW IN/OUT ISW IN/OUT
1
VDIN 1 1 1 VDIN 1
VDIN 1E 2 2 VDIN 1E
BLU
TRIGIN 1 3 3 TRIGIN 1
TRIGIN 1E 4 4 TRIGIN 1E
YEL
BPIN 1 5 5 BPIN 1
BPIN 1E 6 6 BPIN 1E
GRN
BZIN 1 7 7 BZIN 1
BZIN 1E 8 8 BZIN 1E
BLU-BLU
MTRIN 1+ 9 9 MTRIN 1+
BLU-WHT
MTRIN 1- 10 10 MTRIN 1-
MTRIN 1E 11 11 MTRIN 1E
ORG
PWRIN 1+ 12 12 PWRIN 1+
BLK
PWRIN 1E 13 13 PWRIN 1E
PNK
PWROUT 1 14 14 PWROUT 1
BRN
PWROUT 1E 15 15 PWROUT 1E
2
VDOUT 1 16 16 VDOUT 1
VDOUT 1E 17 17 VDOUT 1E
RED
TRIGOUT 1 18 18 TRIGOUT 1
TRIGOUT 1E 19 19 TRIGOUT 1E
PUR
BPOUT 1 20 20 BPOUT 1
BPOUT 1E 21 21 BPOUT 1E
WHT
BZOUT 1 22 22 BZOUT 1
BZOUT 1E 23 23 BZOUT 1E
YEL-YEL
MTROUT 1+ 24 24 MTROUT 1+
YEL-WHT
MTROUT 1- 25 25 MTROUT 1-
MTORUT 1E 26 26 MTORUT 1E
H-2695111153
(JRC SUPPLY)
Fig.136 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 2-unit Interswitchse System, Type•@NQE-3141-2

DISPLAY1 DISPLAY2 DISPLAY3
NCD-4263 BCD-4263 NCD-4263
TB4201 TB4201 TB4201
1 1 1
1 VDIN 1 1 VDIN 1 1 VDIN 1
2 VDIN 1E 2 VDIN 1E 2 VDIN 1E
BLU BLU BLU
3 TRIGIN 1 3 TRIGIN 1 3 TRIGIN 1
4 TRIGIN 1E 4 TRIGIN 1E 4 TRIGIN 1E
YEL YEL YEL
5 BPIN 1 5 BPIN 1 5 BPIN 1
6 BPIN 1E 6 BPIN 1E 6 BPIN 1E
GRN GRN GRN
7 BZIN 1 7 BZIN 1 7 BZIN 1
8 BZIN 1E 8 BZIN 1E 8 BZIN 1E
BLU-BLU BLU-BLU BLU-BLU
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 MTRIN 1+ 9 MTRIN 1+
BLU-WHT BLU-WHT BLU-WHT
10 MTRIN 1- 10 MTRIN 1- 10 MTRIN 1-
11 MTRIN 1E 11 MTRIN 1E 11 MTRIN 1E
ORG ORG ORG
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 PWRIN 1+ 12 PWRIN 1+
BLK BLK BLK
13 PWRIN 1E 13 PWRIN 1E 13 PWRIN 1E
PNK PNK PNK
14 PWROUT 1 14 PWROUT 1 14 PWROUT 1
BRN BRN BRN
15 PWROUT 1E 15 PWROUT 1E 15 PWROUT 1E
2 2 2
16 VDOUT 1 16 VDOUT 1 16 VDOUT 1
17 VDOUT 1E 17 VDOUT 1E 17 VDOUT 1E
RED RED RED
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 TRIGOUT 1 18 TRIGOUT 1
19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 TRIGOUT 1E
PUR PUR PUR
20 BPOUT 1 20 BPOUT 1 20 BPOUT 1
21 BPOUT 1E 21 BPOUT 1E 21 BPOUT 1E
WHT WHT WHT
22 BZOUT 1 22 BZOUT 1 22 BZOUT 1
23 BZOUT 1E 23 BZOUT 1E 23 BZOUT 1E
YEL-YEL YEL-YEL YEL-YEL
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 MTROUT 1+ 24 MTROUT 1+
YEL-WHT YEL-WHT YEL-WHT
25 MTROUT 1- 25 MTROUT 1- 25 MTROUT 1-
26 MTORUT 1E 26 MTORUT 1E 26 MTORUT 1E
NKE-3141-4
CCL-304
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3

TB911 TB912 TB913 TB914 TB915 TB916
1 2 1 2 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
BLU
2 RED
2 BLU
2 RED
2 BLU
2 RED
2
3 3 3 3 3 3
YEL
4 PUR
4 YEL
4 PUR
4 YEL
4 PUR
4
5 5 5 5 5 5
GRN
6 WHT
6 GRN
6 WHT
6 GRN
6 WHT
6
7 7 7 7 7 7
BLU-BLU
8 YEL-YEL
8 BLU-BLU
8 YEL-YEL
8 BLU-BLU
8 YEL-YEL
8
BLU-WHT
9 YEL-WHT
9 BLU-WHT
9 YEL-WHT
9 BLU-WHT
9 YEL-WHT
9
10 10 10 10 10 10
ORG
11 11 ORG
11 11 ORG
11 11
BLK
12 BLK
12 BLK
12
PNK
13 PNK
13 PNK
13
BRN
14 BRN
14 BRN
14
15 15 15

Fig.137 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 4-unit Interswitches System, Type NQE-3141-4

J2 P902 H-7ZCRD0972 P903 J903
1 1
-15V -15V
2 2
H-7ZCRD0971 J1 CBD-1675 GND GND
1 1 3 3
VIN+ GND GND
2 2 4 4 CCL-304
VIN- +15V +15V
5 5
GND GND
6 6
Terminal board 5V 5V
J15(ISW)
CH-1 CH-2
CH-3 CH-4
CQD-1973 CQD-1973
ＴＢ911
ＴＢ912
ＴＢ913
ＴＢ914
ＴＢ915
ＴＢ916
ＴＢ917
ＴＢ918
J3 J3
1
1
26
26
H-7ZCRD0970A
H-7ZCRD0970A
1
1
26
26
Fig.138(1) Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141-2

Terminal board Terminal board
J4(ISW-1CH) J5(ISW-1CH)
CBA-357 CN2 P902 H-7ZCRD0920 P903 J903
CB901 1 1
CN1 -15V -15V
H-7ZCRD0919 P901 2 2
LINE LOAD 1 GND GND
AC(L) 3 3
A B 3 GND GND
AC(N) 4 4
C 5 +15V +15V
FG 5 5
C901 C902 C903 D GND GND
6 6
5V 5V
3 4
LF901
E
H-7ZCRD0921 P904 J904
1
AC(L)
2
FG
3
1 2 AC(N) CCL-304
4
TB901
5
U V TRTP+
TE901 6
AC100V-240V
7
TRTP-
8
9
E
CD901 10
POWLED
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
TB 911 TB 912 TB 913 TB 914 TB 915 TB 916 TB 917 TB 918

B901 1.VDIN 1.VDOUT
P905 J905 2.VDINE 2.VDOUTE

3.TRGIN 3.TRGOUT
1 4.TRGINE 4.TRGOUTE
FANV
S 5.BPIN 5.BPOUT
2
FANE 6.BPINE 6.BPOUTE
3 7.BZIN 7.BZOUT
FANPLS 8.BZINE 8.BZOUTE
9.MTRIN+ 9.MTROUT+
10.MTRIN- 10.MTROUT-
11.MTRINE 11.MTROUTE
12.PWRIN
13.RWRINE
14.PWROUT
15.PWROUTE
P909 J909
R901 1
2
TO TO TO
DISPLAY1 DISPLAY2 DISPLAY3
NCD-4263 NCD-4263 NCD-4263
TB4201 TB4201 TB4201
Fig.138(2) Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141-4

Nittochi Nishi-shinjuku bldg
HEAD OFFICE & Akasaka Twin Tower (Main),
SALES DEPT.
10-1,Nishi-Shinjuku
17-22, Akasaka 2-chome, Minato-ku,
6-chome,Shinjuku-ku
Tokyo 107-8432 JAPAN Tokyo 160-8328
Japan
Phone : +81-3-3584-8711
Phone:+81-3-3348-0151
Fax : +81-3-3584-8715
Fax
Telex :+81-3-3348-3648
: 0242-5420 JRCTOK J
MAIN PLANT 1-1,Shimorenjaku 5-chome,Mitaka-shi
1-1, Shimorenjaku 5-chome, Mitaka-shi,
Tokyo 181-8510 JAPAN
Tokyo 181-8510 Japan
Phone : +81-422-45-9111
Phone:+81-422-45-9111
Fax :+81-422-45-9110
Fax : +81-422-45-9110
Telex : 02822-351 JRCMTK J
FIRST EDITION
ARP 2004
7ZPRD0606
CODE No. 7ZPRD0572 JRC

JMA 9900 Instruction

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JMA 9900 Instruction

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JMA 9900 Instruction

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MARINE RADAR

Scanner Unit Type NKE-1089-9(9 Feet）

Transmitter-receiver Unit Type NTG-3028

Scanner Unit Type NKE-1087-9（9 Feet）

Before Operation .......................................................................... ii

Cautions to be Used during Operation ................................... iii

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION

EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE ..................................................... ix

GLOSSARY ................................................................................ xxi

1. GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

2. NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL

4. MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING

5. OPERATION OF ARPA AND AIS

6. TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY

8.5 ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................8-23

8.6 SETTING ...........................................................................................8-34

Fig.101 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA and JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

Use as a temporary marker

Fig.1.6 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF

Fig.1.14 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9932-SA

Fig.1.15 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923-7XA

Fig.1.16 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923-9XA

Fig.1.17 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9922-6XA

Fig.1.18 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9922-9XA

NKE-1079 SCANNER UNT

SHIP'S MAIN COAXIAL CABLE

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT

Fig.1.13 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

NKE-1075 SCANNER UNIT

SHIP'S MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

NKE-1089-7 SCANNER UNIT

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

NCD-4263 DISPAY UNIT

Fig.1.15 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

NKE-1089-9 SCANNER UNIT １

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT

１ NKE-1087-6 SCANNER UNIT

SHIP'S MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

Fig.1.17 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

NKE-1087-9 SCANNER UNIT

SHIP'S MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

Fig.1.18 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES.......................2-1

Range scale 350 000 010

scanner only) HL OFF OWN N 35°35.0000'

DAY AIS/ HL DATA

① [POWER] (Power Supply) Switch

② [PWR ACK] (Power Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch

③ [TX/STBY] (Operation) Switch

④ [ALARM ACK] (Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch

⑤ [TUNE] (Turning) Control

⑥ [RAIN] (Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression) Control